OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
U.S.
2021 RAM 2500/3500
OWNER’S MANUAL
2021 RAM 2500/3500
SECOND EDITION V1
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app,
go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself
unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular
telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired
with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated
non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/
or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting
www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and
your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................9
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................. 16
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................................101
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................136
5 MULTIMEDIA .............................................................................................................................. 257
6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................305
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................370
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................394
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................473
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................487
11 INDEX ..............................................................................................................................................491
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
Symbols Key..........................................................10
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS..........................10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ........10
Symbol Glossary...................................................11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ......................................................................16
Key Fob......................................................... 16
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................19
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................20
Keyless Enter-N-Go Ignition ........................ 20
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) ...21
How To Use Remote Start ...........................22
To Exit Remote Start Mode ......................... 23
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — If
Equipped ......................................................23
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped ......................................................23
Remote Start Abort Message......................24
REMOTE START— IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) ..........24
How To Use Remote Start ...........................24
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...25
To Arm The System...................................... 25
To Disarm The System.................................26
Rearming Of The System............................. 26
Security System Manual Override .............. 26
DOORS .................................................................. 26
Manual Door Locks...................................... 26
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ............... 27
Power Side Steps — If Equipped................. 28
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry (If
Equipped) .................................................... 28
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit — If
Equipped ...................................................... 30
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ......... 30
Child-Protection Door Lock ........................ 30
STEERING WHEEL ................................................ 31
Tilt Steering Column .................................... 31
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 32
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION....................... 32
Introducing Voice Recognition .................... 32
Basic Voice Commands............................... 33
Get Started................................................... 33
Additional Information................................. 34
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED... 34
Programming The Memory Feature............ 34
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory ........................... 35
Memory Position Recall............................... 35
SEATS ................................................................... 35
Manual Front Seat Adjustment................... 36
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment ................... 37
Power Driver Seat Adjustment — If
Equipped ...................................................... 37
Heated Seats — If Equipped ....................... 39
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped................... 40
Head Restraints .......................................... 40
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF
EQUIPPED .............................................................43
MIRRORS ..............................................................43
Inside Rearview Mirror ................................ 43
Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped..... 45
Outside Mirrors ........................................... 45
Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped.................................... 46
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...................... 46
Power Folding Outside Mirrors For
Standard And Trailer Tow — If Equipped.... 46
Power Convex Mirror Switch — If
Equipped ...................................................... 47
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped ......... 48
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................... 48
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If
Equipped ...................................................... 48
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED ...........................48
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®.................................................. 49
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....... 49
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device .............. 49
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener................................................. 50
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device ................................. 51
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink®
Button........................................................... 51
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 51
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................52
Headlight Switch..........................................52
Multifunction Lever...................................... 53
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If
Equipped ......................................................53
High/Low Beam Switch ...............................53
Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control — If Equipped ..................................53
Flash-To-Pass ...............................................54
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .........54
Directional LED Headlamp System — If
Equipped ......................................................54
Parking Lights And Panel Lights ................. 54
Automatic Headlights With Wipers ............. 54
Headlight Delay............................................55
Lights-On Reminder..................................... 55
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .................. 55
Turn Signals ................................................ 55
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............. 55
Cargo Lights/Trailer Spotter Lights With
Bed Lights — If Equipped.............................55
Battery Saver................................................56
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................56
Courtesy Lights ............................................ 56
Illuminated Entry .........................................57
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .............58
Windshield Wiper Operation ......................58
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........... 59
CLIMATE CONTROLS ........................................... 59
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions .............................................. 60
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions...................................................... 63
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ....... 65
Climate Voice Recognition .......................... 66
Operating Tips ............................................. 66
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ............. 68
Storage ......................................................... 68
USB/AUX Control ........................................ 74
Electrical Power Outlets .............................. 75
Power Inverter — If Equipped ..................... 77
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ........ 78
WINDOWS ............................................................ 79
Power Windows ........................................... 79
Automatic Window Features....................... 80
Reset Auto-Up ............................................. 80
Window Lockout Switch .............................. 80
Power Sliding Rear Window — If
Equipped ..................................................... 81
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If
Equipped ...................................................... 81
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 81
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .................... 81
Single Pane Power Sunroof — If
Equipped ...................................................... 81
HOOD .................................................................... 83
To Open The Hood ...................................... 83
To Close The Hood....................................... 83
TAILGATE ...............................................................84
Opening ........................................................ 84
Closing.......................................................... 84
Tailgate Removal......................................... 84
Bed Step — If Equipped............................... 86
PICKUP BOX .........................................................87
Cargo Camera — If Equipped ...................... 88
Bed Rail Tie-Down System — If
Equipped ..................................................... 89
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED.....................................90
Locking And Unlocking RamBox................. 90
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins....................... 91
RamBox Safety Warning ............................. 93
Bed Divider — If Equipped........................... 93
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS .............................................95
Camper Applications ................................... 95
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED.....95
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal................ 95
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation............ 98
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning..............100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GAS
ENGINE................................................................ 101
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
Descriptions — Gas Engine .......................102
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GAS
ENGINE................................................................ 104
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
Gas Engine .................................................105
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL
ENGINE ............................................................... 106
Base Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
Diesel Engine .............................................107
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL
ENGINE................................................................ 109
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
Diesel Engine .............................................110
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ................... 111
Instrument Cluster Display Controls.........111
Oil Life Reset .............................................112
Display Menu Items...................................113
Diesel Messages And Warnings — 6.7L
Cummins Diesel Engine ............................118
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ................................122
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ............... 123
Red Warning Lights....................................123
Yellow Warning Lights ...............................126
Yellow Indicator Lights...............................130
Green Indicator Lights...............................132
White Indicator Lights................................133
Blue Indicator Lights..................................133
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .... 133
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity................................134
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS.........................................................134
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE
ENGINE ...............................................................136
Automatic Transmission............................136
Tip Start Feature .......................................136
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition...................137
Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button...............................................137
AutoPark — Rotary Shifter and Eight-
Speed Transmission Only..........................138
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or
−30°C) ......................................................140
After Starting..............................................140
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE .....140
Automatic Transmission............................140
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition...................141
Extreme Cold Weather ..............................143
Normal Starting Procedure — Engine
Manifold Air Temperature Above 66°F
(19°C) ........................................................143
Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Air
Temperature 0°F To 66°F (–18°C to
19°C)..........................................................143
Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Air
Temperature Below 0°F (-18°C)..............144
Starting Fluids............................................145
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE ....... 146
Cold Weather Precautions ........................147
Engine Idling .............................................149
Noise ..........................................................150
Stopping The Engine .................................150
Idle Shutdown............................................151
Programmable Maximum Vehicle
Speed .........................................................151
Operating Precautions ..............................151
Cooling System Tips ..................................152
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED........ 152
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE ............................................ 153
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE.................................................. 153
PARKING BRAKE .............................................. 154
DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE — ENGINE
BRAKING (IF EQUIPPED) .................................. 155
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .......................... 156
Ignition Park Interlock ...............................157
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System .......................................................157
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped ....................................................157
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped ....................................................162
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED ........... 168
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION ........................ 168
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED .......................................................... 168
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Eight
Speed Transmission) — If Equipped ........169
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Six
Speed Transmission) — If Equipped .........172
Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If
Equipped ....................................................175
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.... 177
Description .................................................177
Air Suspension Modes...............................178
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......178
Operation....................................................179
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON
MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED) ......................... 179
STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER
WAGON ONLY .................................................... 180
SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON
ONLY ................................................................... 182
Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle
Characteristics ...........................................182
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand ...............183
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other
High Points)................................................184
Hill Climbing ...............................................185
Driving Through Water...............................187
Airing Down For Off-Road Driving .............188
Vehicle Recovery........................................188
After Driving Off-Road................................190
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL .......................... 191
WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY (IF
EQUIPPED) .........................................................191
Things To Know Before Using Your
Winch..........................................................191
Understanding The Features Of Your
Winch..........................................................192
Winch Accessories ....................................193
Operating Your Winch ...............................193
Rigging Techniques ..................................199
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — GASOLINE
ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED) ......................................200
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF
EQUIPPED ..........................................................200
Cruise Control — If Equipped ....................200
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped ....................................................202
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................................................213
ParkSense Sensors ...................................213
ParkSense Warning Display......................213
ParkSense Display.....................................213
Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear
ParkSense..................................................216
Service The ParkSense Front/Rear Park
Assist System.............................................216
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............217
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....217
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 218
LaneSense Operation................................218
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................219
LaneSense Warning Message..................219
Changing LaneSense Status.....................220
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............. 221
AUX Camera — If Equipped ......................223
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED........................................................... 224
AUX Camera — If Equipped ......................229
ENGINE RUNAWAY — DIESEL ENGINE............ 230
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE
ENGINE ............................................................... 230
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ................231
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL
ENGINE ............................................................... 232
Diesel Exhaust Fluid..................................232
VEHICLE LOADING............................................. 235
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ......235
Payload.......................................................235
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ............235
Tire Size......................................................235
Rim Size .....................................................236
Inflation Pressure ......................................236
Curb Weight ...............................................236
Loading.......................................................236
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
TRAILER TOWING .............................................. 236
Common Towing Definitions .....................236
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer
Weight.........................................................240
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)..........................................241
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................241
Towing Requirements ...............................241
Towing Tips ................................................247
SNOWPLOW ...................................................... 248
Before Plowing ...........................................248
Snowplow Prep Package Model
Availability ..................................................248
Over The Road Operation With Snowplow
Attached .....................................................249
Operating Tips............................................249
General Maintenance................................249
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME) ................................................... 250
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ........................................................250
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive
Models........................................................250
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models........................................................251
DRIVING TIPS ..................................................... 254
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ....................254
Driving Through Water ..............................254
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................255
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .......................................257
CYBERSECURITY ...............................................257
UCONNECT SETTINGS........................................258
Customer Programmable Features ..........259
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION ..............................276
System Overview .......................................276
Safety And General Information ...............278
UCONNECT MODES............................................279
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................279
Radio Mode ...............................................279
Media Mode ..............................................287
Phone Mode ..............................................290
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ....301
Regulatory And Safety Information...........301
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED...................302
Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................302
Vehicle Dynamics ......................................303
Accessory Gauge .......................................303
Pitch & Roll.................................................304
Forward Facing Camera ............................304
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES.............................................305
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................305
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System....306
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 313
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If
Equipped ...................................................313
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped ...........................320
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)........................................................322
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................. 330
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ... 330
Important Safety Precautions...................330
Seat Belt Systems ....................................331
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...340
Child Restraints .........................................350
SAFETY TIPS....................................................... 367
Transporting Passengers ..........................367
Transporting Pets ......................................367
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................367
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle...................................368
Exhaust Gas ..............................................369
Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................369
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ....................... 370
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ... 371
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...................... 374
Preparations For Jacking...........................375
Jack Location .............................................375
Removal Of Jack And Tools.......................375
Removing The Spare Tire ..........................377
Jacking Instructions...................................378
To Stow The Flat Or Spare ........................381
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools ...............383
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped ...383
JUMP STARTING ................................................ 384
Preparations For Jump Start.....................385
Jump Starting Procedure...........................386
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6–SPEED
TRANSMISSION ................................................ 387
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 – SPEED
TRANSMISSION ................................................ 388
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ......................... 389
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................ 389
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 390
Two-Wheel Drive Models...........................392
Four-Wheel Drive Models ..........................392
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped.......392
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ................................................................ 393
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 393
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE
ENGINE ...............................................................394
Maintenance Plan — Gasoline Engine......395
SCHEDULED SERVICING— DIESEL ENGINE ....398
Oil Change Indicator System — Cummins®
Diesel..........................................................398
Perform Service Indicator — Cummins®
Diesel..........................................................399
Maintenance Plan — Cummins® Diesel
Engine ........................................................400
ENGINE COMPARTMENT...................................404
6.4L Engine ...............................................404
6.7L Diesel Engine — Six-Speed 68RFE ..405
6.7L Diesel Engine — Six-Speed AS69RC
HD...............................................................406
Checking Oil Level .....................................407
Adding Washer Fluid..................................407
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................407
Pressure Washing......................................408
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ..................................408
Engine Oil ..................................................408
Engine Oil Filter..........................................409
Engine Air Cleaner Filter............................410
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................412
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...............414
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter —
Diesel Engine ............................................415
Engine Mounted Fuel Filter Replacement —
Diesel Engine .............................................416
Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter
Replacement — Diesel Engine..................417
Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of
Fuel — Diesel Engine .................................418
Intervention Regeneration Strategy —
Message Process Flow .............................419
Diesel Exhaust Fluid..................................420
Body Lubrication........................................420
Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................420
Exhaust System ........................................422
Cooling System .........................................424
Charge Air Cooler — Inter-Cooler ..............427
Brake System ............................................427
Automatic Transmission............................428
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid
Level ..........................................................430
Transfer Case ............................................431
Noise Control System Required
Maintenance & Warranty .........................431
FUSES.........................................................434
BULB REPLACEMENT ................................442
TIRES................................................................... 449
Tire Safety Information..............................449
Tires — General Information ....................455
Tire Types ...................................................459
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................460
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .....................461
Snow Traction Devices .............................463
Tire Rotation Recommendations .............465
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................... 466
Treadwear ..................................................467
Traction Grades .........................................467
Temperature Grades .................................467
STORING THE VEHICLE ..................................... 467
BODYWORK........................................................ 468
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......468
Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........468
Preserving The Bodywork..........................468
INTERIORS ......................................................... 470
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................470
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................471
Leather Surfaces .......................................471
Glass Surfaces ..........................................472
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)....... 473
BRAKE SYSTEM ................................................ 473
Hydraulic Brake Assist — If Equipped.......473
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS................................................ 474
Torque Specifications................................474
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE
ENGINE ................................................................475
6.4L Engine................................................475
Reformulated Gasoline .............................475
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................475
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends .....................475
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles ......................................................476
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...476
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ..................476
Fuel System Cautions................................476
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE ......477
Fuel Specifications ...................................477
Biodiesel Fuel Requirements....................478
FLUID CAPACITIES .............................................480
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .................481
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...............485
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................487
Prepare For The Appointment...................487
Prepare A List.............................................487
Be Reasonable With Requests .................487
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................. 487
FCA US LLC Customer Center...................487
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........488
Mexico ........................................................488
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............488
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired
(TDD/TTY)...................................................488
Service Contract .......................................488
WARRANTY INFORMATION .............................. 489
MOPAR® PARTS ............................................... 489
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 489
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................489
In Canada...................................................489
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 489
General Information.......................................... 490
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Ram vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the
two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited
for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your
driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome
the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 254.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC
offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications
carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help
ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement
of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care
about your satisfaction.
1
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/
body builders. US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section
2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of
the Warranty Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/
Blu-Ray™, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
service on these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the
conversion/camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your
vehicle. For any additional instructions, please contact your conversion/
camper manufacturer.
To obtain dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle, refer
to the Body Builder’s Guide at https://www.ramtrucks.com/
ram-commercial/body-builders-guide.html.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information
on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the
definition of each symbol Ú page 123.
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 123
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 123
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 124
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 124
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 125
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 125
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 125
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 125
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 125
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 125
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
Ú page 126
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 126
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 126
Red Warning Lights
1
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Yellow Warning Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 126
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 126
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 126
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 127
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 127
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 127
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 128
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 128
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 128
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
Ú page 128
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 128
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 128
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 128
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 129
Rear Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 129
Yellow Warning Lights
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 130
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 130
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
Ú page 130
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
Ú page 130
Yellow Indicator Lights
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 130
Air Suspension Payload Protection Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 130
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Ú page 130
Yellow Warning Lights
Cargo Light — If Equipped
Ú page 130
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 130
Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 130
Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 130
Snowplow Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 131
Air Suspension Alternate Trailer Height Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 131
Air Suspension Bed Lowering Mode Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 131
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 131
Yellow Indicator Lights
1
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 131
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 131
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 131
4WD Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 131
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 131
4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 131
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 131
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 132
Yellow Indicator Lights
Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
Ú page 132
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 132
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 132
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target
Detected Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 132
Automatic Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light —
If Equipped
Ú page 132
ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 132
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Ú page 132
Yellow Indicator Lights
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
15
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 132
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 132
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 132
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 133
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
Ú page 133
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 133
Green Indicator Lights
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 133
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 133
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 133
White Indicator Lights
1
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter-N-Go (if equipped), and
Remote Start (if equipped). The key fob allows
you to lock or unlock all doors, tailgate, and the
RamBox (if equipped) as well as activate the
Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately
66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
The key fob also contains an emergency key,
which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked
if the key fob is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop, or other electronic device.
This may result in poor performance.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless
Charging Pad, the key fob may not be found if
it is placed within 15 cm (150 mm) of the pad
Ú page 78.
With the ignition in the ON position and the
vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE
commands are disabled.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
can be verified by referring to the instrument
cluster, which will display directions to follow.
NOTE:
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated
by a message in the instrument cluster display,
or by the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key
fob light no longer illuminates from key fob
button pushes, then the key fob battery requires
replacement Ú page 490.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver’s door, or, twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors, the
tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped). To lock
all the doors and the tailgate, push the lock
button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals
will flash and the illuminated entry system will
be activated. When the doors are locked, the
turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button. The horn chirp
when the lock button is pushed can be
programmed on/off within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 258.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery model is one CR2450
battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a
battery obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket
coin battery dimensions may not meet the
original OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa-
tion.
1 — LED Indicator Light
2 — Unlock
3 — Tailgate Release (If Equipped)
4 — Remote Lowering (If Equipped)
5 — Lock
6 — Remote Start
7 — PANIC
8 — Emergency Key
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on
the key fob above the top row buttons blinks
when a button is pressed. The coin battery
should last a minimum of three years with
normal vehicle usage.
1. Remove the emergency key (1) by pushing
the emergency key release button (2) on
the side of the key fob, and pulling the
emergency key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing
down, and locate the small rectangular gap
on the left side between the housing and
the back cover of the key fob. Use a small
screw driver (or similar tool) to pry open the
left side of the fob cover while applying
pressure until the cover snaps open.
3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the
key fob, which is positioned further to the
edge than the left side gap. Pry open the
right side, and remove the back cover.
4. Remove the battery by using your thumb to
slide the battery downward and back
toward the key ring.
Key Fob Battery Location
NOTE:
When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign
on the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching
the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may
cause battery deterioration. If you touch a
battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to
push down and slide the battery under the
small lip on the top edge of the opening.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
1 — Emergency Key
2 — Emergency Key Release Button
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the
top edge of the back cover with the top of
the fob, and press the edges into the
interlocking hinges until all edges snap
together with no large visual gaps.
7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks
into place.
NOTE:
The key fob battery should only be replaced by
qualified technicians. If the battery requires
replacement, see an authorized dealer.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be re-purposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key
fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on
for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell
battery is swallowed, it can cause severe
internal burns in just two hours and can
lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from
children. If the battery compartment does
not close securely, stop using the product
and keep it away from children.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF position.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
bulb check, it indicates that someone
attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to
start the engine but there is an issue with the
vehicle electronics, the engine will start and
shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics Ú page 490.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long
as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several
operating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are
OFF, ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available
ACC
Engine is not started
Some electrical devices are available (e.g.
power sunroof, power windows etc.)
RUN
Driving position
All the electrical devices are available (e.g.
climate controls, heated seats, etc.)
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the
brake)
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change the mode
by pushing the button, the key fob may have a
low or depleted battery. In this situation, a back
up method can be used to operate the ignition
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
(Continued)
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
Back Up Starting Method
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the
vehicle Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and
prevent the Keyless Enter-N-Go system from
starting the vehicle.
For more information on engine starting
procedures, see Ú page 136.
When opening the driver's door and the igni-
tion is in the ON/RUN position (engine not
running), a chime will sound to remind you to
place the ignition in the OFF position. In addi-
tion to the chime, the message “Ignition or
Accessory ON” will display in the instrument
cluster display.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
(GASOLINE)
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in
all ambient conditions before the driver enters
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key
fob may reduce this range Ú page 490.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will
flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start
mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time
shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button,
insert the key into the ignition, and turn to the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power
sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position before the Remote Start sequence
can be repeated for a third cycle.
If your power door locks were unlocked,
Remote Start will automatically lock the
doors.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle Security system not active
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start system, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote
Start system, push and release the START/
STOP ignition button while pressing the brake
pedal prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off
with another push and release of the Remote
Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is
allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume the
previously set operations (temperature, blower
control, etc.).
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP igni-
tion button.
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the
system will disable for two seconds after
receiving a valid Remote Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the system will automatically activate front
defrost for 15 minutes or less. The time is
dependent on the ambient temperature. Once
the timer expires, the system will automatically
adjust the settings depending on ambient
conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems
— If Equipped” in the next section for detailed
operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and
rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel and driver
heated seat feature will turn on if programmed
in the comfort menu screen within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 258. In warm weather, the
driver vented seat feature will automatically
turn on when Remote Start is activated, if
programmed in the comfort menu screen. The
vehicle will adjust the climate control settings
depending on the outside ambient
temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to an
optimal temperature and mode, dependent on
the outside ambient temperature. When the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
climate controls will resume their previous
settings.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start system, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If
Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C)
to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be
based on the last settings selected by the
driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to
MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation
on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 59.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration
of Remote Start, or until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position. The climate control
settings will change, and exit the automatic
defaults, if manually adjusted by the driver
while the vehicle is in Remote Start mode. This
includes turning the climate controls off using
the OFF button.
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start, or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to
Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
REMOTE START— IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL)
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in
all ambient conditions before the driver enters
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and the
key fob may reduce this range.
The Remote Start system will wait for the
Wait To Start Indicator Light to extinguish
before cranking the engine. This allows time
for the engine pre-heat cycle to pre-heat the
cylinder air, and is normal in cold weather.
For further information on the Wait To Start
Indicator Light and the pre-heat cycle, see
Ú page 132.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will
flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start
mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time
shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button,
insert the key into the ignition, and turn to the
ON/RUN position.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
Water In Fuel Indicator Light is not illumi-
nated
Wait To Start Indicator Light is not illuminated
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illumi-
nated
For additional functions of the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 23
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the
vehicle doors, hood, tailgate, and the Keyless
Enter-N-Go Ignition for unauthorized operation.
While the Vehicle Security system is armed,
interior switches for door locks and tailgate
release are disabled. If something triggers the
alarm, the Vehicle Security system will provide
the following audible and visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument
cluster will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,
make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior
power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry door handle with a valid key
fob available in the same exterior zone
Ú page 28.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start system, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock
the door Ú page 28.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the Vehicle Security system. Use of
the door key cylinder when the system is
armed will sound the alarm when the door is
opened.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed
when the power tailgate (if equipped) is
opened using the tailgate button on the key
fob.
If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to
unlock the tailgate, the Vehicle Security
system is disarmed and the rest of the
vehicle doors will remain locked unless all
doors are set to unlock on first press within
Uconnect Settings.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system
will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, five
seconds between cycles, and up to eight cycles
if the trigger remains active. The Vehicle
Security system will then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked
from inside the vehicle by using the door lock
knob. To lock each door, push the door lock
knob on each door trim panel downward. To
unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim
panel upward. If the lock knob is down when the
door is closed, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle
before closing the door.
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security system.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
(Continued)
Door Lock Knob
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The power door lock switches are located on
each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or
unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switches
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the
keys are found inside the vehicle when the door
lock button on the front door panel is used to
lock the door. This will occur for two attempts.
Upon the third attempt, the doors will lock even
if the key is inside.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door
may not unlock automatically.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
For personal security and safety in the
event of an collision, lock the vehicle doors
as you drive as well as when you park and
leave the vehicle.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK, apply
the parking brake, place the ignition in the
OFF position, remove the key fobs from
vehicle, and lock all doors. and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the door lock switch is pushed while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position and
the driver's door is open, the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened
from inside the vehicle without first unlocking
the door. The door may be unlocked manually
by raising the lock knob.
POWER SIDE STEPS — IF EQUIPPED
The Power Side Steps will extend a step for
easier entry and exit of the vehicle.
When configured for “Auto” mode, the Power
Side Steps will deploy when any of the doors are
opened, or when the deploy setting is activated
through the touchscreen. When configured for
“Store” mode, the steps will not deploy unless
the setting is selected manually through the
Controls menu within the touchscreen.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), or
if the retract setting is selected within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 258, the steps will retract.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
E
NTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and
unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on or off
within Uconnect Settings Ú page 258.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry
system from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
Passive Entry unlock initiates illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate lamp,
position lamps) for whichever time duration
is set between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds.
Passive Entry unlock also initiates two
flashes of the turn signal lamps.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle,
the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and (if equipped) will arm
the Vehicle Security system.
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
Grabbing the passenger door handle will unlock
all doors and the tailgate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will
unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
door handle, depending on the selected
setting in the Uconnect system
Ú
page 258.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition is in the OFF position.
There are five situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When the Vehicle Security system is in
pre-arm or armed status and the tailgate
transitions from opened to closed.
When the tailgate transitions from open to
closed and remote start is active.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and
alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
when any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the
doors are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside
the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive
Entry door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Tailgate:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handles,
pushing the Passive Entry lock button will lock
the vehicle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the
Uconnect Settings, the key protection
described in "Frequency Operated Button
Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/
functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted Ú page 16.
The LED light on the key fob will not blink if
the key fob battery is low or fully depleted,
but a low key fob battery condition will still
support the Passive Entry system function-
ality. When the key fob battery is low, the
instrument cluster will display a message
indicating that the key fob battery is low
Ú page 490.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT —
I
F EQUIPPED
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks after the following
sequence of actions:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
feature is enabled within Uconnect
Settings
Ú
page 258.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission gear selector was not in
PARK, then is placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS — IF
E
QUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature
is enabled/disabled within the Uconnect
Settings Ú page 258.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver, and rotate the dial to the
lock or unlock position. When the system on a
door is engaged, that door can only be opened
by using the outside door handle even if the
inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
Child Lock Control
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system
is engaged, the door can be opened only by
using the outside door handle even though
the inside door lock is in the unlocked posi-
tion.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked
position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside
to make certain it is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
pull up on the door lock knob (unlocked posi-
tion), roll down the window, and open the
door with the outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to
open a door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged,
it is impossible to open the doors from inside
the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. The tilt lever is
located on the steering column, below the
multifunction lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to
unlock the steering column. With one hand
firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering
column up or down, as desired. Release the
lever to lock the steering column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Lever
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside door
handle when the Child Protection Door Locks
are engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF
E
QUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
the operator turns it off. The heated steering
wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located on the center instrument panel below
the touchscreen, as well as within the climate or
controls screen of the touchscreen.
Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 23.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR)
system.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the
Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you
have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you
have a Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch display system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
Voice Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering
wheel.
1. Visit
UconnectPhone.com
to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to
find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. The
microphone is located in the headliner and
aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the VR or Phone
button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a Voice Command from
the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
2 — Push To Initiate, Answer, End A Phone Call, Or
Send/Receive A Text
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days
a week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon-
nect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit www.driveucon-
nect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call:
1-877-324-9091
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall
through a memory switch. Each memory profile
saves desired position settings for the following
features:
Driver’s seat
Easy Entry/Exit seat operation (on/off) (if
equipped)
Adjustable pedals (if equipped)
Side mirrors
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
If equipped with power convex mirrors, these
mirror positions will not set as part of a
memory profile Ú page 43.
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs.
One key fob can be linked to memory position
1 and the other key fob can be linked to
memory position 2.
The driver memory settings switch is located on
the driver door, next to the door handle, and
consists of three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate
the memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two saved memory profiles.
Driver Memory Settings Buttons
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the
selected profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside
mirrors, adjustable pedals (if equipped),
and radio station presets).
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory
switch, and then push the desired memory
button (1 or 2) within five seconds. The
instrument cluster display will display which
memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to
recall a memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE
K
EYLESS ENTRY KEY FOB TO MEMORY
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one
of two saved memory profiles by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must
select the “Personal Settings Linked to Key
Fob” feature through the Uconnect system
Ú page 258.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push
and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Push and release button (1) or (2)
accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2)
will display in the instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed
by pushing the unlock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will display in the instrument
cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or
two, push the desired memory button number
(1 or 2) or the unlock button on the key fob
linked to the desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall.
When a recall is canceled, the driver seat will
stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
system of the vehicle.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Both front seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle
is located under the seat cushion at the front
edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle
and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release
the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure
that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side
of the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward
slightly, lift the lever, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the
seatback to its normal upright position, lean
forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seat back is in the upright position.
Manual Recline Lever
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not stand or lean in front of the seat
while actuating the handle. The seatback
may swing forward and hit you causing
injury.
To avoid injury, place your hand on the seat-
back and actuate the handle, then position
the seatback in the desired position.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The
outboard seat portions are each 40% of the
total width of the seat. If equipped, the back of
the center portion (20%) easily folds down to
provide an armrest/center storage
compartment.
MANUAL REAR SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the outside of
the seat cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift
upward on the handle, lean back on the
seatback and when you reach the desired
position, release the handle.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
POWER DRIVER SEAT ADJUSTMENT — IF
E
QUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with an
eight-way power driver's seat. The power seat
switches are located on the outboard side of the
driver's seat cushion. There are two power seat
switches that are used to control the movement
of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the power seat switch. The
seat will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down by using the power seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair
visibility or become a dangerous projectile in
a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down using the power seat switch. The
front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward by using the power seat
switch. The seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or
passenger seats may also be equipped with
power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is
located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support.
Lumbar Control Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends
on where you have the driver’s seat positioned
when you place the ignition in the OFF position.
When you place the ignition in the OFF posi-
tion, the driver’s seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver’s
seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the ignition into the
ACC or RUN position.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
When you place the ignition in the OFF posi-
tion, the driver’s seat will move to a position
0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop
if the driver’s seat position is between
0.9 inches and 2.7 inches (22.7 mm and
67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat
will return to its previously set position when
you place the ignition to the ACC or RUN posi-
tion.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is disabled when
the driver’s seat position is less than
0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to
the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each
memory setting profile Ú page 34.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or
disabled through the programmable features in
the Uconnect system Ú page 258.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
On some models, the front and rear seats may
be equipped with heaters located in the seat
cushions and seat backs.
Front Heated Seats
The heated seats control buttons are located on
the center instrument panel below the
touchscreen, and are also located within the
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch radio,
there will only be control buttons through the
touchscreen.
Push the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second
time to turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time
to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a fourth time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until
the operator changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 23.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard rear seats
are equipped with heated seats. The heated
seat switches for these seats are located on the
rear of the center console.
There are two heated seat switches that allow
the rear passengers to operate the seats
independently. You can choose from HI, MED,
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LO, or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights
in each switch indicate the level of heat in use.
Push the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second
time to turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time
to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a fourth time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The level of heat selected will stay on until
the operator changes it.
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Front Ventilated Seats
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment
and move air through fine perforations in the
seat cover to help keep the driver and front
passenger cooler in higher ambient
temperatures. The fans operate at three
speeds, HI, MED and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located on the center instrument panel below
the touchscreen, and are also located within the
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch radio,
there will only be control buttons through the
touchscreen.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second
time to choose MED.
Press the ventilated seat button a third
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a fourth
time to turn the ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 23.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back
of your head.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Front Head Restraints
Four-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with front
four-way driver and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the
top of the head restraint toward the front of the
vehicle as desired and release. To adjust the
head restraint rearward, pull the top of the head
restraint to the forward most position and
release. The head restraint will return to the
rear most position.
Forward Adjustment
NOTE:
Four-way head restraints have seven tilt/
locking positions. When pulling fully forward,
the head restraint will spring back to the
untilted, rearward most position when released.
Two-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with front
two-way driver and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of head restraint, and push downward on
the head restraint.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench
seat, the center head restraint is not adjustable
or removable.
Front Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, push the
adjustment button and the release button while
pulling upward on the whole assembly. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the
appropriate height.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable
and removable head restraints. To raise the
head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the
adjustment button located on the base of the
head restraint and push downward on the head
restraint.
Release/Adjustment Buttons
NOTE:
The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab)
has only one adjustment position that is used
to aid in the routing of a tether Ú page 330.
Do not reposition the head restraint
180 degrees to the incorrect position in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the
back of the head.
Rear Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, push the
adjustment button and the release button while
pulling upward on the whole assembly. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the
appropriate height.
NOTE:
To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat
bottom must be folded up.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF
EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to
allow a greater range of driver comfort for
steering wheel tilt and seat position. This
feature allows the brake and accelerator pedals
to move toward or away from the driver to
provide improved position with the steering
wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left
side of the steering column.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition in
the OFF position.
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the
vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Cruise
Control system is on. If there is an attempt to
adjust the pedals when the system is locked
out, the following messages will appear (on
vehicles equipped with an instrument cluster
display):
Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control
Engaged
Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In
Reverse
NOTE:
Always adjust the pedals to a position that
allows full movement of the pedal.
Further small adjustments may be necessary
to find the best possible seat/pedal position.
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Settings, you can use your remote keyless
entry key fob or the memory switch on the
driver’s door trim panel to return the adjust-
able pedals to pre-programmed positions
Ú page 34.
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is
moving. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always adjust the pedals while the
vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable
pedals or impede its ability to move, as it may
cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal
travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable
pedal's path.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is
disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to
improve the driver’s rear view.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned
on or off through the touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped
The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high
definition, wide and unobstructed view of the
road behind while driving.
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, push the
control on the bottom of the mirror forward.
Digital Rearview Mirror
Push the menu button next to the on/off control
to access the following mirror options:
Brightness
Tilt
Pan (if equipped)
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
1 — On/Off Control
2 — Menu Button
3 — Left Scroll Button
4 — Right Scroll Button
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Use the left and right buttons to scroll through
menu options.
When not in use, pull the on/off control back
toward the steering wheel to return the mirror to
the regular Automatic dimming Mirror.
NOTE:
The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective
during night time driving in low light applica-
tions.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRROR — IF
E
QUIPPED
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the cover.
Lift Cover For Illuminated Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor
to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun
blockage.
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the
sun visor is against the windshield for additional
sun blockage through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the
center of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve
the optimal view.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps
under the outside mirrors, they can be turned
off through the Uconnect system Ú page 258.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the
passenger side convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than they really are. Relying
too much on your passenger side convex
mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex
passenger side mirror.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be
manually folded both forward and rearward to
prevent damage.
Folding Mirror
DRIVER'S OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC
D
IMMING MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The driver’s outside mirror and if equipped, the
passenger’s outside mirror, will automatically
dim for glare from vehicles behind you. This
feature is controlled by the inside automatic
dimming mirror. The mirrors will automatically
adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror
adjusts.
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The controls for the power mirrors are located
on the driver's door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch.
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R
(right) button to select the mirror that you want
to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Movement
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS
F
OR STANDARD AND TRAILER TOW — IF
E
QUIPPED
The power folding mirrors can be folded
rearward and unfolded into the normal driving
position.
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the
full rearward position to resist damage when
entering a car wash or a narrow location.
1 — Left Mirror Selection
2 — Mirror Direction Control
3 — Right Mirror Selection
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
The switch for the power folding mirrors is
located between the power mirror switches
L (left) and R (right). Push the switch once and
the mirrors will fold in, push the switch a second
time and the mirrors will return to the normal
driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after a powered
cycle, a potential extra button push is required
to get the mirrors back to the normal driving
position. If the mirror does not fold
automatically, check for ice or dirt build up at
the pivot area, which can cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors
if the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded (by hand or by pushing the
power folding mirror switch).
The mirrors come out of the unfolded posi-
tion.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and
unfold them by pushing the button (this may
require multiple attempts). This resets them to
their normal driving position.
POWER CONVEX MIRROR SWITCH — IF
E
QUIPPED
The Power Convex Mirror Switch is located on
the door trim panel, above the power mirror
controls. The switch enables the movement of
the convex portion of both the driver and
passenger outside mirrors.
Power Convex Mirror Switch
To adjust the convex portion of the outside
mirrors, push the Power Convex Mirror Switch.
Then, select the mirror you want to adjust by
using the L (left) or R (right) buttons.
To return the control to the large mirror, push
the Power Convex Mirror Switch a second time.
Trailer Tow Power Convex Mirror
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If the Power Convex Mirror Switch is not pushed
a second time, the switch will automatically
default back to the larger portion of the outside
mirrors after a period of time.
TRAILER TOWING MIRRORS — IF
E
QUIPPED
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable
mirror head to provide a greater vision range
when towing extra-wide loads. To change
position inboard or outboard, the mirror head
should be rotated (flipped in or out).
Trailer Towing Position
NOTE:
Fold the trailer towing mirrors prior to entering
an automated car wash.
A small blindspot mirror is located next to the
main mirror and can be adjusted manually.
Blindspot Mirror
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 59.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE — IF
E
QUIPPED
This feature provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will assist with the driver’s
ground visibility. The outside mirrors will move
slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The
outside mirrors will then return to the original
position when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE. If the vehicle is equipped with Driver
Memory Settings, this feature will be linked to
the programmable settings.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 258.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates,
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
lighting, or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles
12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in
the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release
any of the programmed HomeLink® buttons.
These buttons will activate the devices they
are programmed to with each press of the
corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located
above the center button.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are
trying to program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the
channels of your HomeLink® before you use it
for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first
time. Do not erase channels when programming
additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine
whether the device has a rolling code or
non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date.
Typically, devices manufactured after 1995 have
rolling codes. A device with a rolling code will also
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where
the antenna is attached to the device. The button
may not be immediately visible when looking at
the device. The name and color of the button
may vary slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will
not have a rolling code. These devices will also
not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, follow
the steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using
this procedure. You do not need to erase all
channels when programming additional
buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1
to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program,
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the garage door opener transmitter button
you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the HomeLink® indicator light. The
HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly
and then rapidly. Once this happens,
release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener motor. Firmly push
and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three
times (holding the button for two seconds
each time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the final
steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the steps
from the beginning.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people or pets are in the path
of the door or gate.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink®
to a miscellaneous device follows the same
procedure as programming to a garage door
opener Ú page 50. Be sure to determine if the
device has a rolling code, or non-rolling code
before beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission, which may not be long
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner. The procedure
may need to be performed multiple times to
successfully pair the device to your HomeLink®
buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that
has been previously trained, without erasing all
the channels, follow the procedure below. Be
sure to determine whether the new device you
want to program the HomeLink® button to has
a Rolling Code, or Non-rolling Code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the HomeLink® Indicator light
begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” Ú page 50, and
follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN /GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage
or confined area while programming the
transceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous when inhaled and can cause you
and others to be severely injured or killed.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every
two seconds until HomeLink has
successfully accepted the frequency signal.
The indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining
HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step
for each remaining button. DO NOT erase
the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/
device for programming, plug it back in at this
time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps
Ú page 490.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
panel light dimming, cargo light/trailer spotter
lights (if equipped), and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also turned
on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the
headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Push Fog Light Switch
5 — Push Cargo Light Switch
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) — IF
E
QUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on
whenever the engine is running, and the low
beams are not on. The lights will remain on until
the ignition is placed in the OFF or ACC position,
or the parking brake is engaged.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect system Ú page 258.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running
Lights may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on
one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is
activated on that side), or on both sides of
the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights
are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. Pulling the multifunction lever
back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control through
the use of a camera mounted on the inside
rearview mirror or a windshield mounted
camera. These cameras detect vehicle specific
light and automatically switch from high beams
to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON”
under “Auto Dim High Beams” within your
Uconnect Settings Ú page 258, as well as
turning the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-
tion.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer
to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other
obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improp-
erly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the
mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper
performance. See a local authorized dealer.
The Automatic High Beams will not activate
until the vehicle is at or above 15 mph
(24 km/h).
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
to the AUTO position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place
the ignition into the OFF position. To turn the
automatic headlights off, turn the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
DIRECTIONAL LED HEADLAMP SYSTEM
— I
F EQUIPPED
This is a system consisting of LED (low/high
beam) headlights that incorporate dynamic
cornering with 5-degree inboard/15-degree
outboard swivel. The headlights continuously
and automatically adapt to the driving
conditions around bends or when cornering
based on steering wheel angle.
The system directs the headlights to light up the
road in the best way, taking into account the
speed of the vehicle and the bend or corner
angle, as well as the speed of the vehicle while
the steering wheel is being turned.
The adaptive lights are automatically activated
when the vehicle is traveling above
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
This system can be turned on/off through the
Uconnect Settings under “Steering Directed
Lights” Ú page 258.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, rotate
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
Headlights, it also has this customer-
programmable feature. When your headlights
are in the automatic mode and the engine is
running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. This feature is
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 258.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Rain Sensing
Wiper system Ú page 59, and it is activated,
the headlights will automatically turn on after
the wipers complete five wipe cycles within
approximately one minute, and they will turn off
approximately four minutes after the wipers
completely stop.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the
daytime, the instrument panel lights will auto-
matically dim to the lower nighttime intensity.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight
delay feature will leave the headlights on for up
to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the
ignition is placed in the OFF position while the
headlight switch is on, and then the headlight
switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be
cancelled by either turning the headlight switch
on then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON
position.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system Ú page 258.
The headlight delay feature is automatically
activated if the headlight switch is left in the
AUTO position when the ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights
are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, a chime will sound and a message will
appear in the instrument cluster display when
the driver’s door is opened.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or low beam headlights and push
in the center of the headlight switch control
knob. Pushing the headlight switch control knob
a second time will turn the front fog lights off.
Front Fog Light Switch
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each
side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically
turn off.
CARGO LIGHTS/TRAILER SPOTTER
L
IGHTS WITH BED LIGHTS — IF
E
QUIPPED
The cargo light, bed lights, and trailer spotter
lights are turned on by pushing the cargo light
button located on the lower half of the headlight
switch.
Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle is stationary, these lights can
also be turned on using the switch located just
inside the pickup box, on the lower part of the
bed light lens. A telltale will illuminate in the
instrument cluster display when these lights are
on. Pushing the switch a second time will turn
the lights off.
Bed Light Switch (Without RamBox)
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will
turn on for approximately 30 seconds when a
key fob unlock button is pushed, as part of the
Illuminated Entry feature.
When these lights are activated using the
button on the headlight switch, the trailer
spotter lights will remain illuminated when the
vehicle transmission is in PARK, NEUTRAL, or
REVERSE. The trailer spotter lights will turn off
when the vehicle transmission is placed in
DRIVE.
NOTE:
For vehicles shipped to or sold in the states of
California or Mississippi, the cargo, bed, and
mirror spotter lights will not work while the
vehicle is in motion. In every other state, the
cargo and mirror spotter lights will turn off when
the vehicle is in motion, but the bed light will
remain on. In all states, including California and
Mississippi, if a bed camera is deactivated, the
bed lights will turn back on.
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior
lights to protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
If the ignition is in the OFF position, the interior
lights will automatically turn off when:
Any door is left ajar for 10 minutes.
The Dome Defeat button is pushed.
The cargo, bed, and spotter lights are manu-
ally activated by either the headlight switch
or the truck bed switch.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is in the OFF position,
the exterior lights will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy, dome, cargo, and bed lights are
turned on when any door is opened. The
courtesy and dome lights are turned on when
the Dome On button is pushed on the overhead
console. Also, if your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry, and the unlock button is
pushed on the key fob, the courtesy, dome,
cargo, and bed lights will turn on.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
The overhead console lights can also be
operated individually as reading lights by
pushing the corresponding buttons.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with an LED overhead
console, if both the Dome On and Dome Defeat
buttons are pushed, the Illuminated Entry with
door ajar feature will be disabled, but the dome
lights inside the vehicle will turn on.
Three types of rear courtesy/reading lights are
available for your vehicle:
Push button on/off
Push lens on/off
No on/off button, only courtesy light
NOTE:
The rear courtesy/reading lights will remain on
until the switch is pushed a second time, so be
sure they have been turned off before exiting
the vehicle. If the interior lights are left on after
the ignition is placed in the OFF position, they
will automatically turn off after 10 minutes.
Dimmer Control
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight
switch and are located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the right dimmer control upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Rotating the left dimmer control will adjust the
interior and ambient light levels.
NOTE:
The ambient lights are only active when the
headlights or parking lights are on.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
key fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lamps
located beneath the outside mirrors (if
equipped).
The lights will fade to off after approximately
30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off
once the ignition switch is placed in the ON/
RUN position from the OFF position.
The front courtesy overhead console and door
courtesy lights will not turn off if the Dome On
button on the overhead console is pushed. The
overhead and door courtesy lights will turn off
after 10 minutes to protect the battery.
1 — Driver’s Reading Light On/Off Button
2 — Dome Defeat Button
3 — Dome On Button
4 — Passenger’s Reading Light On/Off Button
1 — Ambient Light Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The illuminated entry system will not operate if
the Dome Defeat button on the overhead
console is pushed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Illuminated
Approach lights under the outside mirrors, they
will also be turned off by pushing the Dome
Defeat button.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are
located on the multifunction lever on the left
side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the
end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Intermittent Wipers
The intermittent feature of this system was
designed for use when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable
pause between cycles, desirable. For maximum
delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
upward to the first detent.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the
knob until it enters the low continual speed
position. The delay can be regulated from a
maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles,
to a cycle every one second. The delay intervals
will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer
knob, located on the end of the multifunction
lever, inward and hold. Washer fluid will be
sprayed and the wiper will operate for two to
three cycles after the washer knob is released.
If the washer knob pushed while in the delay
range, the wiper will operate for several
seconds after the washer knob is released. It
will then resume the intermittent interval
previously selected. If the washer knob is
pushed while in the off position, the wiper will
turn on and cycle approximately three times
after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
Mist
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or
spray from a passing vehicle is needed, push
the washer knob, located on the end of the
multifunction lever, inward briefly and release.
The wipers will cycle one time and automatically
shut off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-
shield could lead to a collision. You might not
see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 420.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the
wipers. Rotate the end of the multifunction
lever to one of five detent positions to activate
this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay
position 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper delay
position 5 is the most sensitive. Position 3
should be used for normal rain conditions.
Positions 1 and 2 can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Positions 4 and 5
can be used if the driver desires more
sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the O (off)
position when not using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-
mance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 258.
The Rain Sensing system has protection
features for the wiper blades and arms, and will
not operate under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni-
tion is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When
the ignition is ON, and the transmission is in
the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing
system will not operate until the wiper switch
is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), or the gear selector is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with the Remote Start system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction
of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen (if
equipped), on the sides of the touchscreen, or
on the instrument panel below the radio.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display
Automatic Temperature Controls
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Display Automatic
Temperature Controls
NOTE:
Icons and descriptions can vary based upon
vehicle equipment.
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation
to exit. Pressing other settings will also cause
MAX A/C to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C sets the control for maximum
cooling performance.
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate to change the current
setting. The A/C indicator illuminates
when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate, to change the system
between Recirculation mode and
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions, such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
(Continued)
Auto Button
Set your desired temperature and
press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and
maintain your desired temperature by
automatically adjusting the blower
speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly
recommended for efficiency.
You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen.
Push the button on the faceplate.
Toggling this function will cause the system to
switch between manual mode and automatic
mode Ú page 65.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
and release the button on the
faceplate, to change the current
airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front
Defrost indicator illuminates when Front
Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield
and side window demist outlets. When the
defrost button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting and defogging. When
toggling the front defrost mode button, the
climate system will return to the previous
setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push
and release the button on the
faceplate, to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And
Down Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button (or rotate knob if
equipped) on the faceplate or
touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button (or rotate knob if
equipped) on the faceplate or
touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display
will only appear if the system is equipped
with an automatic climate control system.
Up and down buttons are only available on
vehicles equipped with a 12-inch display.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator
illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
synchronizes the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger’s temperature setting
while in SYNC will automatically exit this
feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount
of air forced through the climate
control system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting
the blower will cause automatic mode to switch
to manual operation. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on
the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the
blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as
you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the
mode buttons on the touchscreen, or
pushing the MODE button on the
faceplate, to change the airflow
distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode
can be adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets, and demist outlets.
Faceplate
Push the MODE button to change the airflow
distribution mode.
Touchscreen
Press one of the mode buttons to change the
airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes
from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on
the touchscreen, or push the OFF
button on the faceplate (if equipped)
to turn the Climate Control system
on/off.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Manual Temperature
Controls
MAX A/C Setting
Set the temperature control knob to
the MAX A/C setting to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. Moving the temperature control
knob away from the MAX A/C setting causes the
MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button to
change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air
mode. The Recirculation indicator and
the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions, such as
smoke, odors, dust, or humidity are present.
Recirculation can be used in all modes except
for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be
deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection. Continuous use of the
Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
On vehicles equipped with Manual Climate
controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing
operation. Recirculation is disabled
automatically if this mode is selected.
Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode causes the LED in the control button to
blink and then turn off.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the mode control knob to the
Front Defrost mode setting. Air comes
from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost
button is selected, the blower level may
increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The
Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after
10 minutes.
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature
of the air forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you
turn the temperature control knob
clockwise.
The temperature decreases as you
turn the temperature control knob
counterclockwise.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount
of air forced through the climate
control system. There are seven
blower speeds available. The blower
speed increases as you turn the blower control
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the
blower control knob counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob to adjust
airflow distribution. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel
outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
customer-programmable feature within the
Uconnect Settings Ú page 258.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature
of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate
Control system when the vehicle is being stored
for an extended period of time, see
Ú
page 467.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control
system may automatically adjust airflow to
maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will
be maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating
element located at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following
conditions are met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
during a cold weather manual start with full
defrost, and when the ambient temperature
is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
when the Rear Defrost is operating and the
ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the
outside ambient temperature is less than
33°F (0.6°C) the windshield wiper de-icer is
activated. Exiting remote start will resume its
previous operation, except if the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer is active. If the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer is active, the timer and opera-
tion will continue.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to (Panel Mode),
(A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control
to (Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in
(Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to (Mix Mode)
position and turn
(A/C) on to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to (Floor Mode). If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix
Mode).
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel and
features both an upper and lower storage area.
Glove Compartment
If equipped with a covered upper glove
compartment, push the release button to open.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Door Storage
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas are located in the door trim
panels.
Rear Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage compartments are located in both the
driver and passenger rear door trim panels.
Center Storage Compartment — If
Equipped
The center storage compartment is located
between the driver and passenger seats. The
storage compartment provides an armrest and
contains both an upper and lower storage area.
Center Storage Compartment
Pull the upper handle on the front of the
armrest to raise the cover. The upper storage
area contains a USB port located that can be
used to power small electrical devices.
1 — Upper Glove Compartment Release Button (If
Equipped)
2 — Upper Glove Compartment
3 — Lower Glove Compartment
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving
with the glove compartment open may result
in injury in a collision.
WARNING!
This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated
on the armrest could be seriously injured
during vehicle operation, or a collision.
In a collision, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about
10 lb (4.5 kg). These items could be thrown
about endangering occupants of the
vehicle. Items stored should not exceed a
total of 10 lb (4.5 kg).
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Center Storage Compartment
USB Port
With the upper lid closed, pull the lower handle
to open the lower storage bin. The lower bin
contains a power inverter. There is also a “fill
line” located along the rear inside wall of the
lower bin. Contents above the “fill line” may
interfere with cupholder placement if equipped
with a premium center console.
Forward Portion Of Lower Storage Bin
Premium Center Console — If Equipped
The premium center console is equipped with
two front storage bins located in front of the
center storage compartment. These storage
bins may be equipped with tandem doors. Push
the front bin to access the cupholders, or push
the rear bin to access the coin holder/small
storage bin.
Center Console Tandem Doors— If Equipped
1 — Upper Console Handle
2 — Lower Console Handle
1 — Wireless Charging Pad
2 — Power Inverter
3 — Storage Area
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
1 — Push Front Bin Access
2 — Push Rear Bin Access
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Tandem Doors Open Position
Push the release button at the front of the
cupholder bin to slide tray rearward to access
the front lower storage bin, or forward to access
the rear lower storage bin.
Push Release Button To Slide Tray
Overhead Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a
compartment is provided for the storage of one
pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the door latch to
open the compartment.
Overhead Sunglass Door
Front Bench Seat Storage — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench
seat, storage can be found by folding down the
center seat back. A console storage area and
cupholders are available.
Front Bench Seat Storage Location
1 — Front Bin Open
2 — Rear Bin Open
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
With the seatback in the upright position, lift the
center seat bottom to access additional storage
underneath the seat.
There is a storage drawer located in the lower
center of the instrument panel. It can be
released by pushing the access button above it.
Pull drawer outward to the fully open position.
Storage Drawer Access Button
Seatback Storage — If Equipped
Located in the back of both the driver and
passenger front seats are pockets that can be
used for storage.
Driver’s Side Seatback Storage
Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If
Equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the
second row seats and can be used for extra
storage. The storage bins have removable liners
that can be easily removed for cleaning.
In-Floor Storage Bin And Latch
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To open in-floor storage bin, remove the floor
mat (if equipped), and lift upward on the handle
of the latch and open the lid.
NOTE:
The front seat may have to be moved forward to
fully open the lid.
Opened Storage Bin
Storage Bin (Regular Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front
seats and runs the length of the cab.
Storage Bin
Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped
Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat may
be equipped with a folding load floor.
Unfolding The Load Floor/Crew Cab
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the
upward position.
Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position
2. Unfold both the legs using the straps.
Load Floor Legs In Opened Position
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items
stored on the load floor. While driving or in an
accident you may experience abrupt stopping,
rapid acceleration, or sharp turns. Loose
objects stored on the load floor may move
around with force and strike occupants,
resulting in serious or fatal injury.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
3. Lift the front panel until the load floor
unfolds into position.
Load Floor In Open Position
4. Reverse the procedure to store the load
floor.
Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access
Under The Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the
upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either
side of the load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage
under the load floor.
Load Floor Securing Straps/Crew Cab
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor
back in the secured down position before
you operate the vehicle.
Below Rear Seat Storage (Crew Cab)
The Crew Cab models provide additional
storage under the rear seats. Lift the seats to
access the storage compartment.
To open the storage compartments, unsnap the
securing snap located at either side of the load
floor and lift upward on the fold flat lid
Ú page 72.
Crew Cab Storage
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up
position. When stopping fast or in an
accident, the load floor could move to the
down position causing serious injury.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
USB/AUX C ONTROL
Located on the center stack, just below the
instrument panel, is the main media hub. There
are four total USB ports: Two Mini-USBs (Type C)
and two Standard USBs (Type A). There is also
an AUX port located in the middle of the USB
ports.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information,
refer to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in
the Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same
time, and both ports will provide charging capa-
bilities. Only one port can transfer data to the
system at a time. A pop-up will appear and allow
you to select the device transferring data.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type
A USB port and another device is plugged into
the Type C USB port, a message will appear and
allow you to select which device to use.
Center Stack USB/AUX Media Hub
The third and fourth USB ports are located
behind the center console, above the power
inverter. These USB ports are charge only.
Rear Center Console Mini-USB (Type C) USB Ports
1 — Standard USB Type A Port #1
2 — AUX Port
3 — Standard USB Type A Port #2
1 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports 1
2 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports 2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
(Continued)
Applicable to only Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With
8.4-inch Display, and Uconnect 4C NAV With
12-inch Display radios, different scenarios are
listed below when a non-phone device is
plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports,
and when a phone device is plugged into the
smaller and larger USB ports:
“A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“Another device is in use through the same
USB port. Please disconnect the first device
to use the second device”.
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be
lost.
If equipped, your vehicle may also contain a
USB port located on the top tray of the vehicles
center console.
If equipped, two Mini-USB ports (Type C), two
Standard USB ports (Type A), and one AUX port
may be located to the left of the center stack,
just below the climate controls.
Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub
Some USB ports support media and charging.
You can use features, such as Apple CarPlay®,
Android Auto™, Pandora®, and others while
charging your phone.
NOTE:
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be
lost.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or visit
UconnectPhone.com.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet can
provide power for in-cab accessories designed
for use with the standard “cigar lighter” style
plug. The 12 Volt power outlets and 5 Volt
(2.5 Amp) USB port (Charge Only) have a cap
attached to the outlet indicating “12 V DC”,
together with either a key symbol, battery
symbol, or USB symbol.
A key symbol indicates that the key must be in
the ON/RUN or ACC position for the outlet to
provide power. The battery symbol indicates
that the outlet is connected to the battery, and
can provide power at all times.
1 — Standard USB Type A Ports
2 — Mini-USB Type C Ports
3 — AUX Port
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watts (13 Amps) power rating is
exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
An auxiliary power outlet can be found in the
tray on top of the center stack. This power outlet
works when the ignition is in the ON/RUN, ACC,
or OFF position.
Power Outlet — Top Of Center Stack
Power Outlet Fuse Locations:
F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow UCI Port/ USB Rear
Center Console
F90 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel
Power Outlet Battery Fed (If Equipped)
F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel
Power Outlet Ignition Fed (If Equipped)
F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter/ Instru-
ment Panel Power Outlet (If Equipped)
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to
unplug any equipment as to not drain the
battery of the vehicle. All accessories connected
to the outlet(s) should be removed or turned off
when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
discharge the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
Interior Power Inverters
If equipped, 115 Volt (400 Watts maximum)
power inverters may be located inside the
vehicle. These inverters can power cellular
phones, electronics and other low power
devices requiring power up to 400 Watts.
Certain video game consoles exceed this power
limit, as will most power tools.
All power inverters are designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of 400
Watts is exceeded, the power inverter shuts
down. Once the electrical device has been
removed from the outlet the inverter should
reset.
The front power inverter is located in center
console toward the right hand side, just under
the Wireless Charging Pad (if equipped).
Center Console Power Inverter Outlet (If Equipped)
There is also a second 115 Volt (400 Watts
maximum) power inverter located on the rear of
the center console.
Rear Center Console Power Inverter Outlet
(If Equipped)
NOTE:
400 Watts is the maximum for the inverter, not
each outlet. If three outlets are in use,
400 Watts is shared amongst the devices
plugged in.
If equipped with a front bench seat, the inverter
is located to the right of the center stack, just
below the climate controls.
Center Stack Power Inverter (If Equipped)
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Power Inverter — If Equipped
Vehicles not equipped with a RamBox may be
equipped with a 115 Volt (400 Watts maximum)
power inverter located just inside the truck bed.
Exterior Power Inverter (If Equipped)
The Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch is
only found on vehicles equipped with an
exterior power inverter. The switch only controls
on/off operation of the power outlet in the truck
bed or, if equipped, the RamBox. It does not
control on/off operation of the power outlets
located inside the cabin of the vehicle.
Instrument Panel Power Inverter Switch
For information on the outlet found inside the
RamBox, see Ú page 91.
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the
device. The outlet turns off when the device is
unplugged.
NOTE:
The power inverter only turns on if the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter shuts down if the power rating is
exceeded.
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD — IF
E
QUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the recepta-
cles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi
wireless charging pad located inside of the
center console. This charging pad is designed to
wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobile
phone. Qi is a standard that uses magnetic
induction to transfer power to your mobile
device.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi
wireless charging. If the phone is not equipped
with Qi wireless charging functionality, an
aftermarket sleeve or a specialized back plate
can be purchased from your mobile phone
provider or a local electronics retailer. Please
see your phone’s owner’s manual for further
information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an
anti-slip mat, an adjustable cradle to hold your
mobile phone in place and an LED indicator
light.
LED Indicator Status:
No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for
a device.
Blue Light: Device is detected, and is
charging.
Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign
object is detected.
NOTE:
Using a phone case may interfere with wireless
charging.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The window controls on the driver's door control
all the door windows.
Power Window Switches
The passenger door windows can also be
operated by using the single window controls on
the passenger door trim panel. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position.
To open the window part way (manually), push
the window switch down briefly and release.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the
charging pad or within 15 cm (150 mm) of it.
Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup
and damage to the fob. Placing the fob in
close proximity of the charging pad blocks the
fob from being detected by the vehicle and
prevents the vehicle from starting.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is program-
mable within Uconnect Settings Ú page 258.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power
window switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down for a short period
of time, then release, and the window will go
down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up for a short period of
time and release; the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then
go back down. Remove the obstacle and use
the window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the
switch lightly and hold to close the window
manually.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch up for an additional two seconds
after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
the window completely and continue to hold
the switch down for an additional two
seconds after the window is fully open.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door
trim panel allows you to disable the window
controls on the rear passenger doors. To
disable the window controls, push and release
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped
by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
the window lockout button (the indicator light
on the button will turn on). To enable the
window controls, push and release the window
lockout button again (the indicator light on the
button will turn off).
Window Lockout Switch
POWER SLIDING REAR WINDOW — IF
E
QUIPPED
The switch for the power sliding rear window is
located on the overhead console. Push the
switch rearward to open the glass. Pull the
switch forward to close the glass.
Power Sliding Rear Window Switch
MANUAL SLIDING REAR WINDOW — IF
E
QUIPPED
A locking device in the center of the window
helps to prevent entry from the rear of the
vehicle. Squeeze the lock to release the
window.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
open the front and rear windows together to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
SINGLE PANE POWER SUNROOF — IF
E
QUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located on the
overhead console between the courtesy/
reading lights.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof
Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will open
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and stop automatically.
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any other movement of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to full open.
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch
in the forward position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof will remain in a partially opened
position until the switch is operated and held
again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated,
the sunshade will automatically open with the
sunroof.
Venting Sunroof
To vent open the sunroof, push and release
“tilt” on the vent switch. To close the sunroof
from the vent position, push and release
“down” on the vent switch.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually.
However, the sunshade will open automatically
as the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for
up to approximately 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect system Ú page 258.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
and clear out any debris that may have
collected in the tracks.
HOOD
TO OPEN THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be
released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below
the steering wheel at the base of the
instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center
of the hood and push the safety latch lever
to the left to release it, before raising the
hood.
Safety Latch Location
TO CLOSE THE HOOD
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from
the point where the props no longer hold the
hood open.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TAILGATE
OPENING
The power tailgate may be opened by pushing
the tailgate release pad located on the tailgate
door.
The tailgate damper strut will lower the tailgate
to the open position (if equipped).
Electronic Tailgate Release — If Equipped
The key fob may be equipped with an
electronic release feature for the
tailgate, allowing hands-free tailgate
opening. To activate, push and release
the Tailgate Release button on the key fob twice
within five seconds. The tailgate door will unlatch,
and slowly lower into the open position.
If equipped, a button on the center overhead
console inside the vehicle can be used to
release the tailgate. An indicator light may also
signal when the tailgate is open.
For the tailgate to lower, the vehicle must be
stationary and in PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
The optional Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Ú page 95
may prevent electronic tailgate release. The
Tonneau Cover must be removed or folded up
before releasing the tailgate.
CLOSING
To close the tailgate, push it upward until both
sides are latched.
The tailgate can be locked using the key fob
lock button.
TAILGATE REMOVAL
NOTE:
Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview
camera function.
To remove the tailgate, follow the instructions
below:
1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear
camera and or power locks (if equipped)
Ú
page 85.
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support
cables by releasing the lock tang from the
pivot.
NOTE:
Make sure tailgate is supported when removing
support cables.
Locking Tang
3. Position the tailgate on a 45 degree angle.
4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the
right side pivot clears the hanger bracket.
5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free
the left side pivot.
6. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at
the front center of the hood to ensure that
both latches engage.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
NOTE:
Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck
pickup box.
Disconnecting The Rear Camera And
Remote Keyless Entry
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear
camera or Remote Keyless Entry
connector bracket located on the rear sill.
Connector Bracket
2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill
by pushing inward in the locking tab.
Locking Tab
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness,
ensuring the connector bracket does not
fall into the sill.
Disconnected Harness
4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket
(provided in the glove compartment) to the
chassis wiring harness and insert the
bracket back into the sill.
Chassis Wiring Harness
Chassis Plug
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is
deadly, the exhaust system on vehicles
equipped with “Cap or Slide-In Campers”
should extend beyond the overhanging
camper compartment and be free of leaks.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the
glove compartment) to the tailgate wiring
harness to ensure that the terminals do not
corrode.
Wire Harness Bracket
6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket
against the forward-facing surface of the
tailgate. This will prevent damaging the
connector and bracket when storing or
reinstalling the tailgate.
Taped Tailgate Harness
BED STEP — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
extendable bed step on the driver’s side of the
tailgate to provide easier entry and exit into the
truck bed.
Bed Step Location
Bed Step Components
To extend the bed step, place your foot on the
protruding foot tab located on the left edge of
the bed step, and push rearward. A small
amount of force will release the spring load, and
extend the bed step out and away from the
tailgate.
NOTE:
Once the spring load is overcome, the bed step
will extend out quickly, so be sure to stand in a
position that will avoid coming into contact with
the step as it extends.
1 — Tailgate Plug Release
2 — Tailgate Plug
3 — Tailgate Harness
1 — Bed Step
2 — Foot Tab
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
Bed Step (Extended)
To stow the bed step back under the tailgate,
push the bed step forward with your foot until
the bed step is retracted by the spring load.
PICKUP BOX
The pickup box has many features designed for
utility and convenience.
Pick Up Box Features
NOTE:
If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or
Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box,
you must use Mopar® Box Reinforcement
Brackets that are available from an authorized
dealer.
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of
plywood, etc.) by building a raised load floor.
Place lumber across the box in the indentations
provided above the wheel housings and in the
bulkhead dividers to form the floor.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to stow the bed step with your
hands. The low clearance space between the
bed step and the rear bumper as the bed step
returns to the stowed position could result in
injury to your hands or fingers.
1 — Cleats
2 — Upper Load Floor Indents
3 — Bulk Head Dividers
4 — Anchors
WARNING!
The pickup box is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who
should sit in seats and use seat belts.
Care should always be exercised when oper-
ating a vehicle with unrestrained cargo.
Vehicle speeds may need to be reduced.
Severe turns or rough roads may cause
shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may
result in vehicle damage. If wide building
materials are to be frequently carried, the
installation of a support is recommended.
This will restrain the cargo and transfer the
load to the pickup box floor.
If you wish to carry more than 600 lb
(272 kg) of material suspended above the
wheelhouse, supports must be installed to
transfer the weight of the load to the pickup
box floor or vehicle damage may result. The
use of proper supports will permit loading
up to the rated payload.
Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward
in an accident causing serious or fatal
injury.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the
inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and
behind both wheel housings. Place wooden
boards across the box from side to side to
create separate load compartments in the
pickup box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the
lower sides of the pickup box that can sustain
loads up to 1000 lb (450 kg) total.
CARGO CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cargo
Camera that allows you to see an image of the
inside of the pickup box. The image will be
displayed in the Uconnect screen.
The Cargo Camera is located in the bottom
center area of the Center High Mounted Stop
Lamp (CHMSL).
A touchscreen button to indicate the
current active camera image being
displayed is made available whenever
the Cargo Camera image is displayed.
A touchscreen button to switch the
display to rear view camera image is
made available whenever the Cargo
Camera image is displayed.
A touchscreen button "X" to disable display of
the camera image is made available when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE gear.
A display timer is initiated when the Cargo
Camera image is displayed. The image will
continue to be displayed until the display timer
exceeds 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is
above 8 mph (13 km/h) or the touchscreen
button "X" to disable display of the Cargo
Camera image is pressed.
Cargo Camera With Dynamic Centerline
(Available With Surround View Camera Only) — If
Equipped
The Dynamic Centerline feature provides an
overlay on the Cargo Camera display screen
that aligns to the center of the pickup box to aid
in hooking up a fifth wheel camper or
gooseneck trailer. The centerline auto aligns to
the center of the pickup box, and can also be
manually adjusted. The centerline will adjust in
response to steering angle inputs, and will not
obstruct the gooseneck receiver or an
approaching trailer gooseneck in the camera
feed.
Activation
The Dynamic Centerline feature can be
activated through the Uconnect Settings by
pressing the Cargo Camera soft button,
followed by the “Adjust Centerline” soft button
on the touchscreen.
If the Dynamic Centerline feature is turned on,
the overlay will display anytime the Cargo
Camera image is displayed.
Adjusting Centerline
Follow the steps below to manually adjust the
centerline:
1. Press the “Adjust Centerline” soft button
located in the bottom right corner of the
Cargo Camera display.
2. Use the arrows on the bottom left corner of
the Cargo Camera display to adjust the
centerline horizontally or vertically.
3. Once the desired position is achieved, press
the “Accept” button to set the centerline to
the newly specified position.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
Deactivation
The Dynamic Centerline feature will
automatically be deactivated whenever the
Cargo Camera display is deactivated. It can also
be manually deactivated through the Uconnect
Settings Ú page 258.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Cargo Camera image will be
displayed continuously until the touchscreen
button "X" to disable display of the Cargo
Camera image is pressed.
The touchscreen button “X” to disable the
display of the camera image is made avail-
able ONLY when the vehicle is not in reverse.
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
Turning Cargo Camera On Or Off — With
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Cargo Camera” button to turn
the Cargo Camera system on.
NOTE:
Once initiated by the "Cargo Camera" button,
the Cargo Camera image will be displayed until
the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h) and the 10 second timer runs out.
The image may be deactivated by pressing the
"X" soft button, placing the ignition in the OFF
position, placing the gear selector in PARK, or
pressing the image defeat “X” button. On deac-
tivation, the previous selected screen will
appear.
BED RAIL TIE-DOWN SYSTEM — IF
E
QUIPPED
NOTE:
This feature is only available for vehicles
equipped with a RamBox.
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of
the bed that can be used to assist in securing
cargo.
Adjustable Cleats
Each cleat must be located and tightened down
in one of the detents, along either rail, in order
to keep cargo properly secure.
To move the cleat to any position on the rail,
turn the nut counterclockwise several turns.
Then pull out on the cleat and slide it to the
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed
250 lb (113 kg) and the angle of the load on
each cleat should not exceed 45 degrees
above horizontal, or damage to the cleat or
cleat rail may occur.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
detent nearest the desired location. Make sure
the cleat is seated in the detent and tighten the
nut.
Adjustable Cleat Assembly
Cleat Removal (With Tonneau Cover)
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove
the end cap screw located in the center of the
end cap, using a #T30 Torx head driver.
Remove the end cap and slide the cleat off the
end of the rail.
End Cap Screw Location With Tonneau Cover
Cleat Removal (Without Tonneau Cover)
Remove the end cap by pushing upward on the
release button located beneath the end cap
while pulling the cap away from the rail. The
cleat can now be removed by sliding it off the
end of the rail.
End Cap Release Button Without Tonneau Cover
Pull End Cap Away From Rail
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED
The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box
storage and cargo management system
consisting of up to three features:
Integrated box side storage bins
Cargo divider (if equipped)
Bed rail tie-down system (if equipped)
Ú page 89
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING RAMBOX
Push and release the lock or unlock button on
the key fob to lock and unlock all doors, the
tailgate and the RamBox Ú page 16. The
RamBox storage bins can be locked using the
vehicle key. To lock and unlock the storage bin,
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
insert the key into the keyhole on the push
button and turn clockwise to lock or
counterclockwise to unlock. Always return the
key to the upright (vertical) position before
removing the key from the push button.
RAMBOX CARGO STORAGE BINS
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of
the pickup box. The cargo storage bins provide
watertight, lockable, illuminated storage for up
to 300 lb (136 kg) of evenly distributed cargo.
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins
To open a storage bin with the RamBox
unlocked, push and release the button located
on the lid. The RamBox lid will open upward to
allow hand access. Lift the lid to fully open.
NOTE:
RamBox will not open when the button is
pushed if the RamBox is locked.
RamBox Pushbutton And Lock
CAUTION!
Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and
latched before moving or driving vehicle.
Loads applied to the top of the bin lid
should be minimized to prevent damage to
the lid and latching/hinging mechanisms.
Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due
to heavy/sharp objects placed in bin that
shift due to vehicle motion. In order to mini-
mize potential for damage, secure all cargo
to prevent movement and protect inside
surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp objects
with appropriate padding.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could
cause damage to the vehicle:
Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins
is properly secured.
Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 300 lb
(136 kg) for 2500 and 3500 series vehicles
per bin.
CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of
time could cause the vehicle battery to
discharge. If the lid is required to stay open
for extended periods of time, it is
recommended that the bin lights be turned
off manually using the on/off switch.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The interior of the RamBox will automatically
illuminate when the lid is opened. In addition to
the automatic illumination, there is a manual
on/off switch located at the rear of each storage
bin. Pushing the switch once will turn off the bin
lights, pushing the switch again will turn the
lights back on.
RamBox Light Switch
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs
(to allow water to drain from bins). To remove
plug, pull up on the edge. To install, push the
plug downward into drain hole.
RamBox Drain Plug Removal
NOTE:
Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
dividers and shelf supports. These accessories
(in addition to other RamBox accessories) are
available from Mopar®.
If equipped, a 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum)
inverter may be located inside the RamBox of
your vehicle. The inverter can be turned on by
the Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch
located to the left of the steering wheel. The
RamBox inverter can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices
requiring power up to 400 Watts. Certain video
game consoles exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
RamBox Power Inverter
The Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch is
only found on vehicles equipped with an
exterior power inverter; inside the RamBox or
truck bed. The switch only controls on/off
operation of the exterior power inverter; it does
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
(Continued)
not control on/off operation of the power
outlets located inside the cabin of the vehicle.
Instrument Panel Power Inverter Switch
RAMBOX SAFETY WARNING
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
RamBox Emergency Release Lever
As a security measure, an Emergency Release
Lever is built into the storage bin cover latching
mechanism.
In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be
opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage
bin cover latching mechanism.
Emergency Release Lever
BED DIVIDER — IF EQUIPPED
The bed divider has two functional positions:
Divider Position
Storage Position
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing
your cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from
moving around the bed. There are 11 divider
slots along the bed inner panels which allow for
various positions to assist in managing your
cargo.
WARNING!
Always close the storage bin covers when
your vehicle is unattended.
Do not allow children to have access to the
storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young
children may not be able to escape. If
trapped in the storage bin, children can die
from suffocation or heat stroke.
In an accident, serious injury could result if
the storage bin covers are not properly
latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a
tie-down.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To install the bed divider into a divider position,
perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked
using the vehicle key and rotate the center
handle vertically to release the divider side
gates.
Center Handle And Lock
2. With the side gates open, position the
divider so the outboard ends align with the
intended slots in the sides of the bed.
Aligning Gate To Slots
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the
outboard ends are secured into the
intended slots of the bed.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to
secure the side gates in the closed position.
Side Gates Closed
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel
into place.
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed divider is at the
front of the truck bed which maximizes the bed
cargo area when not in use.
To install the bed divider into the storage
position, perform the same steps as you would
for the divider position, except position the
divider fully forward in the bed against the front
panel.
Storage Position
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
3 — Unlocked Position
4 — Locked Position
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
The outboard ends should be positioned in front
of the cargo tie-down loops.
Cargo Tie-Down Loop
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
CAMPER APPLICATIONS
Certain truck models are not recommended for
slide-in campers. To determine if your vehicle is
excluded, please refer to the “Consumer
Information Truck-Camper Loading” document
at www.ramtrucks.com. For safety reasons,
follow all instructions in this important
document.
NOTE:
When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a
vehicle, an alternate Center High Mounted Stop
Lamp (CHMSL) must be provided.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
The Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover can be installed on
the truck bed to protect your gear and cargo.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER REMOVAL
To remove the Tonneau Cover, use the following
steps:
1. Open the tailgate to gain access to the rear
pair of Tonneau Cover clamps located on
the underside of the cover.
Location Of Rear Latches
NOTE:
If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.
2. Pull both clamp handles down to release
the Tonneau Cover’s rear panel.
Released Position
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is
deadly, the exhaust system on vehicles
equipped with “Cap or Slide-In Campers”
should extend beyond the overhanging
camper compartment and be free of leaks.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. From the Released Position, send the
clamps to the Stowed Position by pushing
from the yellow bumper upward.
Stowed Position
4. Fold the rear panel up onto the center panel
(Intermediate Position).
Folded Rear Panel (Intermediate Position)
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau
Cover is in this position.
5. Fold the rear and center panels up onto the
front panel (Tri-Folded Position).
Tri-Folded Position
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
CAUTION!
Make sure the Tonneau Cover clamp and
clamp wire are in the proper stowed position.
If the clamp and clamp wire are not properly
stowed, damage to the Tonneau Cover
material will result.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
NOTE:
When folding the center and rear panels,
the sections MUST be held together to
avoid damage to the cover material.
Fold the panels gently. It is not recom-
mended to allow the panels to drop
under their own weight.
6. Clip both stowage straps to prevent the
Tonneau Cover panels from unfolding.
Stowage Strap
7. Once in the Tri-Folded Position, pull both
front clamp handles down to the Released
Position.
Released Position
8. From the Released Position, send the
clamps to the Stowed Position by pushing
from the yellow bumper upward. Listen for a
“clicking” sound to confirm the clamp has
been properly stowed.
Stowed Position
9. Utilizing two people, remove the Tonneau
Cover.
NOTE:
Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded
completely, and the stowage straps are
engaged, before removing the cover from the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
The folded tonneau cover must be latched by
both front latches and both front stowage
straps or damage to the tonneau cover or
vehicle may occur.
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER
I
NSTALLATION
To install the Tonneau Cover follow the following
steps:
1. Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the
truck bed and push the cover forward
against the front of the truck bed. The
Tonneau Cover centers itself when placed
on the vehicle.
NOTE:
Make sure to always push the Tonneau Cover
all the way forward on the truck bed. Failure to
do so might prevent proper clamp engagement,
or interfere with the electronic tailgate release
function (if equipped).
Location Of Front Latches
2. Pull down on the first set of clamp handles to
release the clamps from the Stowed Position.
Stowed Position
3. Push clamp wires up and under the flange
of the box (or flange of the Ram Box rail, if
equipped) to the Semi-Clamped Position.
Semi Clamped Position
4. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped
position to properly engage the clamps.
Clamped Position
NOTE:
Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not
improperly attached to the truck bed flange.
Improper Clamp Position
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
5. Disengage the stowage straps.
6. Unfold the center and rear panels to the
Intermediate Position.
Intermediate Position (Vehicle Cannot Be Driven)
NOTE:
When folding the center and rear panels, the
sections MUST be held together to avoid
damage to the cover material.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover.
Fully Unfolded Position
8. Pull the rear clamp handles down into the
Released Position.
Stowed Position
2
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
9. Push clamp wires up and under the flange
of box (or flange of Ram Box rail, if
equipped) to the Semi -Clamped Position.
Semi Clamped Position
10. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped
position to properly engage the clamps.
Clamped Position
Improper Clamp Position
NOTE:
Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not
partially clamped to the truck bed flange.
The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when
in the clamped position by placing a lock
through the locking hole.
Locking Hole
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER CLEANING
For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use
Mopar® Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and
Mopar® Leather & Vinyl Conditioner/
Protectant.
CAUTION!
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the
Tonneau Cover is properly installed on the
vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure can
result in detachment of the Tonneau Cover
from the vehicle and/or damage to the
vehicle/Tonneau Cover.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
101
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GAS ENGINE
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster — Gas Engine
3
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — GAS ENGINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Voltmeter
When the vehicle is in the RUN state, the
gauge indicates the electrical system
voltage. The pointer should stay within
the normal range if the battery is
charged. If the pointer moves to either
extreme left or right and remains there
during normal driving, the electrical
system should be serviced.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 111.
Base Instrument Cluster Display
The display always shows one of the main
menu item after ignition on.
4. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate the oil
pressure when the engine is running. A
continuous high or low reading under
normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Imme-
diate service should be obtained from an
authorized dealer.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Temperature Gauge
The gauge pointer shows engine coolant
temperature. The pointer positioned
within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, or when
towing a trailer. It should not be allowed
to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
7. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. It is recommended to call
an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats Ú page 425.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the tempera-
ture gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi-
tioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains
on the “H,” turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
3
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GAS ENGINE
Premium Instrument Cluster — Gas Engine
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — GAS ENGINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 111.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
The display always shows one of the main
menu item after ignition on.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The gauge pointer shows engine coolant
temperature. The pointer positioned
within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, or when
towing a trailer. It should not be allowed
to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. It is recommended to call
an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats Ú page 425.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the tempera-
ture gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi-
tioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains
on the “H,” turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
3
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ENGINE
Base Instrument Cluster — Diesel Engine
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Engine Coolant Temperature
This gauge shows the engine coolant
temperature. The gauge pointer will likely
show higher temperatures when driving
in hot weather, up mountain grades, or in
heavy stop and go traffic. If the red
Warning Light turns on while driving,
safely bring the vehicle to a stop, and
turn off the engine. DO NOT operate the
vehicle until the cause is corrected.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 111.
Base Instrument Cluster Display
The display always shows one of the main
menu item after ignition on.
4. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate some
oil pressure when the engine is running.
A continuous high or low reading under
normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Imme-
diate service should be obtained from an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. It is recommended to call
an authorized dealer for service if your
vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the tempera-
ture gauge reads greater “H,” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “h,” turn the engine off imme-
diately and call an authorized dealer for ser-
vice.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
3
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
The DEF Gauge displays the actual level
of Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank.
DEF is required to maintain normal
vehicle operation and emissions compli-
ance. If something is wrong with the
gauge, a DEF Warning Message or
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) will be
displayed. More information is available
in the instrument cluster display section
under the heading of DEF Warning
Messages.
7. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel filler door is located.
NOTE:
The gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of DEF
to the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to
the DEF system, the gauge may not update to
the new level. See an authorized dealer for
service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
heater will warm up the DEF fluid and allow
the gauge to update after a period of run
time. Under very cold conditions, it is possible
that the gauge may not reflect the new fill
level for several drives.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ENGINE
Premium Instrument Cluster — Diesel Engine
3
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 111.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
The display always shows one of the main
menu item after ignition on.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
The DEF Gauge displays the actual level
of Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank.
DEF is required to maintain normal
vehicle operation and emissions compli-
ance. If something is wrong with the
gauge, a DEF Warning Message or
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) will be
displayed. More information is available
in the instrument cluster display section
under the heading of Diesel Exhaust
Fluid (DEF) Warning Messages.
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel filler door is located.
NOTE:
The DEF tank on these vehicles is designed
with a large amount of full reserve. So the
level sensor will indicate a full reading even
before the tank is completely full. To put it
another way, there’s additional storage
capacity in the tank above the Full mark
that’s not represented in the gauge. You may
not see any movement in the reading – even
after driving up to 200 miles (322 kilome-
ters) in some cases.
The gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of DEF
to the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to
the DEF system, the gauge may not update to
the new level. See an authorized dealer for
service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
heater will warm up the DEF fluid and allow
the gauge to update after a period of run
time. Under very cold conditions, it is possible
that the gauge may not reflect the new fill
level for several drives.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information
to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the
display for viewing, and display the total miles,
or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and
features. Using a driver interactive display
located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through the main
menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
C
ONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Base Instrument Cluster Display
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display menu items may
consist of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip Info
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
3
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trailer Tow
Audio
Messages
Screen Set Up
Commercial Settings — If Equipped
The system allows the driver to select
information by pushing the following instrument
cluster display control buttons located on the
left side of the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to
scroll upward through the main menu items,
submenu screen, and vehicle settings.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button
to scroll downward through the main menu
items, submenu screen, and vehicle settings.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access/select the information screens or
submenu screens of a main menu item. Push
and hold the right arrow button for two
seconds to reset displayed/selected features
that can be reset.
Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to
access/select the information screens,
submenu screens of a main menu item, or to
return to the main menu.
OIL LIFE RESET
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the
instrument cluster display after a single chime
has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
NOTE:
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster
display controls for the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button
to scroll downward through the main menu
to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the right arrow button
to access the ”Vehicle Info” screen, then
scroll up or down to select “Oil Life.”
4. Push and hold the right arrow button to
select “Reset”.
5. Push and release the down arrow button
to select “Yes,” then push and release the
right arrow button to reset the Oil Life to
100%.
6. Push and release the up arrow button to
exit the instrument cluster display screen.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return
the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the desired selectable menu icon is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the speedometer menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the right arrow button to
cycle the display between mph and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Vehicle Info menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the right arrow button to
enter the submenus items of Vehicle Info.
Follow the directional prompts to access or
reset any of the following Vehicle Info submenu
items:
Tire Pressure
Coolant Temperature
Transmission Temperature — If Equipped
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure
Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
Turbo Boost — If Equipped
Diesel Particulate Filter — If Equipped
Oil Life
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Battery Voltage
Gauge Summary
Engine Hours
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of
the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and
LaneSense systems.
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Driver Assist menu is displayed
in the instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature
The instrument cluster display displays the
current ACC system settings. The information
displayed depends on ACC system status.
Push the ACC on/off button (located on the
steering wheel) until one of the following
displays in the instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
3
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display
in the instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the instrument cluster Ú page 123.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the
current LaneSense system settings. The
information displayed depends on LaneSense
system status and the conditions that need to
be met.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and Hold the right arrow button to reset
Average Fuel Economy.
Current Fuel Economy Gauge
Average Fuel Economy Value
Range To Empty
Trip A/Trip B
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip menu item is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the right arrow button to enter the
submenus of Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip
B information will display the following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Push and hold right arrow button to reset all
information.
Trailer Tow
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trailer Tow menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the right or left arrow
button to cycle through the following trailer tow
information:
Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold
the OK button to reset the distance.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM):
Braking Output
Trailer Type
ITBM Gain
Trailer Light Check: Push and hold the OK
button to begin the Trailer Light Test
sequence Ú page 245.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring: The Instru-
ment Cluster Display will display the Trailer
Tire Pressure for a connected trailer with
sensors that match the active trailer profile.
When a low tire is present, the low tire value
will be displayed in red, and the affected low
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
tire will have a red glow. “Trailer Tire Low“ will
be displayed on the center bottom of the
Instrument Cluster Display screen.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio Menu icon/title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
This menu will display the audio source
information, including the Song name, Artist
name, and audio source with an accompanying
graphic.
Phone Call Status
When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status
pop-up will display on the screen. The pop-up
will remain until the phone is answered or
ignored.
NOTE:
The call status will temporarily replace the
previous media source information displayed
on the screen. When the pop-up is no longer
displayed, the display will return to the last used
screen.
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Messages Menu item is
highlighted. This feature shows the number of
stored warning messages. Push and release the
right or left arrow button to cycle through
stored messages.
Screen Setup Menu Item
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the right arrow button to
enter the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen
Setup feature allows you to change what
information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information
is displayed.
Current Gear
Off
On
Odometer
Unit Without Decimal
Unit With Decimal
Favorite Menu
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist (Show/Hide) — If Equipped
Fuel Economy (Show/Hide)
Trip Info (Show/Hide)
Trailer Tow (Show/Hide)
Audio (Show/Hide)
Messages
Screen Setup
Commercial Settings — If Equipped
NOTE:
Menus with (Show/Hide) can push the right
arrow button to choose whether to show or hide
this menu in the instrument cluster display.
Upper Left
None
Compass — If Equipped
Outside Temp — If Equipped
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG
3
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Current MPG
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip — If Equipped
Trailer Brake — If Equipped
Oil Pressure — If Equipped
Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
Oil Temperature — If Equipped
Battery Voltage — If Equipped
Transmission Temperature — If Equipped
Oil Life — If Equipped
Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
Turbo Boost — If Equipped
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Upper Center
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip
Audio
Speedometer
Menu Title
Upper Right
None
Compass — If Equipped
Outside Temp — If Equipped
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip — If Equipped
Trailer Brake — If Equipped
Oil Pressure — If Equipped
Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
Oil Temperature — If Equipped
Battery Voltage — If Equipped
Transmission Temperature — If Equipped
Oil Life — If Equipped
Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
Turbo Boost — If Equipped
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Left Side — If Equipped
None
Range
Average MPG
Menu Icon
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
Coolant Temperature
Oil Temperature
Transmission Temperature
Oil Life
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Right Side — If Equipped
None
Range
Average MPG
Menu Icon
Coolant Temperature
Oil Temperature
Transmission Temperature
Oil Life
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Lower Left — If Equipped
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip
Trailer Brake
Oil Pressure
Coolant Temperature
Oil Temperature
Battery Voltage
Transmission Temperature
Oil Life
Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
Turbo Boost — If Equipped
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Lower Right — If Equipped
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip
Trailer Brake
Oil Pressure
Coolant Temperature
Oil Temperature
Battery Voltage
Transmission Temperature
Oil Life
3
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
Turbo Boost — If Equipped
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Restore Defaults
Cancel
Restore
Commercial Settings — If Equipped
Commercial Settings allows the driver to set
and recall additional features when the
transmission is in PARK (P).
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until Commercial Settings displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Follow the prompts to enter the required PIN
and enter the Commercial Settings submenu.
Commercial Settings allows you to access the
following features (if equipped):
Backup Alarm
ParkSense
Aux Switches
PIN Setup
NOTE:
If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not known,
see an authorized dealer to have the PIN reset.
DIESEL MESSAGES AND WARNINGS —
6.7L C
UMMINS DIESEL ENGINE
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages
The Cummins diesel engine meets all diesel
emissions standards, resulting in one of the
lowest emitting diesel engines ever produced.
To achieve these emissions standards, your
vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art
engine and exhaust system. These systems are
seamlessly integrated into your vehicle and
managed by the Powertrain Control Module
(PCM). The PCM manages engine combustion
to allow the exhaust system’s catalyst to trap
and burn Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants,
with no input or interaction on your part.
Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to
additional maintenance required on your
vehicle or engine. The following messages may
display in your instrument cluster display:
Perform Service — Your vehicle will require
emissions maintenance at a set interval. To
help remind you when this maintenance is
due, the instrument cluster display will
display “Perform Service”. When the
“Perform Service” message is displayed in
the instrument cluster display it is necessary
to have the emissions maintenance
performed. Emissions maintenance may
include replacing the Closed Crankcase
Ventilation (CCV) filter element. The proce-
dure for clearing and resetting the "Perform
Service" indicator message is located in the
appropriate Service Information.
Exhaust System — Regeneration Required
Now — "Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at
Highway Speeds to Remedy" will be displayed
in the instrument cluster display if the
exhaust particulate filter reaches 80% of its
maximum storage capacity. Under conditions
of exclusive short duration and low speed
driving cycles, your Cummins diesel engine
and exhaust after-treatment system may
never reach the conditions required to
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials
might be grass or leaves coming into contact
with your exhaust system. Do not park or oper-
ate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust
system can contact anything that can burn.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
remove the trapped Particulate Matter (PM).
If this occurs, the “Exhaust Filter XX% Full
Safely Drive at Highway Speeds to Remedy”
message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display. If this message is displayed,
you will hear one chime to assist in alerting
you of this condition
By simply driving your vehicle at highway
speeds for as little as 45 minutes, you can
remedy the condition in the particulate filter
system and allow your Cummins diesel
engine and exhaust after-treatment system
to remove the trapped Particulate Matter
(PM) and restore the system to normal oper-
ating condition.
Exhaust System — Regeneration In Process
Exhaust Filter XX% Full — Indicates that the
DPF is self-cleaning. Maintain your current
driving condition until regeneration is
completed.
Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed
— This message indicates that the DPF
self-cleaning is completed. If this message is
displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in
alerting you of this condition.
Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer
Now — This message indicates regeneration
has been disabled due to a system malfunc-
tion. At this point the engine Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) will register a fault
code, the instrument panel will display a MIL
light.
Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See
Dealer — This message indicates the PCM
has derated the engine to limit the likelihood
of permanent damage to the after-treatment
system. If this condition is not corrected and
a dealer service is not performed, extensive
exhaust after-treatment damage can occur.
To correct this condition it will be necessary
to have your vehicle serviced by your local
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Failing to follow the oil change indicator,
changing your oil and resetting the oil change
indicator by 0 miles remaining will prevent the
diesel exhaust filter from performing it's
cleaning routine. This will shortly result in a
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) and reduced
engine power. Only an authorized dealer will be
able to correct this condition.
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Messages
The vehicle will display messages when a
derate (engine power reduction) is activated to
protect the engine during start up in cold
ambient temperatures.
Engine Power Reduced During Warm up —
This message will display during start up
when the ambient temperature is between
10°F (-12°C) and -10°F (-23°C).
Engine Power Reduced Up To 30 Sec
(Seconds) During Warm up — This message
will display during start up when the ambient
temperature is between -10°F (-23°C) and
-25°F (-32°C).
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
exhaust system could occur soon with
continued operation.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
exhaust system could occur soon with
continued operation.
3
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Power Reduced Up To 2 Min
(Minutes) During Warm up — This message
will display during start up when the ambient
temperature is -25°F (-32°C) and below.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine
warm up protection feature that may limit
engine performance after cold starting at low
ambient temperatures. The length of time
engine speed is limited is dependent upon
engine coolant temperature. Engine speed
may be briefly limited to 1,000 RPM after
starting with coolant temperature below
freezing conditions, and may be limited to
1,000 RPM for up to approximately two
minutes under more severe cold conditions.
Coolant Low — This telltale will turn on to indi-
cate the vehicle coolant level is low
Ú page 408.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning
Messages
There are four different messages which are
displayed if the vehicle detects that the DEF
system has been filled with a fluid other than
DEF, has experienced component failures, or
when tampering has been detected. The vehicle
may be limited to a maximum speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h) if the DEF system is not serviced
within less than 200 miles (322 km) of the fault
being detected.
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the
following warnings will display:
DEF Low Refill Soon — This message will
display when the low level is reached, during
vehicle start up, and with increased
frequency during vehicle operation. It will be
accompanied by a single chime. Approxi-
mately 5 gallons (19 Liters) of DEF is required
to refill the tank when this message is initially
displayed. on pickup applications, and
approximately 7 gallons (26 Liters) are
required on chassis-cab applications.
Speed Limited to 5 MPH in XXX mi Refill DEF
— This message will continuously display if
the “DEF Low Refill Soon” message is
ignored, and the frequency of occurrence of
the chime will increase unless up to 2 gallons
(7.5 Liters) of DEF is added to the tank.
5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or
Refuel Refill DEF — This message will contin-
uously display when the counter reaches
zero, and will be accompanied by a periodic
chime.
The vehicle will only be capable of a
maximum speed of 5 mph upon the first of
the following conditions to occur:
If the vehicle is shutoff and restarted.
If the vehicle is idled for an extended
period of time, approximately one hour or
greater.
If the system detects that the level of fuel
in the tank has increased.
Add a minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) of
DEF to the tank in order to avoid vehicle oper-
ation at a maximum speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h).
NOTE:
A minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) may be
required to restore normal vehicle operation.
Although the vehicle will start normally and can
be placed in gear after this message has been
initially displayed, extreme caution should be
utilized since the vehicle will only be capable of
maneuvering at a maximum speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h).
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault Warning
Messages
There are five different messages which are
displayed if the vehicle detects that the DEF
system has been filled with a fluid other than
DEF, has experienced component failures, or
when tampering has been detected. The vehicle
may be limited to a maximum speed of 5 mph
(8 km/H) if the DEF system is not serviced
within less than 200 miles (322 km) of the fault
being detected.
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the
following warnings will display:
Service DEF System See Dealer — This
message will display when the fault is initially
detected, each time the vehicle is started,
and periodically during driving. The message
will be accompanied by a single chime. We
recommend you drive to your nearest autho-
rized dealer and have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible.
5 MPH Max Speed in 150 mi Service DEF
System See Dealer — This message will
display if the DEF system has not been
serviced after the “Service DEF System – See
Dealer” message is displayed. This message
will continuously display until the mileage
counter reaches zero, and will be accompa-
nied by a periodic chime. The message will
continue to countdown until it reaches zero
unless the vehicle is serviced. We recom-
mend you drive to your nearest authorized
dealer and have your vehicle serviced imme-
diately.
NOTE:
Under some circumstances this mileage
counter may start with a value of less than
150 miles (241 km). For example, if recurring
faults are detected in a time interval of less
than 40 hours, the counter may restart at the
value where it stopped when a previous fault
was temporarily remedied, or at a minimum of
50 miles (80 km).
5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or
Refuel Service DEF See Dealer — This
message will continuously display when the
mileage counter reaches zero, and will be
accompanied by a periodic chime.
The vehicle will only be capable of a
maximum speed of 5 mph upon the first of
the following conditions to occur:
If the vehicle is shutoff and restarted.
If the vehicle is idled for an extended
period of time, approximately one hour or
greater.
If the system detects that the level of fuel
in the tank has increased.
5 MPH Max Speed Service DEF System See
Dealer — This message will continuously
display, and will be accompanied by a peri-
odic chime. Although the vehicle can be
started and placed in gear, the vehicle will
only operate at a maximum speed of 5 mph.
Your vehicle will require towing, see an
authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
When this message is displayed, the engine can
still be started. However, the vehicle will only
operate at a maximum speed of 5 mph.
Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer — This
message will display when the fault is initially
detected, each time the vehicle is started,
and periodically during driving. The message
will be accompanied by a single chime. We
recommend you drive to your nearest autho-
rized dealer and have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible.
3
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RAM Active Air System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Ram
Active Air system that provides enhanced
performance, especially when towing under
demanding hot or high altitude conditions. If the
instrument cluster display displays the
message “Active Airbox Service Required See
Dealer”, vehicle performance may be reduced
until service is performed by an authorized RAM
dealer.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions
will take place to extend the driving time and
distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On Some Systems May Have
Reduced Power” will appear in the instrument
cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system Ú page 125.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
Heated Seats/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and
interior lights, overloaded power outlets
+12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports) during
certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volts portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles
and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
rior).
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB
ports.
Check HVAC settings (blower, tempera-
ture).
Check the audio settings (volume).
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecu-
tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle
and driving pattern did not help to identify the
cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a
failure indication. All active telltales will display
first if applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment
options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 330.
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays
3
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the hood is ajar/open and not fully
closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and
a single chime will sound. If the temperature
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will
sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/
C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle.
If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call
for service Ú page 389.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC
system. If a problem is detected while
the vehicle is running, the light will
either stay on or flash depending on the nature
of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the
vehicle is safely and completely stopped and
the transmission is placed in the PARK (P)
position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
3
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the Trailer Brake has been
disconnected.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you
may continue to drive normally.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
chime.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the ACC system.
Contact a local authorized dealer for
service Ú page 202.
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate when a fault is
detected with the air suspension
system.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the ESC system is Active. The ESC
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and when ESC is activated. It should go
out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is
off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the
driver with visual and steering torque
warnings when the vehicle starts to
drift out of its lane unintentionally
without the use of a turn signal.
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid green to solid yellow.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white/green to flashing
yellow Ú page 218.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
3
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the LaneSense system is not
operating and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 3.2 gal (12 L) this light
will turn on, and remain on until fuel is
added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
Warning.
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
vehicle coolant level is low.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly
close the filler cap to disengage the
light. If the light does not turn off,
please see an authorized dealer.
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate when Trailer Merge Assist
has been activated Ú page 313.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
Rear Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate when a rear axle locker fault
has been detected.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
3
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward
Collision Warning System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service
Ú page 320.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
signal a fault with the 4WD system. If
the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system
is not functioning properly and that service is
required. We recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Cruise Control System is
not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is
a fault in the sway bar disconnect
system.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to
indicate that Forward Collision
Warning is off.
Air Suspension Payload Protection
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the maximum payload
may have been exceeded or load
leveling cannot be achieved at its
current ride height. Protection Mode will
automatically be selected in order to “protect”
the air suspension system, air suspension
adjustment is limited due to payload.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when TOW/HAUL mode is selected.
Cargo Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cargo light is activated by
pushing the cargo light button on the
headlight switch.
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when a derate (engine power
reduction) is activated for protection
of the turbocharger in cold ambient
temperatures.
Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Diesel Exhaust Brake has
been activated, and is in full strength
mode Ú page 155.
Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front sway bar is
disconnected.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
Snowplow Mode Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when Snowplow Mode has been
activated Ú page 248.
Air Suspension Alternate Trailer Height
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the
Alternate Trailer Height setting
Ú page 177.
Air Suspension Bed Lowering Mode
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the Bed
Lowering Mode procedure is
complete Ú page 177.
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will blink and alert the driver
that the vehicle is changing to a
higher ride height Ú page 177.
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will blink and alert the driver
that the vehicle is changing to a lower
ride height Ú page 177.
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the front,
rear, or both axles have been locked.
The telltale will display the lock icon
on the front and rear axles to indicate
the current lock status.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle
lock has been activated Ú page 168.
4WD Lock Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the 4WD LOCK mode. The
front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed Ú page 168.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the 4WD Low mode. The
front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels Ú page 168.
4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the 4WD HIGH mode. The
front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
4WD power transfer case is in the
NEUTRAL mode and the front and rear
driveshafts are disengaged from the
powertrain.
3
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
The Low DEF Indicator will illuminate
if the vehicle is low on DEF
Ú page 420.
Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate for
approximately two seconds when the
ignition is turned to the RUN position.
Its duration may be longer based on
colder operating conditions. Vehicle will not
initiate start until telltale is no longer displayed
Ú page 140.
NOTE:
The “Wait To Start” telltale may not illuminate if
the intake manifold temperature is warm
enough.
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” will
illuminate when there is water
detected in the fuel filter. If this light
remains on, DO NOT start the vehicle
before you drain the water from the fuel filter to
prevent engine damage.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set
and a vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 202.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when the
Adaptive Cruise Control is SET and
there is no vehicle in front detected
Ú page 202.
Automatic Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Diesel Exhaust Brake has
been activated, and has switched to
Automatic mode Ú page 155.
ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when ECO Mode
is active.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid green when both
lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” and ready
to provide visual and torque warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs
Ú page 218.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
If equipped with fog lamps, the fog lamp on
the side of the activated turn signal will also
illuminate to provide additional light when
turning.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is set to the
desired speed Ú page 200.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the
vehicle equipped with ACC has been
turned on but not set Ú page 202.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is ready, but
not set Ú page 200.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC
feature is turned on. The lamp will be
on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can
only be armed when the transfer case
is in the 4WD LOW position and the vehicle
speed is less then 20 mph (32 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to use
the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
flash on/off.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON,
but not armed, the LaneSense
indicator light illuminates solid white.
This occurs when only left, right, or
neither lane line has been detected. If a single
lane line is detected, the system is ready to
provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line
Ú page 218.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
3
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may
need to access this information to assist with
the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 257.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
3
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE
ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belt.
The starter should not be operated for more
than 10-second intervals. Waiting a few
seconds between such intervals will protect the
starter from overheating.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission in PARK
position. Apply the brake before shifting into any
driving range.
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal
must be pressed to shift out of PARK.
If equipped with an eight-speed transmis-
sion, starting the vehicle in NEUTRAL is not
possible unless the Manual Park Release has
been activated Ú page 388.
TIP START FEATURE
Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition
switch briefly to the START position and release
it. The starter motor will continue to run and will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in the
"OFF" mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long
as the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key
fob is in the passenger compartment.
NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE
START/STOP B
UTTON
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds or three short pushes in a
row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The
ignition will remain in the ACC mode until
the gear selector is in PARK and the button
is pushed twice to the OFF mode.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
once with the vehicle speed above 5 mph
(8 km/h), the instrument cluster will display
a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once with
the vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the
engine will shut off and the ignition will remain in
the ACC position. If vehicle speed drops below
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark.
See AutoPark section for further details.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:
OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition
modes without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to place the ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
mode.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
AUTOPARK — ROTARY SHIFTER AND
E
IGHT-SPEED TRANSMISSION ONLY
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK should the
situations on the following pages occur. It is a
back up system and should not be relied upon
as the primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will
engage are outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and
an eight-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the igni-
tion switches to OFF automatically, unless the
driver turns the ignition switch off.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and
an eight-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the
“AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear”
to not be seen. In these cases, the shifter must
be returned to “P” to select desired gear.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display
and near the gear selector. If the “P” indi-
cator is blinking, your vehicle is not in
PARK. As an added precaution, always
apply the parking brake when exiting the
vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system
and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed
is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h).
4WD Low — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD Low.
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given
when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
Vehicle is in 4WD Low range
The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle
into PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the “P” in the
instrument cluster display and near the shifter.
As an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the “Normal Starting” procedure, it
may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there while the
engine is cranking. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run
for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the
brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 386.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to
run, but not have enough power to continue
running when the ignition button/key is
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with
the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the
floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the
ignition button/key once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after a
10 second period of engine cranking with the
accelerator pedal held to the floor, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION (BELOW
–22°F O
R −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from an
authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
The starter should not be operated for more
than 25-second intervals. Waiting a few
minutes between such intervals will protect the
starter from overheating.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission in the
NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake
before shifting to any driving range.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at
a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying
again.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in the
“OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition
switch briefly to the START position and release
it. The starter motor will continue to run and will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long
as the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key
fob is in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
25 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, remove
your foot from the brake pedal and push the
ENGINE START/STOP button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or
pressing the accelerator pedal.
Under cold weather conditions, the engine
may not immediately crank if the “Wait To
Start” telltale is illuminated. This is normal
operation. For vehicles equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go, the vehicle will automat-
ically crank when the “Wait To Start” time has
elapsed Ú page 143.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
once, the instrument cluster will display a
“Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the
vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h),
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once will turn the engine off. The ignition will
remain in the ACC mode.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the ENGINE START/STOP button must be
held for two seconds (or three short pushes
in a row) to turn the engine off. The ignition
will remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF
mode) if the engine is turned off when the
transmission is not in PARK.
NOTE:
If the ignition is left in the ACC or ON/RUN
(engine not running) mode and the transmis-
sion is in PARK, the system will automatically
time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the
ignition return to the OFF mode.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three
positions, OFF, ACC, RUN. To change the
ignition switch positions without starting the
vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to change the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to change the ignition to the
RUN position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Starting Procedure —
Engine Manifold Air Temperature 0°F To
66°F (–18°C to 19°C)
NOTE:
The temperature displayed in the instrument
cluster does not necessarily reflect the engine
manifold air temperature Ú page 111. When
engine temperatures fall below 66°F (19°C)
the “Wait To Start” telltale will remain on indi-
cating the intake air heater system is active.
Follow the steps in the “Normal Starting”
procedure except:
1. Pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
with the driver’s foot on the brake will
move the ignition from OFF or ACC to RUN,
and will illuminate the “Wait To Start”
telltale. The engine will not immediately
crank, this is normal operation.
2. The “Wait To Start” telltale will remain on for
a period of time that varies depending on
the engine temperature.
3. While the “Wait to Start” telltale is on, the
instrument cluster will additionally display a
gauge or bar whose initial length represents
the full “Wait to Start” time period. Its length
will decrease until it disappears when the
“Wait to Start” time has elapsed.
4. After the engine “Wait To Start” telltale goes
off, the engine will automatically crank.
5. After engine start-up, check to see that
there is oil pressure.
6. Release the parking brake and drive.
NOTE:
Engine idle speed will automatically increase
to 1,000 RPM and engage the Variable
Geometry Turbocharger at low coolant
temperatures to improve engine warm-up.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains
on, DO NOT START the engine before you
drain the water from the fuel filters to avoid
engine damage Ú page 415.
CAUTION!
Do not crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time or starter motor dam-
age may result. Turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position and wait at least two minutes for
the starter to cool before repeating start pro-
cedure.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
The engine will not automatically crank after
the engine “Wait To Start” telltale goes off if
a door or the hood is ajar.
If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is
left ON for more than two minutes after the
“Wait To Start” telltale goes out, reset the
intake air heater by turning the ignition
switch to the OFF position for at least five
seconds and then back ON. Repeat steps
1 through 6 of “Keyless Enter-N-Go Starting
Procedure – Engine Manifold Air Tempera-
ture 0°F To 66°F (–18°C to 19°C).”
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine is
equipped with several features designed to
assist cold weather starting and operation:
The engine block heater is a resistance
heater installed in the water jacket of the
engine just above and behind the oil filter. It
requires a 110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory
installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped,
heater cords are available from an authorized
Mopar® dealer.
A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter hous-
ings aid in preventing fuel gelling. It is
controlled by a built-in thermostat.
A intake air heater system both improves
engine starting and reduces the amount of
white smoke generated by a warming engine.
NORMAL STARTING PROCEDURE —
E
NGINE MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE
A
BOVE 66°F (19°C)
Observe the instrument panel cluster lights
when starting the engine.
1. Always apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into PARK for an automatic
transmission.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position
and watch the instrument panel cluster
lights.
4. Place the ignition switch in the START
position and crank the engine. Do not press
the accelerator during starting.
5. Check that the oil pressure warning light
has turned off.
6. Release the parking brake.
STARTING PROCEDURE — ENGINE
M
ANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE 0°F TO
66°F (–18°C
TO 19°C)
NOTE:
The temperature displayed in the instrument
cluster does not necessarily reflect the engine
manifold air temperature Ú page 111. When
engine temperatures fall below 66°F (19°C)
the “Wait To Start” telltale will remain on indi-
cating the intake air heater system is active.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains
on, DO NOT START the engine before you
drain the water from the fuel filters to avoid
engine damage Ú page 415.
CAUTION!
Do not crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time or starter motor
damage may result. Turn the ignition switch to
the OFF position and wait at least two
minutes for the starter to cool before
repeating start procedure.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
Follow the steps in the “Normal Starting”
procedure except:
1. The “Wait To Start” telltale will remain on
for a period of time that varies depending
on the engine temperature.
2. While the “Wait To Start” telltale is on, the
instrument cluster will additionally display a
gauge or bar whose initial length represents
the full “Wait To Start” time period. Its
length will decrease until it disappears
when the “Wait To Start” time has elapsed.
3. After the “Wait To Start” telltale goes off,
place the ignition switch in the START
position. Do not press the accelerator
during starting.
4. After engine start-up, check that the Oil
Pressure Warning light has turned off.
5. Release the parking brake and drive.
NOTE:
Engine idle speed will automatically increase
to 1,000 RPM and engage the Variable
Geometry Turbocharger at low coolant
temperatures to improve engine warm-up.
Automatic equipped vehicles with optional
Keyless Enter-N-Go – If the start button is
pushed once while in park with the ignition
off and driver’s foot on the brake pedal, the
vehicle will automatically crank and start
after the Wait to Start time has elapsed. If it
is desired to abort the start process before it
completes, the driver’s foot should be fully
removed from the brake pedal prior to
pushing the start button again in order for the
ignition to move directly to off.
If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is
left ON for more than two minutes after the
“Wait To Start” telltale goes out, reset the
intake air heater by turning the ignition
switch to the OFF position for at least five
seconds and then back ON. Repeat steps
1 through 5 of “Starting Procedure – Engine
Manifold Air Temperature 0°F To 66°F
(–18°C to 19°C).”
STARTING PROCEDURE — ENGINE
M
ANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE BELOW
0°F (-18°C)
In extremely cold weather below 0°F (-18°C) it
may be beneficial to cycle the intake air heater
twice before attempting to start the engine. This
can be accomplished by turning the ignition off
or at least 5 seconds and then back ON after
the “Wait To Start” telltale has turned off, but
before the engine is started. However,
excessive cycling of the intake air heater will
result in damage to the heater elements or
reduced battery voltage.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains
on, DO NOT START the engine before you
drain the water from the fuel filters to avoid
engine damage Ú page 415.
CAUTION!
Do not crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time or starter motor
damage may result. Turn the ignition switch to
the OFF position and wait at least two
minutes for the starter to cool before
repeating start procedure.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
(Continued)
NOTE:
If multiple pre-heat cycles are used before
starting, additional engine run time may be
required to maintain battery state of charge at a
satisfactory level.
1. If the engine stalls after the initial start, the
ignition must be turned to the OFF position
for at least five seconds and then to the ON
position to recycle the intake air heater.
NOTE:
Excessive white smoke and poor engine perfor-
mance will result if intake air heater is not recy-
cled.
2. Heat generated by the intake air heater
dissipates rapidly in a cold engine. If more
than two minutes pass between the time
the “Wait To Start” telltale turns off and the
engine is started, recycle the intake air
heater by turning the ignition switch to the
OFF position for at least five seconds and
then back ON.
3. If the vehicle is driven and vehicle speed
exceeds 19 mph (31 km/h) before the
intake air heater post-heat (after start) cycle
is complete, the intake air heater will shut
off.
4. If the engine is cranked for more than
10 seconds, the post-heat cycle will turn off.
NOTE:
Engine idle speed will automatically increase
to 1,000 RPM and engage the Variable
Geometry Turbocharger at low coolant
temperatures to improve engine warm-up.
When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of
fuel or the fuel gels at low temperatures, air
is pulled into the fuel system. If your engine
has run out of fuel Ú page 418.
If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is
left ON for more than two minutes after the
“Wait To Start” telltale goes out, reset the
intake air heater by turning the ignition
switch to the OFF position for at least five
seconds and then back ON. Repeat steps
1 through 5 of “Starting Procedure – Engine
Manifold Air Temperature 0°F to 66°F
(-18°C to 19°C)” Ú page 143.
STARTING FLUIDS
The engine is equipped with an automatic
electric air preheating system. If the
instructions in this manual are followed, the
engine should start in all conditions.
WARNING!
Starting fluids or flammable liquids must
never be used in the Cummins® diesel
engine (see Warning label). Never pour diesel
fuel, flammable liquid, starting fluids (ether)
into the air cleaner canister, air intake piping,
or turbocharger inlet in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
and explosion causing serious personal injury
and engine damage.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE
Observe the following when the engine is
operating:
All message center lights are off.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
Engine oil pressure is above 10 psi (69 kPa)
at idle.
Voltmeter operation:
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This cycling
operation is caused by the post-heat cycle of the
intake manifold heater system. The number of
cycles and the length of the cycling operation is
controlled by the engine control module.
Post-heat operation can run for several
minutes, and then the electrical system and
voltmeter needle will stabilize.
The cycling action will cause temporary
dimming of the headlamps, interior lamps, and
also a noticeable reduction in blower motor
speed.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in the
“OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F (0°C) may require special considerations. The following charts suggest these options:
Fuel Operating Range
NOTE:
Use “Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels” ONLY.
Fuel Operating Range Chart
*Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel should only be used where extended arctic conditions (0°F/-18°C) exist”.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Use of Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
or Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
results in a noticeable decrease in fuel
economy.
Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel is a
blend of Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur and
Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels
which reduces the temperature at which wax
crystals form in fuel.
The fuel grade should be clearly marked on
the pump at the fuel station.
The engine requires the use of “Ultra Low
Sulfur Diesel Fuel”. Use of incorrect fuel
could result in engine and exhaust system
damage Ú page 477.
If Climatized or Diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel is
not available, and you are operating below
(20°F/-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions,
Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or
equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling
(see Fuel Operating Range Chart).
Under some circumstances increased engine
noise may be audible in the seconds
following a cold start. This is most likely to
occur when using fuel that isn't blended for
the ambient temperature present. This may
occur on an unseasonably cold day or when a
truck is fueled in a warmer climate and driven
to a colder climate. The noise can typically be
prevented by using Mopar® Premium Diesel
Fuel Treatment as recommended (see Fuel
Operating Range Chart).
Engine Oil Usage
For the correct engine oil viscosity Ú page 408.
Winter Front Cover Usage
A Winter front or cold weather cover is to be
used in ambient temperatures below 32°F
(0°C), especially during extended idle
conditions. This cover is equipped with four
flaps for managing total grille opening in varying
ambient temperatures. If a Winter front or cold
weather cover is to be used the flaps should be
left in the full open position to allow air flow to
the charge air cooler and automatic
transmission oil cooler. When ambient
temperatures drop below 0°F (-17°C) the four
flaps need to be closed. A suitable cold weather
cover is available from your Mopar® dealer.
Battery Blanket Usage
A battery loses 60% of its cranking power as the
battery temperature decreases to 0°F (-18°C).
For the same decrease in temperature, the
engine requires twice as much power to crank
at the same RPM. The use of 120 VAC powered
battery blankets will greatly increase starting
capability at low temperatures. Suitable battery
blankets are available from an authorized
dealer.
Engine Warm-Up
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is
cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the
engine up to operating speed slowly to allow the
oil pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up.
NOTE:
High-speed, no-load running of a cold engine
can result in excessive white smoke and poor
engine performance. No-load engine speeds
should be kept under 1,000 RPM during the
warm-up period, especially in cold ambient
temperature conditions.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine
warm-up protection feature that may limit
engine performance after cold starting at low
ambient temperatures. The length of time
engine speed is limited is dependent upon
engine coolant temperature. Engine speed may
be briefly limited to 1000 RPM after starting
with coolant temperature below freezing
conditions, and may be limited to 1000 RPM for
up to approximately two minutes under more
severe cold conditions.
NOTE:
If ambient temperatures are low and the
coolant temperature is below 180°F (82°C),
the engine idle speed will slowly increase to
1,000 RPM after two minutes of idle, if the
following conditions are met:
Foot is off brake pedal and throttle pedal.
Automatic transmission is in PARK.
Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Applying the throttle will cancel fast idle.
Operating the exhaust brake at idle will
greatly improve warm-up rate and will help
keep the engine close to operating tempera-
ture during extended idle.
ENGINE IDLING
Avoid prolonged idling, long periods of idling
may be harmful to your engine because
combustion chamber temperatures can drop so
low that the fuel may not burn completely.
Incomplete combustion allows carbon and
varnish to form on piston rings, engine valves,
and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel
can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil and
causing rapid wear to the engine.
If the engine is allowed to idle or the truck is
driven on low engine speed drive cycles for
more than two hours, the system will
automatically enter an emissions operating
mode that will increase the engine idle speed to
900 RPM. While in this mode, which is designed
to help maintain the diesel particulate filter, the
engine idle speed will return to normal when the
brake pedal is applied. A small change in engine
tone or a slight change in engine performance
while accelerating may also be noticeable at
speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h). This
operating mode may last for up to an hour of
idle time, or around 20 minutes of driving time.
Your truck may have been ordered with an
optional voltage monitoring idle-up feature. If a
load is placed on the electrical system while the
truck is in park, this feature will attempt to
maintain normal system voltage by
automatically increasing engine idle speed. You
may notice several consecutive increases in
idle speed, up to a maximum of 1,450 RPM, as
the system will attempt to utilize the smallest
increase in idle speed necessary to maintain
normal system voltage. The idle speed will
return to normal when either the electrical load
is removed, or when the brake pedal is applied.
NOTE:
For instrument cluster display messages
related to the vehicle's exhaust system
Ú page 111.
Idle-Up Feature
The driver-controlled high idle speed feature will
help increase cylinder temperatures and
provide additional cab heat, however, excessive
idling may still cause the exhaust
aftertreatment system to not properly
regenerate. Extended periods of idle time
should be avoided.
The Idle-Up feature uses the Cruise Control
buttons to increase engine idle speed and
quickly warm the vehicle's interior.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. With the transmission in PARK, the parking
brake applied, and the engine running,
push the On/Off button to the ON position,
then push the SET (-) button.
2. The engine RPM will go up to 1,100 RPM. To
increase the RPM, push and hold the RES
(+) button and the idle speed will increase
to approximately 1,500 RPM. To decrease
the RPM, push and hold the SET (-) button
and the idle speed will decrease to approxi-
mately 1,100 RPM.
3. To cancel the Idle–Up feature, either push
the CANCEL button, push the On/Off button,
or press the brake pedal.
NOISE
Diesel engines can create noises that may
seem concerning. The nature of a diesel engine
is compression ignition where compressed air
and fuel are mixed and ignited. Weather,
barometric pressure, altitude, and temperature
will affect how fuel is ignited in the engine.
Engines will sound different from day to day or
previous model years. Clicking, ticking, or light
knocking is normal and will change from day to
day, as the engine breaks in, and can vary with
changes in ambient temperature. Clicking
sound from under the hood shortly after vehicle
shutdown is normal as actuators such as the
EGR valve are cycled. Fuel pump noise may
increase during low speed/light load conditions
when ambient temperature is above 100°F
(38°C), and when fuel tank level is below 10%
which is a normal condition of the fuel system
and controls strategy. Diesel equipped vehicles
also have an exhaust after-treatment system to
reduce emissions utilizing a Diesel Particulate
Filter (DPF) and a Selective Reduction Catalyst
(SCR). The SCR reduces Nitrogen Oxides (NOx)
using the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) system.
DEF is injected directly into the SCR through a
dosing module. This process will create a
clicking sound and at times, will make noise
even with the vehicle shut off. This is normal as
the DEF dosing module is purging DEF. If at any
time the check engine light is on, please visit an
authorized dealer.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Idle the engine a few minutes before routine
shutdown. After full load operation, idle the
engine three to five minutes before shutting it
down. This idle period will allow the lubricating
oil and coolant to carry excess heat away from
the combustion chamber, bearings, internal
components, and turbocharger. This is
especially important for turbocharged, charge
air-cooled engines. Refer to the following chart
for proper engine shutdown:
Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature
Idle Time (min.) Before Engine
Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool Less than One
Stop and Go Medium - One
Highway Speeds Medium Warm Two
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
IDLE SHUTDOWN
This feature can be enabled so that the truck
will automatically shutdown when the truck has
been idling for a set period of time when the
engine is at operating temperature. Idle time
can be set in 5 minute increments between
5 and 60 minutes. See an authorized dealer to
enable this feature.
NOTE:
The idle shutdown timer is disabled while the
PTO is active.
PROGRAMMABLE MAXIMUM VEHICLE
S
PEED
This feature allows the owner to set a maximum
vehicle speed for the vehicle. The 2500 and
3500 Series maximum vehicle speed can be set
between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 87 mph
(140 km/h). The 4500/5500 Series maximum
vehicle speed can be set between 40 mph
(64 km/h) and 85 mph (136 km/h). See an
authorized dealer to enable this feature.
NOTE:
DO NOT set the maximum vehicle speed to a
value greater than what the vehicle tires are
rated for.
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
Avoid Overheating The Engine
The temperature of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) (a mixture of 50% ethylene-glycol
and 50% water) must not exceed the normal
range of the temperature gauge 240°F
(116°C) with a 21 psi (145 kPa) coolant
pressure cap.
Usually the engine coolant (antifreeze)
temperature indicated during operation will be
to the left of center in the normal range of the
gauge.
Avoid Low Coolant Temperature Operation
Continual operation at low engine coolant
(antifreeze) temperature below the normal
range on the gauge 140°F (60°C) can be
harmful to the engine. Low engine coolant
(antifreeze) temperature can cause incomplete
combustion which allows carbon and varnish to
form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also,
the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase,
diluting the lubricating oil and causing rapid
wear to the engine.
City Traffic Maximum GCWR - Three
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR - Four
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot Five
Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature
Idle Time (min.) Before Engine
Shutdown
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
COOLING SYSTEM TIPS
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating in high ambient temperature
conditions, take the following actions:
City Driving — When stopped, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine
idle speed.
Highway Driving — Reduce your speed.
Up Steep Hills — Select a lower transmission
gear.
Air Conditioning — Turn it off temporarily.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil
Pressure
When the engine is at normal operating
temperature, the minimum oil pressures
required are:
Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed
Parts
All engine failures give some warning before the
parts fail. Be on the alert for changes in
performance, sounds, and visual evidence that
the engine requires service. Some important
clues are:
Engine misfiring or vibrating severely.
Sudden loss of power.
Unusual engine noises.
Fuel, oil or coolant leaks.
Sudden change, outside the normal oper-
ating range, in the engine operating tempera-
ture.
Excessive smoke.
Oil pressure drop.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect
the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C),
engine block heater usage is recommended.
For ambient temperatures below –20°F
(-29°C), engine block heater usage is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed through
the grille by the right front tow hook.
It includes a removable cap that is secured by a
tethered strap. It also has a c-clip that is used
for storage when not in use for the Winter
months. During Winter months, remove the
heater cord wiring assembly from itself on the
c-clip.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine.
Idle 700 to 800 RPM 10 psi (69 kPa)
Full speed and load 30 psi (207 kPa)
CAUTION!
If oil pressure falls to less than normal read-
ings, shut the engine off immediately. Failure
to do so could result in immediate and severe
engine damage.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades
Ú page 481.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
Please check your oil level with the engine oil
indicator often during the break in period. Add
oil as required.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine does not
require a break-in period due to its construction.
Normal operation is allowed, providing the
following recommendations are followed:
Warm up the engine before placing it under
load.
Do not operate the engine at idle for
prolonged periods.
Use the appropriate transmission gear to
prevent engine lugging.
Observe vehicle oil pressure and tempera-
ture indicators.
Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
Vary throttle position at highway speeds
when carrying or towing significant weight.
NOTE:
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing
or no load operation will extend the time before
the engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel
economy and power may be seen at this time.
For additional vehicle break-in requirements
Ú page 241.
Because of the construction of the Cummins®
Turbo Diesel engine, engine run-in is enhanced
by loaded operating conditions which allow the
engine parts to achieve final finish and fit during
the first 6,000 miles (10,000 km).
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Min-
eral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK.
The foot-operated parking brake is located
below the lower left corner of the instrument
panel. To apply the parking brake, firmly push
the parking brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release
handle.
Parking Brake Release
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake
Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is
detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the parking brake before placing
the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave
the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so
may cause the vehicle to roll and cause
damage or injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE — ENGINE
BRAKING (IF EQUIPPED)
The purpose of the exhaust brake (engine
braking) feature is to supply negative (braking)
torque from the engine. Typically, the engine
braking is used for, but not limited to, vehicle
towing applications where vehicle braking can
be achieved by the internal engine power,
thereby sparing the mechanical brakes of the
vehicle.
Benefits of the exhaust brake are:
Vehicle driving control.
Reduced brake fade.
Longer brake life.
Faster cab warm-up.
The exhaust brake feature will only function
when the driver toggles it on by pushing the
exhaust brake button until the “Exhaust Brake
Indicator” is illuminated. Normal (Full Strength)
exhaust brake mode is indicated by a yellow
“Exhaust Brake Indicator”.
Exhaust Brake Switch
Once the “Exhaust Brake Indicator” is
illuminated and the vehicle is moving faster
than 5 mph (8 km/h); the exhaust brake will
automatically operate when the driver removes
pressure from the accelerator pedal. Exhaust
braking is most effective when the engine RPM
is higher. The automatic transmission will
downshift more aggressively in TOW/HAUL
mode when the exhaust brake is enabled to
increase brake performance.
NOTE:
For optimum braking power it is recommended
to use the exhaust brake while in TOW/HAUL
mode.
The exhaust brake feature can also be used to
reduce the engine warm-up time. To use the
exhaust brake as a warm-up device, the vehicle
must be stopped or moving less than 5 mph
(8 km/h), the "Exhaust Brake Indicator" must be
on, and the coolant temperature must be below
180°F (82°C) and ambient temperature below
60°F (16°C).
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately.
WARNING!
Do not use the exhaust brake feature when
driving in icy or slippery conditions as the
increased engine braking can cause the rear
wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing
around with the possible loss of vehicle con-
trol, which may cause an accident possibly
resulting in personal injury or death.
CAUTION!
Use of aftermarket exhaust brakes is not rec-
ommended and could lead to engine damage
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake technology
delivers smoother, less aggressive exhaust
braking characteristics during downhill
descents. Although it can apply full exhaust
braking force if needed, Automatic “Smart”
Exhaust Brake may not apply obvious braking if
the vehicle speed is not increasing. Automatic
“Smart” Exhaust Brake is intended to maintain
vehicle speed, while Full Exhaust Brake is
intended to reduce vehicle speed.
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake can be
enabled by pushing the exhaust brake button
(on the center stack) again anytime after the
normal Full Exhaust Brake has been turned on.
The “Exhaust Brake Indicator” in the instrument
cluster display will change from Yellow to Green
when Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake is
enabled. Pushing the exhaust brake button
again will toggle the exhaust brake mode to off.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
(Continued)
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also
locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
mode) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the
instrument panel. The transmission gear range
(PRND) is displayed both above the gear
selector and in the instrument cluster. To select
a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector.
You must press the brake pedal to shift the
transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when
the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds).
To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such
as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear
selector to the appropriate detent. Select the
DRIVE range for normal driving.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within
a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions.
Manual downshifts can be made using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control.
Pressing the GEAR -/GEAR + switches (on the
steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will
select the highest available transmission gear,
and will display that gear limit in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc Ú page 161. Some
models will display both the selected gear limit,
and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
Electronic Transmission Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P), and is not blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running.
Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL mode or use
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
to select a lower gear range Ú page 161. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will
improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
build-up.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F
[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in certain gears,
or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may
be severely degraded and the engine may stall.
In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what
actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 250.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 390.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage
after engine shutdown, perform this procedure
only in a desired location (preferably, at an
authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission. If the
transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
allows the driver to limit the highest available
gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For
example, if you set the transmission gear limit
to FOURTH gear, the transmission will not shift
above FOURTH gear (except to prevent engine
overspeed), but will shift through the lower
gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode
at any vehicle speed. When the transmission
gear selector is in DRIVE, the transmission will
operate automatically, shifting between all
available gears. Tapping the GEAR – switch (on
the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode,
display the current gear in the instrument
cluster, and set that gear as the top available
gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the GEAR – or
GEAR + switch will change the top available
gear.
ERS Control
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the
GEAR + switch until the gear limit display
disappears from the instrument cluster.
1 — GEAR + Switch
2 — GEAR – Switch
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer,
carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent
transmission shifting occurs, push the TOW/
HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL mode. This
will improve performance and reduce the
potential for transmission overheating or failure
due to excessive shifting.
TOW/HAUL Switch
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate
in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/
HAUL mode has been activated. Pushing the
switch a second time restores normal
operation. Normal operation is always the
default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is
desired, the switch must be pushed each time
the engine is started.
SIX-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
— I
F EQUIPPED
Pickup models may use either AS69RC
transmission, or the 68RFE transmission (which
has no PTO access cover).
The transmission gear position display (located
in the instrument cluster) indicates the
transmission gear range. The gear selector is
mounted on the right side of the steering
column. You must press the brake pedal to
move the gear selector out of PARK
Ú page 157. To drive, move the gear selector
from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
Pull the gear selector toward you when shifting
into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of
PARK.
The electronically-controlled transmission
provides a precise shift schedule. The
transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop
within a few hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions.
Manual downshifts can be made using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control.
Pushing the ERS (-/+) switches (on the steering
wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the
highest available transmission gear, and will
display that gear limit in the instrument cluster
as 1, 2, 3, etc Ú page 161. Some models will
display both the selected gear limit, and the
actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when
driving in icy or slippery conditions. The
increased engine braking can cause the rear
wheels to slide, and the vehicle to swing
around with the possible loss of vehicle
control, which may cause an accident
possibly resulting in personal injury or death.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
(Continued)
(Continued)
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the
gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, turn the engine
OFF, and remove the key fob. When the
ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when
the ignition is in the OFF mode), the trans-
mission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, pull the gear
selector toward you and move it all the way
counterclockwise until it stops.
Release the gear selector and make sure it is
fully seated in the PARK gate.
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P).
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition (in a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go)
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must turn the igni-
tion to the ON/RUN mode, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the
gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 250.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 390.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL mode or use
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
to select a lower gear range Ú page 161. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will
improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat
build-up.
If the transmission temperature exceeds
normal operating limits, the powertrain
controller will modify the transmission shift
schedule and expand the range of torque
converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to
overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is
in danger of overheating, the “Transmission
Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
the transmission may operate differently until
the transmission cools down.
NOTE:
Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer
up a steep grade, or in stop-and-go traffic)
during hot weather. In these conditions, torque
converter slip can impose a significant addi-
tional heat load on the cooling system. Down-
shifting the transmission to the lowest possible
gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to
NEUTRAL (when stopped in heavy traffic) can
help to reduce this excess heat generation.
During cold temperatures, transmission
operation may be modified depending on
engine and transmission temperature as well
as vehicle speed. This feature improves
warm-up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm Ú page 168. On
Pickup models with 68RFE transmission, top
overdrive gear is also inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm, and during
extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or
below), operation may briefly be limited to first
and direct gears only. On trucks with AS69RC
transmission, FIFTH and SIXTH gears may be
inhibited briefly on cold starts below 41°F
(5°C), and during very cold temperatures
(-4°F [-20°C] or below), operation may briefly
be limited to third gear only. During this
condition, the ability of the vehicle to accelerate
under heavily loaded conditions may be
reduced. In all cases, normal operation will
resume once the transmission temperature has
risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission remains in FOURTH gear (for
68RFE transmission) or THIRD gear (for
AS69RC transmission) regardless of which
forward gear is selected. If an
AS69RC-equipped truck enters Limp Home
Mode at highway speeds, it will initially engage
FIFTH gear, until the vehicle slows to a speed
where third gear can be engaged. PARK,
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to
operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows
the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer
for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission. If the
transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
allows the driver to limit the highest available
gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For
example, if you set the transmission gear limit
to FOURTH gear, the transmission will not shift
above FOURTH gear, but will shift through the
lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode
at any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is
in the DRIVE position, the transmission will
operate automatically, shifting between all
available gears. Tapping the ERS (-) switch will
activate ERS mode, display the current gear in
the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the
top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping
the ERS (-) or (+) switch will change the top
available gear.
Electronic Range Select
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the
ERS (+) switch until the gear limit display
disappears from the instrument cluster.
1 — GEAR + Switch
2 — GEAR – Switch
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
NOTE:
To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply push and
hold the ERS (-) switch. The transmission will
shift to the range from which the vehicle can
best be slowed down.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an
electronically controlled Overdrive (FIFTH and
SIXTH gears). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following
conditions are present:
The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
The transmission fluid has reached an
adequate temperature.
The engine coolant has reached an adequate
temperature.
The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
The driver is not heavily pressing the acceler-
ator.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer,
carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent
transmission shifting occurs, push the TOW/
HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL mode. This
will improve performance and reduce the
potential for transmission overheating or failure
due to excessive shifting. When operating in
TOW/HAUL mode, transmission upshifts are
delayed, and the transmission will
automatically downshift (for engine braking)
when the throttle is closed and/or during steady
braking maneuvers.
TOW/HAUL Switch
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate
in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/
HAUL mode has been activated. Pushing the
switch a second time restores normal
operation. Normal operation is always the
default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is
desired, the switch must be pushed each time
the engine is started.
Transmission
Gear Limit
Display
1 2 3 4 5 6 D
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6
CAUTION!
When using ERS for engine braking while
descending steep grades, be careful not to
overspeed the engine. Apply the brakes as
needed to prevent engine overspeed.
WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when
driving in icy or slippery conditions. The
increased engine braking can cause the rear
wheels to slide, and the vehicle to swing
around with the possible loss of vehicle
control, which may cause an accident
possibly resulting in personal injury or death.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy
has been included in the automatic
transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the
torque converter engages automatically at
calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal
operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle
speed drops or during some accelerations, the
clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage,
until the transmission fluid and engine
coolant are warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles
[2 to 5 km] of driving). Because engine speed
is higher when the torque converter clutch is
not engaged, it may seem as if the transmis-
sion is not shifting properly when cold. This is
normal. Using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control, when the transmission is
sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
transmission is able to shift into and out of
Overdrive.
If the vehicle has not been driven for several
days, the first few seconds of operation after
shifting the transmission into gear may seem
sluggish. This is due to the fluid partially
draining from the torque converter into the
transmission. This condition is normal and
will not cause damage to the transmission.
The torque converter will refill within five
seconds after starting the engine.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
There can be up to six auxiliary switches located
in the lower switch bank of the instrument panel
which can be used to power various electronic
devices and Power Take Off (PTO). If equipped,
it will take the place of the sixth auxiliary switch.
Connections to the switches are found under
the hood in the connectors attached to the
auxiliary Power Distribution Center.
You have the ability to configure the
functionality of the auxiliary switches via the
instrument cluster display. All switches can now
be configured for setting the switch type
operation to latching or momentary, power
source of either battery or ignition, and ability to
hold last state across key cycles.
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when
switch type is set to latching and power source
is set to ignition.
For further information on using the auxiliary
switches, please refer to the Ram Body Builders
Guide by accessing www.rambodybuilder.com
and choosing the appropriate links.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise
Cancellation system that cannot be turned off.
This system is designed to address exhaust and
engine noise. The system relies on four
microphones embedded in the headliner, which
monitor exhaust and engine noise, and assists
an onboard frequency generator, which creates
counteracting sound waves in the audio
system’s speakers. This helps keep the vehicle
quiet at idle and during drive. The system is
deactivated when the windows are rolled down.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with
either a manually shifted transfer case or an
electronically shifted transfer case.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER
C
ASE (EIGHT SPEED TRANSMISSION ) —
I
F EQUIPPED
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer
Case Switch), which is located on the
instrument panel.
Four-Position Transfer Case
This electronically shifted transfer case
provides four mode positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
N (Neutral)
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each transfer case mode position, see
the information below:
2WD
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
4WD HIGH
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range
provides torque to the front driveshaft (engages
four-wheel drive) which allows front and rear
wheels to spin at the same speed. This provides
additional traction for loose, slippery road
surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range
provides low speed four-wheel drive. It
maximizes torque (increased torque over 4WD
High) to the front driveshaft, allowing front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This
range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h)
in this range.
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain.
To be used for flat towing behind another
vehicle Ú page 250.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position
without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) posi-
tion disengages both the front and rear
drive shaft from the powertrain, and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the trans-
mission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
This electronically shifted transfer case is
designed to be driven in the two-wheel drive
position (2WD) for normal street and highway
conditions on dry, hard surfaced roads. Driving
the vehicle in two-wheel drive will have greater
fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not
engaged in two-wheel drive.
When additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4WD High and 4WD Low positions
can be used to maximize torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
by pushing the desired position on the
four-wheel drive control switch.
For specific shifting instructions Ú page 171.
The 4WD High and 4WD Low positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Driving in the 4WD High and 4WD Low positions
on dry hard surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
NOTE:
The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in
the center of the four-wheel drive Control Switch
and is pushed by using a ballpoint pen or similar
object. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to
be used for recreational towing only
Ú page 250.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
(4WD High and 4WD Low) are located in the
instrument cluster and indicate the current and
desired transfer case selection. When you
select a different transfer case position, the
indicator lights will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn
off.
2. The selected position indicator light will
flash until the transfer case completes the
shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator
light for the selected position will stop
flashing and remain on.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions
Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position
will remain on.
2. The newly selected position indicator light
will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new
transfer case position have been met. To retry
the selection, push the current position, wait
five seconds, and retry selection. To find the
shift requirements Ú page 171.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the
electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this
light remains on after engine start up or
illuminates during driving, it means that the
four-wheel drive system is not functioning
properly and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when
powering down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD
Warning Light” is illuminated. Not engaging
the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll
which may cause personal injury or death.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could
cause damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD Low, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the two-wheel drive or 4WD High positions at a
given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the
transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
cator light for the previous position will
remain on and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all
the requirements for the selected position
have been met.
If all the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have been met, the
current position indicator light will turn off,
the selected position indicator light will flash
until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indi-
cator light for the selected position will stop
flashing and remain on.
2WD To 4WD HIGH
Push the desired position on the four-wheel
drive control switch to shift the transfer case.
Shifts between two-wheel drive and 4WD High
can be done with the vehicle stopped or in
motion. With the vehicle in motion, the transfer
case will engage/disengage faster if you
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after
turning the control switch. If the vehicle is
stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON
position with the engine either running or off.
This shift cannot be completed if the ignition
switch is in the ACC position.
NOTE:
The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD/4WD High if the front and/or
rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this
situation, the selected position indicator light
will flash and the original position indicator light
will remain on. At this time, reduce speed and
stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
2WD Or 4WD HIGH To 4WD LOW
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of 4WD Low some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is
not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle
rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely
stopped. You can use either of the following
procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle
to 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the desired position
on the transfer case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is
on (not flashing), shift the transmission
back into gear.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position
and the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Push the desired position on the transfer
case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is
on (not flashing), shift the transmission
back into gear.
NOTE:
If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alter-
nate Procedure are not satisfied prior to
attempting the shift, then the desired posi-
tion indicator light will flash continuously
while the original position indicator light is
on, until all requirements have been met.
The ignition switch must be in the ON position
for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
switch is not in the ON position, the shift will
not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER
C
ASE (SIX SPEED TRANSMISSION ) — IF
E
QUIPPED
The electronic shift transfer case is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch),
which is located on the instrument panel.
Four-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
This electronically shifted transfer case
provides four mode positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
N (NEUTRAL)
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each transfer case mode position, see
the information below:
2WD
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
4WD HIGH
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range provides additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range
provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This
range provides additional traction and maximum
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
N (Neutral)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be
used for flat towing behind another vehicle
Ú page 250.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
This electronically shifted transfer case is
designed to be driven in the two-wheel drive
position (two-wheel drive) for normal street and
highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the
transfer case 4WD High and 4WD Low positions
can be used to maximize torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
by rotating the four-wheel drive Control Switch
to the desired position.
For specific shifting instructions Ú page 174.
The 4WD High and 4WD Low positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Driving in the 4WD High and 4WD Low positions
on dry hard surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
NOTE:
The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on
the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control
Switch. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is
to be used for recreational towing only
Ú page 250.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
(4WD and 4LOW) are located in the instrument
cluster and indicate the current and desired
transfer case selection. When you select a
different transfer case position, the indicator
lights will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn
OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will
flash until the transfer case completes the
shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator
light for the selected position will stop
flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions
Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position
will remain ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light
will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new
transfer case position have been met. To retry
the selection, turn the control switch back to the
current position, wait five seconds, and retry
selection. To find the shift requirements
Ú page 174.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the
electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this
light remains on after engine start up or
illuminates during driving, it means that the
four-wheel drive system is not functioning
properly and that service is required.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL position disengages both the
front and rear drive shafts from the power-
train and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can
cause damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD Low, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the two-wheel drive or 4WD High positions at a
given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the
transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
cator light for the previous position will
remain ON and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all
the requirements for the selected position
have been met. To retry a shift: return the
control switch back to the original position,
make certain all shift requirements have
been met, wait five seconds and try the shift
again.
If all the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have been met, the
current position indicator light will turn OFF,
the selected position indicator light will flash
until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indi-
cator light for the selected position will stop
flashing and remain ON.
2WD To 4WD HIGH
Push the desired position on the four-wheel
drive control switch to shift the transfer case.
Shifts between two-wheel drive and 4WD High
can be done with the vehicle stopped or in
motion. With the vehicle in motion, the transfer
case will engage/disengage faster if you
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after
turning the control switch. If the vehicle is
stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON
position with the engine either running or off.
This shift cannot be completed if the ignition
switch is in the ACC position.
NOTE:
The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD/4WD High if the front and/or
rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this
situation, the selected position indicator light
will flash and the original position indicator light
will remain on. At this time, reduce speed and
stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
2WD Or 4WD HIGH To 4WD LOW
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of 4WD Low some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is
not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle
rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely
stopped. You can use either of the following
procedures:
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when
powering down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD
Warning Light” is illuminated. Not engaging
the parking brake may allow the vehicle to
roll, which may cause personal injury.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle
to 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the desired position
on the transfer case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is
on (not flashing), shift the transmission
back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position
and the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Push the desired position on the transfer
case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is
on (not flashing), shift the transmission
back into gear.
NOTE:
If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alter-
nate Procedure are not satisfied prior to
attempting the shift, then the desired posi-
tion indicator light will flash continuously
while the original position indicator light is
on, until all requirements have been met.
The ignition switch must be in the ON position
for a shift to take place and for the position
indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
switch is not in the ON position, the shift will
not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
MANUALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER CASE —
I
F EQUIPPED
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H)
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4H)
N (Neutral)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L)
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each transfer case mode position, see
the information below:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range
locks the front and rear driveshafts together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. Additional traction for loose,
slippery road surfaces only.
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain.
To be used for flat towing behind another
vehicle Ú page 250.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks
the front and rear driveshafts together forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling
power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the
2H position for normal street and highway
conditions such as dry, hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the 4H and
4L positions can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together and force the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
This is accomplished by simply moving the gear
selector to the desired positions once the
appropriate speed and gear requirements are
met. Refer to “Shifting Procedure – Manually
Shifted Transfer Case” in this section for further
information.
The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H
and 4L positions on dry, hard surfaced roads
may cause increased tire wear and damage to
the driveline components.
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in
the instrument cluster will alert the driver that
the vehicle is in four-wheel drive and that the
front and rear driveshafts are locked together.
This light will illuminate when the transfer case
is shifted into either the 4H or 4L position. There
is no light for the 2H or NEUTRAL positions on
some models.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the
2H or 4H positions at a given road speed. Take
care not to overspeed the engine and do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
will adversely affect shifting and can cause
damage to the drivetrain.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can
cause damage to driveline components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
NOTE:
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or
uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle
loading, or cold temperatures.
Shifting Procedure — Manually Shifted
Transfer Case
2H To 4H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with
the vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle
is in motion, shifts can be made up to 55 mph
(88 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the
transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal
after completing the shift. Apply a constant
force when shifting the transfer case lever.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL position disengages both the
front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
2H Or 4H To 4L
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of 4L some gear noise
may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h), shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever firmly to
the desired position. Do not pause in transfer
case Neutral.
NOTE:
Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission
may require shutting the engine off to avoid
gear clash while completing the shift. If diffi-
culty occurs, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL, hold your foot on the brake, and
turn the engine off. Complete the range shift
to the desired mode.
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped, however diffi-
culty may occur due to the mating clutch
teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for clutch teeth
alignment and shift completion to occur. The
preferred method is with the vehicle rolling
2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to
engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle
moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
Do not attempt to shift into or out of 4L while
the transmission is in gear.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Light
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in
the instrument cluster is used to alert the driver
that the front axle is fully engaged and all four
wheels are driving.
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
This air suspension system is a rear leveling ride
height system. The main purpose of this system
is to maintain the truck’s rear ride height level.
There are two selectable heights that can be
chosen based on your operating conditions.
The system requires that the ignition be in the
ON/RUN position or the engine running with
zero vehicle speed for all user requested
changes and load leveling.
Rear Leveling Ride Height Switch
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for
normal driving. It will automatically adjust to
maintain the rear ride height as conditions
change.
Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) – Lowers the
vehicle approximately 1 inch (25 mm) for a level
truck, to be used as required while trailer
towing. It will automatically adjust to maintain
the rear ride height as conditions change.
Trailer Decoupling/Unloading - The air
suspension system will continue to load level
after the vehicle has been turned off for
10 minutes without compressor activation. This
allows for easy removal of a trailer and/or load
from the back of the truck by maintaining the
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
ride height. After 10 minutes you will need to
turn the ignition to the run position for the air
suspension to re-level due to addition/removal
of load in the vehicle. If the air suspension
system is disabled using the settings menu (Tire
Jack Mode, Transport Mode, Alignment Mode,
or Bed Lowering Mode) the system will remain
disabled when the vehicle is turned off.
Reactivating the air suspension can be
accomplished via the settings menu or driving
the vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h) for Tire Jack
Mode, Alignment Mode, Transport Mode and
Bed Lowering Mode.
NOTE:
Most 3500 models will not lower to Alternate
Trailer Height (ATH) when unloaded.
For further information Ú page 236.
AIR SUSPENSION MODES
The air suspension system has multiple modes
to protect the system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a tire, the air
suspension system has a feature which allows
the automatic leveling to be disabled
Ú page 111 or Ú page 258.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
Transport Mode
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the
road, the air suspension system has a feature
which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit height
and disable the automatic load leveling system
Ú page 111 or Ú page 258.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment, this
mode must be enabled Ú page 111 or
Ú page 258.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
Bed Lowering Mode
This setting is used to lower the rear suspension
to the lowest possible height and disable the air
suspension system. It enables easier loading/
unloading of the truck and makes it easier to
hook up trailers Ú page 111 or Ú page 258.
Protection Strategy
In order to “protect” the air suspension system,
the vehicle will disable load leveling as required
(suspension overloaded, battery charge low,
etc.). Load leveling will automatically resume as
soon as system operation requirements are
met. See an authorized dealer if system does
not resume.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display Ú page 111.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a
system error has been detected.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high
pressure volume of air to operate the system.
To avoid personal injury or damage to the
system, see an authorized dealer for service.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
(Continued)
See an authorized dealer for system service if
normal operation does not resume.
OPERATION
Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH)
button once while at Normal Ride Height (NRH),
will lower the vehicle to Alternate Trailer Height
(ATH) and will illuminate the LED.
NOTE:
The LED will continuously blink until vehicle
Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) has been
achieved and the LED will turn on.
Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) again
will raise the vehicle to Normal Ride Height
(NRH).
NOTE:
The LED will continuously blink until Normal
Ride Height (NRH) has been achieved and the
LED will turn off.
Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be
illuminated. Transport Mode is disabled by
driving the vehicle, or deselecting the mode
via the interface.
Tire/Jack Mode – No indicator lamps will be
illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by
driving the vehicle, or by deselecting the
mode via the interface.
Wheel Alignment Mode – No indicator lamps
will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is
disabled by driving the vehicle, or by dese-
lecting the mode via the interface.
Bed Lowering Mode – Telltale on the cluster
will be illuminated. Bed Lowering Mode is
disabled by driving the vehicle, or deselecting
the mode via the interface.
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON
MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)
This vehicle is equipped with electronically
locking front and rear differentials. These
differentials, when engaged, mechanically lock
together the axle shafts forcing the wheels to
spin at an equal rate. This allows the vehicle to
maintain its momentum and prevents it from
becoming stuck. The locking front and rear
differentials should only be engaged during
low-speed, extreme off-road situations where
one wheel is likely to not be in contact with the
ground. It is not recommended to drive the
vehicle with the differentials locked on
pavement due to the reduced ability to turn and
speed limitations.
Axle Lock Selector
1 — FRONT/REAR LOCK – the front and rear axles
are locked
2 — REAR LOCK – the rear axle is locked
3 — AXLE UNLOCK – the front and rear axles are
unlocked
CAUTION!
Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard
surfaced roads. The ability to steer the
vehicle is reduced and damage to the drive-
train may occur when the axles are locked
on hard surfaced roads.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
The locking axles are controlled by the axle lock
buttons.
Under normal driving conditions, the vehicle
should be left in the AXLE UNLOCK position.
NOTE:
Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK
position, the limited slip differential in the rear
axle still provides torque biasing capability for
moderate low traction environments.
During the command to lock the axle, the
indicator light will flash until the axle is locked.
After the lock command has been successfully
executed, the light will remain on solid.
To lock the rear axle, place the vehicle in 4WD
Low, 4WD High or two-wheel drive Ú page 168.
Push the REAR LOCK button while traveling less
than 10 mph (16 km/h). The REAR LOCK
indicator light will remain on when the rear axle
is locked.
NOTE:
Left to right wheel speed difference may be
necessary to allow the axle to fully lock. If the
indicator light is flashing after placing the
vehicle in the REAR LOCK or FRONT/REAR LOCK
position, drive the vehicle in a turn or on loose
gravel to expedite the locking action.
To lock the front axle, push the FRONT/REAR
LOCK button while traveling less than 10 mph
(16 km/h) in 4WD Low. The FRONT/REAR LOCK
indicator light will be solid when the front axle is
locked.
NOTE:
The rear axle must be locked before the front
axle will lock.
When both the axles are locked, to unlock the
front axle, push the REAR LOCK button while in
4WD Low. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator
light will go out when the axle is unlocked.
NOTE:
The axle lockers could be torque locked due to
side to side loads on the axle. Driving slowly
while turning the steering wheel from a left
hand turn to a right hand turn or driving in
REVERSE for a short distance may be required
to release the torque lock and unlock the axles.
To unlock the rear axle, push the AXLE UNLOCK
button. The REAR LOCK indicator light will go
out when the rear axle is unlocked.
STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER
WAGON ONLY
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system
allows greater front suspension travel in
off-road situations.
Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle
is stuck and the tires are spinning. You can
damage drivetrain components. Lock the
rear axle before attempting situations or
navigating terrain, which could possibly
cause the vehicle to become stuck.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use the locked axle position for normal
driving. A locked front axle is intended for
off-road driving only. Locking the front axle
during on-road driving will reduce the steering
ability. This could cause a collision and you
may be seriously injured.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
Due to the use of taller springs, this vehicle has
an increased ride height of approximately
1.9 inches (48.3 mm) in the front and
1.5 inches (38.1 mm) in the rear. A major
advantage to increasing ride height is the
positive effect it has on approach/departure
and break over angles.
This system is controlled by the electronic
control sway bar switch located below the
instrument panel.
Sway Bar Disconnect Button
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the
system. Push the switch again to deactivate the
system. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light” (located
in the instrument cluster) will illuminate when
the bar is disconnected. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” will flash during activation
transition, or when activation conditions are not
met. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in
on-road mode during normal driving conditions.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to
either 4WD High or 4WD Low and push the
SWAY BAR button to obtain the Off-Road
position Ú page 168. The “Sway Bar Indicator
Light” will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has
been fully disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked
due to left and right suspension height differ-
ences. This condition is due to driving surface
differences or vehicle loading. In order for the
stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect,
the right and left halves of the bar must be
aligned. This alignment may require that the
vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked
from side to side.
To return to the On-Road mode, push the SWAY
BAR button again.
WARNING!
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive
on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above
18 mph (29 km/h), you may lose control of
the vehicle, which could result in serious
injury or death. The front stabilizer bar
enhances vehicle stability and assists in
maintaining control of the vehicle. The system
monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to
reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over
18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a
flashing off road light and solid on road light.
Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph
(22 km/h), the system will attempt to return
to the Off-Road mode.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to
On-Road mode, vehicle stability is reduced.
Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over
18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster than
18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss of control
of the vehicle, which could result in serious
injury or death. Contact your local service
center for assistance.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER
WAGON ONLY
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS AND VEHICLE
C
HARACTERISTICS
Your vehicle has excellent on and off-road
capabilities. These off-road capabilities will
allow you to explore those wilderness trails
where few travel, providing a source of exciting
and satisfying recreation. Before you venture
out, you should contact your local governmental
agency to determine the designated Off-Road
Vehicle (ORV) trails or recreation areas. You
should always tread lightly and only use
established roads, trails or ORV recreational
areas.
The National Forest Service, Bureau of Land
Management, or local Department of Natural
Resources are a wealth of information and
usually have maps with marked trails.
Skid Plates And Underbody Protection
Steel skid plates protect the major driveline
components of the truck including the fuel tank,
transfer case and steering damper. In addition,
this vehicle is equipped with boxed cross
members and fore/aft rails. This additional
protection allows the vehicle to be utilized in
severe off-road situations that would be
considered impassable by a normal truck.
Ramp Travel Index (RTI)
The RTI is the distance, in inches, that you can
drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree
ramp without lifting any other wheel off the
ground. This distance up the ramp divided by
the wheelbase of the vehicle and multiplied by
1,000 is the RTI. This vehicle has an RTI of
429 (connected sway bar) or an RTI of
538 (disconnected sway bar), which means
you can articulate one front wheel 22 inches
(56 cm) or 27.5 inches (70cm) in the air while
the other three wheels remain in contact with
the ground.
Water Fording Characteristics
Water fording characteristic is the vehicle's
ability to cross a body of still water, where the
powertrain and drivetrain are safe from water
ingestion. This vehicle has high water fording
characteristics with the ability to cross a pool of
water, without stopping, 24 inches (60 cm) deep
at a maximum speed of 10 mph (16 km/h) and
a pool of water 30 inches (76 cm) deep at a
maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h), both with
an entrance ramp angle of 1.3 degrees.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle
Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the
simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two
footed driving). When climbing rocks, logs, or
other stepped objects, using light brake
pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle
from jerking or lurching. This technique is also
used when you need to stop and restart a
vehicle on a steep incline.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving
off-road. You should be familiar with the terrain
and area before proceeding. There are many
types of surface conditions: hard packed dirt,
gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice.
Every surface has a different effect on your
vehicle's steering, handling and traction.
Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to
successful off-road driving, so always keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a
CAUTION!
The door sill height is 25 inches (63.5 cm).
Water may intrude into the interior of the
vehicle at greater depths.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
good driving posture. Avoid sudden
accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases
there are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. Therefore you will need to use your
own good judgment on what is safe and what
isn't. When on a trail you should always be
looking ahead for surface obstacles and
changes in terrain. The key is to plan your future
driving route while remembering what you are
currently driving over.
When To Use Low Range
When driving off-road, shift into 4WD Low for
additional traction or to improve handling and
control on slippery or difficult terrain. Due to the
lower gearing, low range will allow the engine to
operate in a higher power range. This will allow
you to idle over obstacles and down hills, with
improved control and less effort. Also, use 4WD
Low in rain, ice, snow, mud, and sand to get
heavy loads rolling, improve traction, or
whenever 4WD High traction will not do the job.
DRIVING IN SNOW, MUD AND SAND
There is a drastic reduction in traction when
driving in snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be
less responsive to steering, acceleration and
braking inputs. Therefore you should accelerate
slowly, leave greater stopping distances and
avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to
keep a slow constant steady pace. The key is to
maintain the vehicle's momentum.
Snow – In heavy snow or for additional
control and traction at slower speeds, shift
the transmission to a low gear and shift the
transfer case to 4WD Low if necessary. Do
not shift to a lower gear than necessary to
maintain headway. Over-revving the engine
can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your
steering wheel no more than a quarter turn
quickly back and forth, while still applying
throttle. This will allow the tires to get a fresh
"bite" and help maintain your momentum.
Mud – Deep mud creates a great deal of
suction around the tires and is very difficult to
get through. You should use 4WD Low with a
gear low enough to maintain your momentum
without shifting. If you start to slow to a stop,
try turning your steering wheel no more than
a quarter turn quickly back and forth for addi-
tional traction. Mud holes pose an increased
threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck.
They are normally full of debris from previous
vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice
before entering any mud hole, get out and
determine how deep it is, if there are any
hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be
safely recovered if stuck.
Sand – Soft sand is very difficult to travel
through with full tire pressure. When crossing
soft sandy spots in a trail, maintain your
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become
projectiles in an off-road situation.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or
other combustible materials. The heat from
your vehicle exhaust system could cause a
fire.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at
high engine RPMs or vehicle speeds because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss
of control.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle's momentum and do not stop. The
key to driving in soft sand is using the appro-
priate tire pressure, accelerating slowly,
avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining
the vehicle's momentum. If you are going to
be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes,
reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of
15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire
surface area. Reduced tire pressure will dras-
tically improve your traction and handling,
while driving on the soft sand, but you must
return the tires to normal air pressure before
driving on pavement or other hard surfaces.
Be sure you have a way to air the tires back
up prior to reducing the pressure.
CROSSING OBSTACLES (ROCKS AND
O
THER HIGH POINTS)
While driving off road, you will encounter many
types of terrain. These varying types of terrain
bring different types of obstacles. Before
proceeding review the path ahead to determine
the correct approach and your ability to safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring
the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the
vehicle forward until it makes contact with the
object. Apply the throttle lightly while holding a
light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up
and over the object.
Using A Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the
obstacle or determine the correct path.
Determining the correct path can be extremely
difficult when you are confronting many
obstacles. In these cases have someone guide
you over, through, or around the obstacle. Have
the person stand a safe distance in front of you
where they can see the obstacle, watch your
tires and undercarriage, and guide you through.
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path
which ensures you drive over the largest with
your tires. This will lift your undercarriage over
the obstacle. The tread of the tire is tougher and
thicker than the side wall and is designed to
take the abuse. Always look ahead and make
every effort to cross the large rocks with your
tires.
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout
Or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or
a large rut, the angled approach is the key to
maintaining your vehicle's mobility. Approach
these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let
each tire go through the obstacle independently.
You need to use caution when crossing large
obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire
unseating and total loss of air pressure. To
reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at a
reduced tire pressure, reduce your speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering
system loading which could cause you to
loose control of your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is
large enough to strike your axles or under-
carriage.
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is
large enough to contact the door sills.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an
angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a
rollover. If you get caught in a rut, dig a small
trench to the right or left at a 45-degree angle
ahead of the front tires. Use the removed dirt to
fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created.
You should now be able to drive out following the
trench you just created at a 45-degree angle.
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle
(approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows
one front tire to be on top of the log while the
other just starts to climb the log. While climbing
the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to
avoid spinning the log out from under your tires.
Then ease the vehicle off the log using your
brakes.
Getting High Centered
If you get hung up or high centered on an object,
get out of the vehicle and try to determine what
the vehicle is hung up on, where it is contacting
the underbody and what is the best direction to
recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are
in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a
few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of
the high point when you let the vehicle down.
You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching
the vehicle off the object.
HILL CLIMBING
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a
good understanding of your abilities and your
vehicle's limitations. Hills can cause serious
problems. Some are just too steep to climb and
should not be attempted. You should always
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities.
You should always climb hills straight up and
down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you
approach a hill consider its grade or steep-
ness. Determine if it is too steep. Look to see
what the traction is on the hill side trail. Is the
trail straight up and down? What is on top
and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,
branches or other obstacles on the path?
Can you safely recover the vehicle if some-
thing goes wrong? If everything looks good
and you feel confident, then change trans-
mission into a lower gear, shift the transfer
case into 4WD Low and proceed with caution.
You should use first gear and 4WD Low for
very steep hills.
Driving Uphill – Once you have determined
your ability to proceed and have shifted into
the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up for
the straightest possible run. Accelerate with
an easy constant throttle and apply more
power as you start up the hill. Do not race
forward into a steep grade, the abrupt
change of grade could cause you to lose
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when
crossing an obstacle, at any angle, with steep
sides.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater
diameter than the running ground clearance
or the vehicle will become high centered.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard
objects increases the risk of underbody
damage.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
control. If the front end begins to bounce,
ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four
tires back on the ground. As you approach
the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and
slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels
start to slip as you approach the crest of a
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain
headway by turning the steering wheel no
more than a quarter turn quickly back and
forth. This will provide a fresh "bite" into the
surface and will usually provide enough trac-
tion to complete the climb. If you do not make
it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE
and back straight down the grade using
engine resistance along with the vehicle
brakes.
Driving Downhill – Before driving down a
steep hill you need to determine if it is too
steep for a safe descent. What is the surface
traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a
slow controlled descent? Are there obsta-
cles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty
of distance at the base of the hill to regain
control if the vehicle descends too fast? If
you feel confident in your ability to proceed
then make sure you are in 4WD Low with the
transmission in FIRST gear (manually select
FIRST gear on automatic transmissions) and
proceed with caution. Allow engine braking to
control the descent and apply your brakes if
necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
Driving Across An Incline – If at all possible
avoid driving across an incline. If it is neces-
sary, know your vehicle's abilities. Driving
across an incline places more weight on the
downhill wheels, which increases the possi-
bilities of a downhill slide or rollover. Make
sure the surface has good traction with firm
and stable soils. If possible transverse the
incline at an angle heading slightly up or
down.
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you
stall or begin to lose headway while climbing
a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a
stop and immediately apply the brake.
Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE.
Back slowly down the hill allowing the
compression braking of the engine and trans-
mission to help regulate your speed. If the
brakes are required to control vehicle speed,
apply them lightly and avoid locking or skid-
ding the tires.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or
turn around on a steep grade. Driving across
an incline increases the risk of a roll over,
which may result in severe injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL.
Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine
braking. Descending a grade too fast could
cause you to lose control and be seriously
injured or killed.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of
a rollover, which may result in severe injury.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or
grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so
may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle,
which may result in severe injury. Always back
carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE.
Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only
the vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally
across a hill, always drive straight up or down.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type
of water. Water crossings should be avoided if
possible and only be attempted when
necessary, in a safe responsible manner. You
should only drive through areas which are
designated and approved. You should tread
lightly and avoid damage to the environment.
You should know your vehicle's abilities and be
able to recover it if something goes wrong. You
should never stop or shut a vehicle off when
crossing deep water unless you ingested water
into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls do
not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has
ingested water first. The key to any crossing is
low and slow. You want to use FIRST gear in
4WD Low and proceed very slowly with a
constant slow speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h]
maximum) and light throttle. Keep the vehicle
moving; do not try to accelerate through the
crossing. After crossing any water higher than
the bottom of the axle differentials, you should
inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water
ingestion.
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water – As you
approach any type of water you need to
determine if you can cross it safely and
responsibly. If necessary, get out and walk
through the water or probe it with a stick. You
need to be sure of its depth, approach angle,
current and bottom condition. Be careful of
murky or muddy waters, check for hidden
obstacles. Make sure you will not be
intruding on any wildlife and you can recover
the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe
crossing is the water depth, current and
bottom conditions. On soft bottoms the
vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing the
water level on the vehicle. Be sure to
consider this when determining the depth
and the ability to safely cross.
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or
Other Standing Water – Puddles, pools,
flooded or other standing water areas
normally contain murky or muddy waters.
These water types normally contain hidden
obstacles and make it difficult to determine
an accurate water depth, approach angle,
and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water
holes are where you want to hook up tow
straps prior to entering. This makes for a
faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If
you are able to determine you can safely
cross, than proceed using the low and slow
method.
Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or
Other Flowing Water – Flowing water can be
extremely dangerous. Never attempt to cross
a fast running stream or river even in shallow
water. Fast moving water can easily push
your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of
control. Even in very shallow water, a high
current can still wash the dirt out from
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission,
transfer case, engine or vehicle interior can
occur if you drive too fast or through too deep
of water. Water can cause permanent
damage to engine, driveline or other vehicle
components and your brakes will be less
effective once wet and/or muddy.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system
effectiveness by depositing debris onto the
radiator.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
around your tires putting you and your vehicle
in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of
personal injury and vehicle damage with
slower water currents in depths greater than
the vehicle's running ground clearance. You
should never attempt to cross flowing water
which is deeper than the vehicle's running
ground clearance. Even the slowest current
can push the heaviest vehicle downstream
out of control if the water is deep enough to
push on the large surface area of the
vehicle's body. Before you proceed deter-
mine the speed of the current, the water's
depth, approach angle, bottom condition and
if there are any obstacles, then cross at an
angle heading slightly upstream using the
low and slow technique.
AIRING DOWN FOR OFF-ROAD DRIVING
Running lower tire pressure off-road can
improve your ride comfort and vehicle traction.
Reducing the tire air pressure allows the tire to
bulge slightly, improving its surface area for
better flotation and ability to mold or form to the
ground contour. Different terrain, tires, and
vehicles require different tire pressure. Hard
surfaces like rock and heavier vehicles require
higher pressures than softer surfaces such as
sand and lighter vehicles. You will need to
experiment to determine what is right for your
situation. It is easier and faster to let air out
than it is to replace it. Start high and lower it as
required. Remember you must return the tires
to normal air pressure before driving on road or
at highway conditions. Be sure you have a way
to return the tires to their normal on road air
pressure.
VEHICLE RECOVERY
If you drive off-road, you may encounter a
situation where you will need to recover your
vehicle. Vehicle recovery should always be
given consideration before attempting a
questionable obstacle. You should never go
off-road driving without the ability to recover
your vehicle from a situation. Having another
vehicle with you usually works best for most
situations. The first thing to do is assess the
situation. Why are you stuck? Are you hung up
on something? Would it be easier to go forward
or to go backward? Can you still move the
vehicle? Is there an anchor point to winch to?
Are you alone or do you have another vehicle to
help? Is there high risk of vehicle damage
during the recovery process? Answering these
questions will help you determine the best
method of recovery. If you can still move the
vehicle slightly and the only issue is slick
ground, then rock cycling your vehicle would be
the first choice. If you have ample room, an
additional vehicle and there is low risk of
vehicle impact on the surroundings, then using
a tow strap to the vehicle tow hooks would be
fast and easy. If the vehicle is severely hung up
or in a situation where great care needs to be
taken during the recovery, then nothing can do
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It
can push your vehicle downstream, sweeping
it out of control. This could put you and your
passengers at risk of injury or drowning.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of
tire damage and may cause tire unseating
with total loss of air pressure. To reduce the
risk of tire unseating, while at a reduced tire
pressure, drive at slower speeds and avoid
sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
the job better than a winch. If you are severely
hung up on something you should jack the
vehicle up and stack something under the
wheels to allow the vehicle to roll off the object
without causing further damage. This should be
tried before attempting any recovery method.
Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your
vehicle is one of the easiest, fastest and
most commonly used methods. This simply
involves shifting your vehicle from DRIVE to
REVERSE, while applying throttle after each
shift. During this process, for additional trac-
tion, try turning your steering wheel quickly
left and right no more than a quarter turn. If
you are stuck in mud, sand, or snow try spin-
ning your tires during this process to clean
the debris from the tread and improve the
traction. You want to create a rocking motion
with the vehicle. This helps build vehicle
momentum, which hopefully gets you out.
Remember to ease off and on the accelerator
before and after the shift. If after a few rock
cycles your vehicle is not free, stop and try
another method of recovery. Continuous rock
cycling will only cause unnecessary damage
to your vehicle and the environment.
Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap – Tow
straps are a quick and easy way to recover
your vehicle from minor situations if you have
a secondary vehicle which is not stuck. The
tow hooks on your vehicle are designed to
take the abusive force generated during
vehicle recovery. Do not use the bumper or
any other vehicle component as an attach-
ment point. Using tow straps requires coordi-
nation between the two drivers. Good
communication and line of sight are required
for a safe recovery. First connect the tow
strap to the correct attachment points on
both vehicles. There should be a least 20 to
30 feet (6 to 9 meters) between the vehicles
to allow for a safe recovery. If necessary join
two tow straps together using a 1.5 inch hard
wood dowel. This will keep the straps from
becoming knotted and is safer than using a
clevis pin if the strap breaks. Next have the
tow vehicle back-up, leaving two to three feet
worth of slack in the strap. Then the tow
vehicle, using light throttle, should accelerate
tightening the strap providing the pulling
force needed to free the vehicle. The vehicle
being recovered should assist in the
recovery, at the time of the snap, by slowly
spinning the tires in the same direction as
the pulling vehicle. After the vehicle becomes
free, the driver of the previously stuck vehicle
should signal they are free and should hit
their brakes stopping both vehicles. The
driver of the pulling vehicle should let off the
throttle without using the brakes, once
signaled by the other driver. This sequence is
important to avoid having the recovered
vehicle hit the pulling vehicle.
CAUTION!
Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without
first clearing the object, may result in
additional underbody damage.
CAUTION!
Damage can occur when spinning your tires
at an excessive high speed. Do not spin your
tires faster than an indicated 30 mph
(48 km/h).
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
Winching (Refer To “Winch Operation” For
Additional Information) – Winching is most
commonly used in the following situations:
there is no support vehicle available, a high
controlled force is required to recover the
vehicle, there is a high risk of environmental
or vehicle damage, or where nothing else
seems to work. A winch can deliver a high
pulling force with a great deal of control. It
allows you to walk the vehicle out of the situ-
ation in a slow controlled manner. This
control works well for avoiding further vehicle
damage. Once you decide it is time to use the
winch look for a good anchor point. It needs
to be strong enough to hold more than the
vehicle's weight and provide a direction of
pull as straight as possible. Use block and
tackle if necessary to improve the angle of
pull or increase the winch's pulling force. If
the anchor point is a tree use a strap around
its base and hook the cable to the strap. If it
is another vehicle, then place that vehicle in
PARK and block the front tires. If you cannot
find an anchor point within reach try using
your spare tire by burying it. Once you have
determined an anchor point hook up the
cable, ensuring there are a least five wraps of
cable left on the drum, and place a floor mat
or something else over the strung out cable.
Placing something over the strung out cable
helps keep the cable on the ground if it
breaks. Next, place the vehicle in FIRST gear
and apply a very light throttle as you power
the winch in. Be careful not to allow slack in
the cable as you recover the vehicle. Do not
try to guide the cable into the drum. If it starts
to bunch up on one end, let it. You can
re-spool the cable afterwards. Never use a
winch cable as a tow strap and always stand
back while winching.
AFTER DRIVING OFF-ROAD
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
for damage. That way you can get any problems
taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
WARNING!
Never use tow straps with end hooks or link
two straps with a clevis pin. These heavy
metal objects could become projectiles if a
strap breaks, which could cause severe
injury. Never leave more than 2 to 3 feet
(0.60 to 1 meter) of slack in the strap. More
slack than this greatly increases the risk of
injury and vehicle damage. Always keep
everyone at least 30 feet (9 meters) away
from a strapping or winching situation.
WARNING!
Winch cables are under high tension when in
use and can become a projectile if they fail.
Never stand over or straddle the winch cable.
Never jerk or overload the winch cable. Never
stand in front of the vehicle while winching.
Failure to follow these instructions can result
in serious or fatal injury.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
Check threaded fasteners for looseness,
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-
nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten
them, if required, and torque to the values
specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand,
water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after
driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
check the wheels for impacted material.
Impacted material can cause a wheel imbal-
ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct
the situation.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
The limited-slip differential provides additional
traction on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel,
particularly when there is a difference between
the traction characteristics of the surface under
the right and left rear wheels. During normal
driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit
performs similarly to a conventional differential.
On slippery surfaces, however, the differential
delivers more of the driving effort to the rear
wheel having the better traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful
during slippery driving conditions. With both
rear wheels on a slippery surface, a slight
application of the accelerator will supply
maximum traction. When starting with only one
rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface,
slight momentary application of the parking
brake may be necessary to gain maximum
traction.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden
accelerations when both rear wheels are on a
slippery surface. This could cause both rear
wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide
sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in
a turn.
WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY (IF
EQUIPPED)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE USING YOUR
W
INCH
General Winch Information
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle
recovery winch. This winch uses the electrical
power from the vehicle charging system to power
a motor that winds the winch rope onto the winch
drum via planetary gear reduction. By nature, a
winch is capable of generating very high forces
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
braking. You might not have full braking
power when you need it to prevent a collision.
If you have been operating your vehicle in
dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and
cleaned as necessary.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip
differential never run the engine with one rear
wheel off the ground since the vehicle may
drive through the rear wheel remaining on the
ground. You could lose control of the vehicle.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
and should be used with care. Do not operate the
winch without reading and understanding the
complete winch owner's manual.
Tensioning The Winch Rope
The winch rope must be properly tensioned
before use. Follow the instructions below to
tension the rope:
1. Un-spool the rope leaving five wraps of
rope on the winch drum.
2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point.
3. Apply at least 1,000 lbs (454 kg) of tension
to the rope while winding the rope. Always
use care to ensure the rope does not pile up
on one side of the drum and is neatly wound
onto the drum.
Low Voltage Interrupt
Your winch is equipped with a device that will
interrupt winch function if the vehicle charging
system voltage drops to a low level. The winch
will not power-in or out for 30 seconds if this
device is tripped. If the interrupt is tripped, the
vehicle should be operated at high idle for a few
minutes to allow the vehicle charging system to
recover before continuing to winch.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF
Y
OUR WINCH
Winch Components
1.
Motor:
The winch motor is powered by the
vehicle charging system.
2. Remote Socket: The remote socket (which
will be located on the bumper assembly)
allows the remote control to be attached to
the control pack to allow the winch to
function.
3. Winch Drum With Integral Brake: The winch
drum allows the rope to be stored on the
winch and transmits force to the rope. The
winch is equipped with an integral brake
that will stop rotation of the winch drum if
the winch motor is stopped.
4. Synthetic Rope: The synthetic rope allows
the winch to be connected to an anchor to
provide a pulling force. This synthetic rope is
highly flexible, lightweight, and it floats.
5. Clutch Lever: The clutch lever allows the
winch drum to be disconnected from the
winch motor to allow the rope to be pulled
from the winch by hand.
6. Remote Control: The remote control
provides the interface between the winch
operator and the winch. The remote control
provides the ability to power the winch in,
out, and stop the winch. To operate the
winch, the toggle switch is pushed down to
power the winch in and up to power the
winch out. The winch will stop if the switch
is left in the neutral (center) position.
CAUTION!
Be certain the anchor will withstand the load
required to tension the winch rope.
CAUTION!
The winch rope must spool on the winch drum
in the direction indicated on the drum rotation
decal on the winch.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
(Continued)
(Continued)
Fairlead: The hawse fairlead acts as a guide for
the synthetic rope and minimizes damage to the
rope.
WINCH ACCESSORIES
The following accessories are necessary to
attach the winch to anchors, change direction of
pull, and for safe winching.
Gloves: It is extremely important to
wear protective gloves while
operating the winch or handling the
winch rope. Avoid loose fitting clothes
or anything that could become entangled in the
rope and other moving parts.
Snatch/Block Pulley: Used properly,
the multi-purpose snatch block allows
you to (1) increase the winch's pulling
power; and (2) change your pulling
direction without damaging the winch rope.
Proper use of the snatch block is covered in
“Before You Pull.”
Clevis/D-Shackles: The D-Shackle is a
safe means of connecting the looped
ends of cables, straps and snatch
blocks. The shackle's pin is threaded
to allow easy removal.
Tree Trunk Protector: Typically made
of tough, high-quality nylon, it
provides the operator an attachment
point for the winch rope to a wide
variety of anchor points and objects, as well as
protect living trees.
Abrasion Sleeve: The abrasion sleeve is
provided with the synthetic rope and must be
used with the synthetic rope at all times to
protect the rope from potential abrasion wear.
The sleeve has a loose fit so it can easily be
positioned along the synthetic rope to protect
from rough surfaces and sharp corners.
OPERATING YOUR WINCH
CAUTION!
If not installed, the hook strap must be
placed on the hook.
WARNING!
Failure to observe any of these warnings
regarding proper winch usage may result in
severe injury.
Always use supplied hook strap to hold the
hook when spooling wire rope in or out.
Never use as a hoist.
Never use to move persons.
Never exceed winch or synthetic rope rated
capacity.
Always wear heavy leather gloves when
handling the synthetic rope.
Never touch synthetic rope or hook while in
tension or under load.
Never engage or disengage clutch if winch
is under load, synthetic rope is in tension,
or rope drum is moving.
Always stand clear of synthetic rope and
load and keep others away during winching.
Always keep hands and clothing clear of the
synthetic rope, hook and fairlead opening
during operation and when spooling.
Never wrap synthetic rope back onto itself.
Always use a choker chain, wire choker
rope or tree trunk protector on the anchor.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
General Information
Practice using your winch before you get stuck.
Some key points to remember when using your
winch are:
Always take your time to assess the situation
and plan your pull carefully.
Always take your time when using a winch.
Use the right equipment for the situation.
Always wear leather gloves and do not allow
the synthetic rope to slip through your hands
when handling the rope.
Only the operator should handle the synthetic
rope and remote control.
Think safety at all times.
Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch
Never attach a recovery strap to the winch
hook to increase the length of a pull.
Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the
recovery strap attached directly to the
winch hook.
Never use bungee or kinetic straps that
develop tremendous and potentially
dangerous amounts of force when
stretched.
Always disconnect the remote control when
not in use.
Never winch when there are less than
10 wraps of synthetic rope around the
winch drum.
Always pass remote control through a
window to avoid pinching lead in door,
when using remote inside a vehicle.
Never leave the remote control plugged
into the winch while free spooling, rigging or
sitting idle.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Always know your winch: Take the time to
fully read and understand the included
Installation and Operations Guide, and
Basic Guide to Winching Techniques, in
order to understand your winch and the
winching operation.
Always inspect winch installation and
synthetic rope condition before operating
the winch. Frayed, kinked or damaged rope
must be replaced immediately. Loose or
damaged winch installation must be
corrected immediately.
Always be sure any element which can
interfere with safe winching operations is
removed prior to initiating winching.
Always keep remote control lead clear of
the drum, synthetic rope and rigging.
Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed rope, or
loose connections. Replace if damaged.
Be careful not to pull the winch rope collar
through the rollers. Watch and listen to
winch for proper snugness.
Never power hook through fairlead. Could
cause damage.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
1. Inspect the winch, winch mount, and
synthetic rope for damage. Do not use the
winch if the mount is loose or rope shows
excessive wear, frays, or damage.
Winch Rope
2. Put on gloves.
3. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling
of the winch drum, rotate the clutch lever on
the winch to disengage. Freespooling
conserves battery power.
Free Spool Lever
4. Free the winch hook and attach the hook
strap. Free the winch hook from its anchor
point. Attach the hook strap to the hook (if
not attached).
Hook Strap
5. Pull the wire to the anchor point. Pull out
enough wire rope to reach your anchor
point. To prevent losing the end, hold the
hook strap while you work.
Pulling Synthetic Rope
WARNING!
Never touch winch rope or hook while
someone else is at the control switch or
during winching operation.
Never touch winch rope or hook while
under tension or under load.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have
established your anchor point, secure the
tree-trunk protector or choker-chain around
the object.
Tree Trunk Protector
NOTE:
How to choose an anchor point: A secure
anchor is critical to winching operations. An
anchor must be strong enough to hold while
winching. Natural anchors include trees,
stumps and rocks. Hook the cable as low as
possible. If no natural anchors are available
when recovering another vehicle, your vehicle
becomes the anchor point. In this case, be sure
to put the transmission in NEUTRAL, apply the
hand brake and block its wheels to prevent your
vehicle from moving. Ideally, you'll want an
anchor point that will enable you to pull straight
in the direction the vehicle will move. This
allows the synthetic rope to wind tightly and
evenly onto the spooling drum. An anchor point
as far away as possible will provide the winch
with its greatest pulling power.
7. Attach the Clevis/D-Shackle and Tree Trunk
Protector. Attach the shackle to the two
ends of the strap or chain and through the
hook, being careful not to over tighten
(tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
Clevis/D-Shackles
8. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by
rotating the clutch lever on the winch to
engage.
NOTE:
Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or
disengaged.
9. Connect the remote control to the winch
control box, located on the front fascia/
bumper. Be careful not to let the remote
control cord dangle in front of the winch. If
you choose to control the winch from inside
your vehicle, always pass the remote
through a window to avoid pinching the cord
in the door. Always disconnect the remote
control when not in use.
Winch Box Remote Control Connector
CAUTION!
Always be certain the anchor you select will
withstand the load.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
10. Put synthetic rope under tension. Using the
remote control switch, slowly wind the rope
until no slack remains. Once the rope is
under tension, stand well clear of it and
never step over it.
Pulling Synthetic Rope Under Tension
11. Check your anchor. Make sure all
connections are secured and free of debris
before continuing with the winching
procedure.
12. Check synthetic rope. The rope should be
neatly wound around the spooling drum.
Improper winding can cause damage to the
synthetic rope.
Synthetic Rope Neatly Wound Around The Spooling
Drum
Heavy Blanket Over Rope
In certain situations you may decide to
throw a heavy blanket or similar object over
the rope. A heavy blanket can absorb ener-
gy should the synthetic rope break. Place it
on the rope midway between the winch and
the anchor point. Do this before the rope is
put under tension. Do not approach or move
the blanket once tension is applied. Do not
allow it to get pulled into the fairlead. If it is
necessary to move or remove the blanket,
slack the tension on the rope first.
13. Establish "no people" zones: Make your
intentions clear. Be sure that everyone in
the immediate vicinity surrounding the
winching operation is completely aware of
your intentions before you pull. Declare
where the spectators should not stand —
never behind or in front of the vehicle and
never near the synthetic rope or snatch
block. Your situation may have other "no
people" zones.
No People Zones
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
14. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles
engine on and light tension already on the
synthetic rope, begin winching slowly and
steadily. Be sure that the rope is winding
evenly and tightly around the spooling
drum. For additional assistance, the
winched vehicle can be slowly driven while
being pulled by the winch. Continue pulling
until the vehicle is on stable ground. If you
are able to drive the vehicle, the winching
operation is complete.
Using The Remote Control
NOTE:
Avoid overheating the winch motor. For
extended winching, stop at reasonable
intervals to allow the winch motor to cool
down.
What to look for under load: The synthetic
rope must always spool onto the drum as
indicated by the drum rotation decal on
the winch. As you power-in, make sure
the synthetic rope winds evenly and
tightly on the drum. This prevents the
outer rope wraps from drawing into the
inner wraps, binding and damaging the
synthetic rope. Avoid shock loads by
using the control switch intermittently to
take up rope slack. Shock loads can
momentarily far exceed the winch and
synthetic rope ratings. During side pulls
the synthetic rope tends to stack up at
one end of the drum. This stack can
become large enough to cause serious
damage to the winch. So, line up pulls as
straight ahead as possible and stop
winching if the synthetic rope comes
close to the tie rods or mounting plate. To
fix an uneven stack, spool out that
section of the rope and reposition it to
the opposite end of the drum, which will
free up space for continued winching.
15. Secure vehicle. Once recovery of the vehicle
is complete, be sure to secure the vehicle's
brakes and shift the transmission to PARK.
Release tension in the synthetic rope.
16. Disconnect the synthetic rope, and
disconnect from the anchor.
17. Rewind the synthetic rope. The person
handling the synthetic rope should walk the
rope in and not let it slide through the hand,
control the winch at all times.
Rewinding The Synthetic Rope
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your
fingers inside the hook area as you are
powering-in.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
NOTE:
How to spool under no load: Arrange the remote
control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch.
Arrange the synthetic rope so it will not kink or
tangle when spooled. Be sure any synthetic
rope already on the spooling drum is wound
tightly and evenly layered. Tighten and
straighten the layer if necessary. Keep the
synthetic rope under light tension and spool the
rope back and onto the winch drum in even
layers. Stop frequently to tighten and straighten
the layers as necessary. Repeat this process
until the winch hook is the same distance as the
full length of the remote control from the winch.
Pinch the hook between your thumb and fore-
finger and attach the hook strap. Hold the hook
strap between the thumb and forefinger to keep
tension on the synthetic rope. Walk the
synthetic rope towards the fairlead, carefully
spooling in the remaining rope by pulsing the
remote control switch.
18. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of
the hawse fairlead.
Hook In Stored Position
19. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect
the remote control cord from the control box
and store in a clean and dry place. Winching
operations are now complete. Put the cap
on the solenoid plug-in.
NOTE:
Always store the remote control in a protected,
clean, dry area.
RIGGING TECHNIQUES
Various winching situations will require
application of other winching techniques. These
could range from too little distance to achieve
maximum pull using straight line rigging, simply
increasing pulling power, or maintaining a
straight-line pulling situation. You will have to
assess what technique is correct for your
situation. Think "safety" at all times.
How To Change The Pulling Direction
Change Pulling Directions
All winching operations should have a straight
line from the winch to the object being pulled.
This minimizes the synthetic rope collecting on
one side of the drum affecting pulling efficiency
and damaging synthetic rope. A snatch block,
secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle
will enable you to change your pulling direction
while still allowing the synthetic rope to be at
90° to wind properly onto the spooling drum.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
Increasing Pulling Power
In some cases, you may find yourself needing
more pulling power. The use of snatch blocks
increases mechanical advantage and that
increases your pulling power.
Double Line
Wire Rope Routing
Because pulling power decreases with the
number of layers of synthetic rope on the winch
drum, you can use a snatch block to double line
out more rope. This decreases the number of
layers of synthetic rope on the drum, and
increases pulling power. Start by feeding out
enough synthetic rope to free the winch hook.
Attach the hook to your vehicle's frame/tow
hook and run the rope through a snatch block.
Disengage the clutch and, using the snatch
block, pull out enough synthetic rope to reach
your anchor point. Do not attach the hook to the
mounting kit. Secure to the anchor point with a
tree trunk protector or choker chain. Attach the
clevis/shackle. Attach the shackle to the two
ends of the strap/chain, being careful not to
over tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — GASOLINE
ENGINE (IF EQUIPPED)
This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders
during light load and cruise conditions. The
system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control for cruising at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for maintaining
a set distance between you and the vehicle
ahead using Fixed Speed Cruise Control to
automatically adjust the preset speed.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if an ACC
distance is not set, Fixed Speed Cruise Control
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h), or 25 mph (40 km/h),
depending on the powertrain equipped in the
vehicle.
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Cruise
Control system has been designed to shut down
if multiple Cruise Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Cruise
Control system can be reactivated by pushing
the Cruise Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a
second time. The cruise indicator light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in
use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed. Once a speed has been set, a message
“CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” will
appear indicating the set speed. A cruise
indicator light, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster
display when the speed is set.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (-) button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When Cruise Control is set, you can increase the
speed by pushing the RES (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the RES (+) button, or SET (-) button
once will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
1 — On/Off Button
2 — CANCEL
3 — RES (+)
4 — SET (-)
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the RES (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Controls is set, press the
accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.
Using Cruise Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a
greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may
be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES (+) button and release. Resume can be
used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the
CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Cruise
Control without erasing the set speed from
memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Cruise Control without erasing the set speed
from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button, or placing the
ignition in the OFF position, erases the set
speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
E
QUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by Cruise Control
while traveling on highways and major
roadways. However, it is not a safety system
and not designed to prevent collisions. The
Cruise Control function performs differently if
your vehicle is not equipped with ACC
Ú page 200.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control
engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your speed.
ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing
camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you to maintain a set speed.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the condi-
tions, and you could lose control and have an
accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
matically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the perfor-
mance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and
Forward Collision Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control alone (an ACC
distance not set) will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the
mode selected Ú page 490.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for active
driver involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic,
and weather conditions, vehicle speed,
distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road condi-
tions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe
control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize
complex driving conditions, which can
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a vehicle ahead and
hold the vehicle for approximately two
seconds in the stop position. At this
point, there will be an “ACC may cancel
soon” chime and warning to the driver.
When ACC is cancelled, the system will
release the brakes and the driver must
take over braking. The system can be
resumed when the vehicle ahead drives
off by releasing the brake and pushing
the resume button on the steering
wheel.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway construc-
tion zones).
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering
wheel operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the ACC on/off button until one of the
following appears in the instrument cluster
display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the RES (+) or the SET(-) button is pushed,
the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off.”
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Adaptive Cruise Control On/Off Button
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off Button
3 — CANCEL
4 — Distance Button
5 — RES (+)
6 — SET (-)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the
minimum speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
low speed
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Full Off
mode is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the instrument cluster display will show
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set
speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
an ACC distance set. To change between the
different modes, push the ACC on/off button
which turns the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on
(changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20 mph (20 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be the current speed of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In the Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode (no
ACC distance set), the system will not react to
vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will
sound even if you are too close to the vehicle
ahead since neither the presence of the
vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a
safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode
is selected.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal
can cause the vehicle to continue to accel-
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will
display in the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while an ACC distance is also set, the
system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANCEL button is pushed.
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event
occurs.
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
Driver door is opened at low speeds.
A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
The trailer brake is applied manually (if
equipped).
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed
in memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES
(+) button and then remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster
display will display the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed
Cruise Control is being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
While in ACC mode when the vehicle comes
to a complete stop longer than two seconds,
the system will cancel. The driver will have
to apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a
standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a
stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in
close proximity.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the RES (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the RES (+) button, or SET (-) button
once will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The new
set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the RES (+) button, or SET (-) button
once will result in a 1 km/h speed adjust-
ment. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
new set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
When An ACC Distance Is Also Set:
When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
The ACC system applies the brake down to a
full stop when following the vehicle in front.
If your vehicle follows the vehicle in front to
a standstill, your vehicle will release the
brakes two seconds after coming to a
complete stop.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while
climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking
temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) can be set by varying the
distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one
bar (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the
distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
setting displays in the instrument cluster
display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
Distance Settings
To adjust the distance setting, push the
Distance button and release. Each time the
button is pushed, the distance setting increases
by one bar (longer). When the farthest distance
is set, pushing the Distance button again will
reset to the shortest distance.
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the
instrument cluster displays the ACC Set With
Target Detected Indicator Light, and the system
adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain
the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking force.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Trailer Detect — If Equipped
When a trailer is detected, the ACC system
automatically defaults to the longest setting
(four bars). The setting can be overridden by
pushing the Distance button on the steering
wheel.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration
is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following the vehicle in front,
your vehicle will resume motion without any
driver intervention if the vehicle in front starts
moving within two seconds.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
If the vehicle in front does not start moving
within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
and the brakes will release. A cancel message
will display on the instrument cluster display
and produce a warning chime. The driver must
now manually operate the vehicle's
accelerator and brakes.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled
or the driver door is opened, the ACC system
will cancel and the brakes will release. Driver
intervention will be required at this moment.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice
and snow, or tunnels with reflective tiles). The
ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
sensor is located in the camera in the center of
the windshield, on the forward side of the
rearview mirror.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully clear
the windshield.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without
any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at your
authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector,
an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” warning will display and a
chime will sound when conditions temporarily
limit system performance. This most often
occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
windshield, driving directly into the sun and fog
on the inside of glass. In these cases, the
instrument cluster display will show “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
and the system will have degraded
performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in adverse weather conditions. The
ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle
has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily
occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rearview
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system
will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the
windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service
Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, there may be an internal system fault
or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC
again later, following an ignition cycle. If the
problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
NOTE:
Aftermarket add-ons such as snow plows, lift
kits, and brush/grille bars can hinder module
performance. Ensure the radar/camera has
no obstructions in the field of view.
Height modifications can limit module perfor-
mance and functionality.
Do not put stickers or easy passes over the
camera/radar field of view.
Any modifications to the vehicle that may
obstruct the field of view of the radar/camera
are not recommended.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay
alert and may need to intervene. The following
are examples of these types of situations:
Towing A Trailer
ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only
with an Integrated Trailer Brake Controller.
Aftermarket trailer brake controllers will not
activate the trailer brakes when ACC is braking.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original set
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a
vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,
vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be
limited.
ACC Hill Example
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you are
traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not
yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for
the ACC system to take action. ACC may not
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the
lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the
lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear, and/or front fascia/bumper,
and a detected obstacle when backing up or
moving forward (e.g. during a parking
maneuver).
For limitations of this system and
recommendations, see Ú page 217.
ParkSense will retain the system state (enabled
or disabled) from the previous ignition cycle
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. A warning will appear in the
instrument cluster display when the vehicle is in
REVERSE, indicating the vehicle is above
ParkSense operating speed. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
NOTE:
If equipped as a dually, the ParkSense system
has six rear sensors to assist in detection
around the dually flares.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
NOTE:
The dually flares are only protected when the
vehicle is in REVERSE. There is no detection for
the flares when the vehicle is moving forward.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper
and the detected obstacle Ú page 111.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE
or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle
has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear
regions based on the obstacle’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear region and the system will
produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change
from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert
operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio
tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected,
the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is
applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 258.
The chime volume settings include low,
medium, and high. The factory default volume is
medium.
ENABLING AND DISABLING FRONT
A
ND/OR REAR PARKSENSE
Front ParkSense can be enabled and
disabled with the Front ParkSense
switch.
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the Rear ParkSense switch.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the Front or Rear system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will show a vehicle
graphic with an “Off” message overlay over the
system that is off (Front or Rear system). This
vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be
on when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or
requires service. The Front or Rear ParkSense
switch LED will be off when the Front or Rear
system is enabled. If the Front or Rear
ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system
requires service, the Front or Rear ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE FRONT/
R
EAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the Front/Rear
ParkSense System has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
show the "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable
Service Required" or the "Front/Rear
ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Sensors"
message.
When the gear selector is moved into REVERSE,
a vehicle graphic will show in the instrument
cluster display, along with the display overlay
“Wipe Sensors.” If the system needs service,
the display overlay will read “Service.” Under
this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No No No Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
(Continued)
If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe
Sensors" appears in the instrument cluster
display make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service
Required" appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascias/
bumpers are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and
debris to keep the ParkSense system oper-
ating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and Front or Rear Park-
Sense is turned off, the instrument cluster
display will show "Off" on the vehicle graphic
arcs. This vehicle graphic will be displayed for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if obstacles such as bicycle
carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
18 inches (45 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a
sensor problem, causing the “Front/Rear
ParkSense Unavailable Service Required”
message to be appear in the instrument
cluster display.
On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, Park-
Sense should be disabled when the tailgate
is in the lowered or open position. A lowered
tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). It uses a forward looking camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle
position within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane while
no turn signal has been applied OR the driver
departs the lane on the opposite side of the
applied turn signal (if the left turn signal is
applied and the vehicle departs to the right), the
LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in
the form of torque applied to the steering wheel
to prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries. The LaneSense system will also
provide a visual warning through the instrument
cluster display to prompt the driver to remain
within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver unintentionally drifts across that
lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provides
an audible and visual warning to the driver
when the driver’s hands are not detected on the
steering wheel. The system will cancel if the
driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly be disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
WARNING! (Continued)
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on
the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch
Uconnect Display screen, the LaneSense button
is located above the display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A
“LaneSense On” message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button again (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state (on or off) from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument
cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense
telltale is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense Telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs on the left side.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the visual warning in the
instrument cluster display will show the left
lane line flashing yellow (on/off). The Lane-
Sense telltale changes from solid white to
flashing yellow.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With Yellow
Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines
Detected
When the LaneSense system is on and both
the lane markings have been detected, the
system is "armed" to provide visual warnings
in the instrument cluster display and a torque
warning in the steering wheel if an uninten-
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
tional lane departure occurs. The lane lines
turn from gray to white and the LaneSense
telltale is solid green.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left lane line turns solid
yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid green to solid yellow. At this time
torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Approached (Solid Yellow Lane Line) With Solid
Yellow Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left lane line flashes yellow
(on/off). The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in
the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With
Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late)
that you can configure through the Uconnect
system Ú page 258.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
Use of the turn signal suppresses the warn-
ings.
The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward
Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you
to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio
display screen along with a caution note to
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView Camera is located in
the center of the tailgate handle.
NOTE:
Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview
camera function.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View
Camera
1. Press the "Controls" button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the "Backup Camera" icon to turn the
Rear View Camera system on.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera delay turned off), the rear Camera
mode is exited and the previous screen appears
again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera delay turned on), the rear Camera
image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
after shifting to another gear, unless the vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into PARK, the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, or the touchscreen
button “X” to disable display of the Rear View
Camera image is pressed.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is
activated through the "Backup Camera" button
in the Controls menu, and the vehicle speed is
greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a
display timer for the image is initiated. The
image will continue to be displayed until the
display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will
be displayed continuously until deactivated
via the touchscreen button "X", the transmis-
sion is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen button "X" to disable display
of the camera image is made available ONLY
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
Cargo Camera Icons — If Equipped
Backup Camera Touchscreen Button
Cargo Camera Touchscreen Button
AUX Camera Touchscreen Button
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen
button is made available to indicate the current
active Camera image being displayed whenever
the Rear View Camera image is displayed.
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen
button to switch the display to Cargo Camera
image is made available whenever the Rear
View Camera image is displayed.
A touchscreen button "X" to disable display of
the camera image is made available when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE gear.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the backup camera image to illustrate the width
of the vehicle and its projected backup path
based on the steering wheel position. The active
guidelines will show separate zones that will
help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The corresponding settings can be
adjusted within Uconnect Settings Ú page 258.
A dashed centerline overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning
to a hitch/receiver. The following table shows
the approximate distances for each zone:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located
in the center of the tailgate handle.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is
being displayed, and the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h)
while in any gear selector position,
Zoom View is available. By pressing
Zones
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of
the display screen, the image will zoom in to
four times the standard view. Pressing the icon
a second time will return the view to the
standard Backup Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is
in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera
delay view will display the standard Backup
Camera view. If the vehicle is then returned to
REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View
selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or
REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal
to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavail-
able and the icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
AUX CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two
AUX Cameras, which display rearview and side
view images from the trailer on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
Two Aux Cameras are only available on vehicles
with NAV equipped radios if the vehicle is not
equipped with a Center High-Mounted Stop
Lamp (CHMSL) and Surround View Camera
system.
Activation
The AUX Camera is activated by first pressing
the Backup Camera, Cargo Camera (if
equipped), or Surround View Camera (if
equipped) button on the touchscreen, followed
by the AUX button located in the upper left
corner of the rearview display. The AUX camera
can also be activated when the vehicle is in
REVERSE by pressing the AUX button.
If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can
switch between each camera by pressing the
AUX1 or AUX2 buttons on the Trailer Camera
display.
AUX1 Camera Button
AUX2 Camera Button
Deactivation
The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the
“X” in the upper right corner of the touchscreen.
This will return the display back to the
previously displayed screen.
NOTE:
If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX
Camera is connected, the touchscreen will
display a blue screen along with the message
“Camera System Unavailable.” The screen
can be exited out by pressing the “X” in the
upper right hand corner. This will return the
display back to the previously displayed
screen.
Zoom View is not available with the AUX
Camera feature.
The display will always default to the Trailer
Camera display AUX1.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Surround View Camera system allows you
to see an on-screen image of the surroundings
and the Top View of your vehicle. This occurs
whenever the gear selector is in REVERSE or
when enabled through the Uconnect system.
The Top View of the vehicle will also show if any
doors are open. The image will be displayed on
the touchscreen along with a caution note
“Check Entire Surroundings”. After five
seconds, this note will disappear. The Surround
View Camera system is comprised of four
cameras located in the front grille, rear tailgate
and side mirrors.
NOTE:
Removing the tailgate will disable the rear-
view camera function.
The Surround View Camera system has
programmable settings that may be selected
through the Uconnect system Ú page 258.
Press this button on the touchscreen
to enter the Surround View Camera
menu in the Uconnect system.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the
Rear View and Top View is the default view of
the system.
If the camera delay is turned on, the camera
image will display for up to 10 seconds after
shifting out of REVERSE. The camera image will
not display for 10 seconds if the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted
into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. The “X” button on the touchscreen
disables the display of the camera image.
If the camera delay is turned off, the camera
image will close and display the previous screen
after shifting out of REVERSE.
If active guidelines are enabled, the lines are
overlaid on the image in the Rear View to
illustrate the width of the vehicle. The view will
also include the side view mirrors and its
projected back up path based on the steering
wheel position.
There are different colored zones to indicate the
distance to the rear of the vehicle. Refer to the
chart below:
Modes Of Operation
Standard Rear View can be manually activated
by selecting “Back Up Camera” through the
Controls menu within the Uconnect system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system
with Rear View and Front View in a split screen
display. There are integrated ParkSense arcs in
the image at the front and rear of the vehicle.
The arcs will change color from yellow to red
corresponding the distance zones to the
oncoming object.
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
The fifth button of the ParkSense Camera View
screen will change based on the features present
in the vehicle. If not equipped with a Cargo
Camera or Trailer Reverse Guidance, the Backup
Camera soft button will be displayed. If equipped
with a Cargo Camera but no Trailer Reverse
Guidance, the Cargo Camera soft button will be
displayed. If equipped with both a Cargo Camera
and Trailer Reverse Guidance, the Cargo/Trailer
Reverse Guidance soft button will be displayed.
ParkSense Camera View
NOTE:
Front tires will display on the image when the
tires are turned.
Due to wide angle cameras in mirrors, the
image will appear distorted.
Top View will show which doors are open.
Open front doors will cancel the outside
image.
Rear View
This is the default view of the system
in REVERSE and is always paired with
the Top View of the vehicle with
optional active guidelines for the
projected path when enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view
of the rear camera system. The Top
View will be disabled when this is
selected.
Front View
The Front View will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle
and is always paired with the Top View
of the vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view
of the front camera system. The Top
View will be disabled when this is
selected.
Rear View Camera
Pressing the Backup Camera soft key
will provide a full screen rear view with
Zoom View.
NOTE:
If the Rear View Camera view was selected
through the Surround View Camera menu,
exiting out of the Rear View screen will return to
the Surround View menu. If the Back Up Camera
was manually activated through the Controls
menu of the Uconnect system, exiting out of the
display screen will return to the Controls menu.
Cargo Camera
Pressing the Cargo Camera soft key
will provide a full screen view of the
cargo area.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the Cargo Camera view was selected through
the Surround View screen, exiting out of the
Cargo Camera screen will return to the
Surround View screen. If the Cargo Camera was
manually activated through the Controls menu
of the Uconnect display, exiting out of the
display screen will return to the Controls menu.
Trailer Reverse Guidance
Pressing the Trailer Reverse
Guidance soft key will provide a full
screen view of the cargo area and
trailer.
Pressing the Left & Right Tow Mirror
Split Screen View button within the
Trailer Reverse Guidance screen will
display a split screen to allow the
driver to see both sides of the trailer at the
same time. This view allows the driver to pan
left/right to better frame the trailer in the image.
NOTE:
Trailer Reverse Guidance can only be selected
through the Surround View screen; exiting out of
the Trailer Reverse Guidance screen will return
to the Surround View screen.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is being
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below
8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear, Zoom View
is available. By pressing the “magnifying glass”
icon in the upper left of the display screen, the
image will zoom in to four times the standard
view. Pressing the icon a second time will return
the view to the standard Back Up Camera
display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is
in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera
delay view will display the standard Back Up
Camera view. If the vehicle is then returned to
REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View
selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
(13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or
REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal
to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavail-
able and the icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
Deactivation
The system is deactivated in the following
conditions if it was activated automatically:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to
10 seconds, unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is
shifted into PARK or the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. There is a touchscreen
button “X” to disable the display of the
camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the Surround
View Camera mode is exited and the last
known screen appears again.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
The system is deactivated in the following
conditions if it was activated manually from the
Uconnect controls menu via the Surround View
button, Backup Camera button, Cargo Camera
button or Forward Facing Camera button:
The "X" button on the display is pressed
Vehicle is shifted into PARK
Ignition is placed in the OFF position
Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
10 seconds
NOTE:
If the Surround View Camera, Cargo Camera,
Backup Camera, or Forward Facing Camera is
activated manually, and the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE, deactivation methods for auto-
matic activation are assumed.
The camera delay system is turned off manually
through the Uconnect Settings menu
Ú page 258.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
If a malfunction with the system has
occurred, see an authorized dealer.
Cargo Camera With Dynamic Centerline — If
Equipped
The Dynamic Centerline feature provides an
overlay on the Cargo Camera display screen
that aligns to the center of the pickup box to aid
in hooking up a fifth wheel camper or
gooseneck trailer. The centerline auto aligns to
the center of the pickup box, and can also be
manually adjusted. The centerline will adjust in
response to steering angle inputs, and will not
obstruct the gooseneck receiver or an
approaching trailer gooseneck in the camera
feed.
Activation
The Dynamic Centerline feature can be
activated through the Uconnect settings by
pressing the Cargo Camera soft button,
followed by the “Dynamic Centerline” soft
button on the touchscreen.
If the Dynamic Centerline feature is turned on,
the overlay will display anytime the Cargo
Camera image is displayed.
Adjusting Centerline
Follow the steps below to manually adjust the
centerline:
1. Press the “Adjust Centerline” soft button
located in the bottom right corner of the
Cargo Camera display.
2. Use the arrows on the bottom left corner of
the Cargo Camera display to adjust the
centerline horizontally or vertically.
3. Once the desired position is achieved, press
the “Accept” button to set the centerline to
the newly specified position.
Deactivation
The Dynamic Centerline feature will
automatically be deactivated whenever the
Cargo Camera display is deactivated. It can also
be manually deactivated through the Uconnect
Settings.
Cargo Camera Zoom View
When the Cargo Camera image is
being displayed, and the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h)
while in any gear selector position,
Zoom View is available. By pressing
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of
the display screen, the image will zoom in to
four times the standard view. Pressing the icon
a second time will return the view to the
standard Cargo Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is
in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera
delay view will display the standard Cargo
Camera view. If the vehicle is then returned to
REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View
selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Zoom View is available until the gear selector is
placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds are at
or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or
REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal
to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavail-
able and the icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the dynamic centerline
will not be visible.
Forward Facing Camera With Tire Lines — If
Equipped
The Forward Facing Camera displays a front
view image of the road ahead, along with tire
lines to guide the driver when driving on narrow
roads. Tire lines can be activated/deactivated
through the Uconnect Settings.
Activation
The Forward Facing Camera can be activated by
pressing the Forward Camera soft button on the
touchscreen.
Once activated, the camera image will remain
on as long as the vehicle speed is below 8 mph
(13 km/h) and the vehicle is not in 4WD Low.
Deactivation
The Forward Facing Camera is deactivated in
the following conditions:
The vehicle is not in 4WD Low and the vehicle
speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h) for
10 seconds.
The “X” button on the display is pressed.
Vehicle is shifted into PARK.
Ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in 4WD Low, the Forward Facing
Camera image will be displayed until the “X”
button is pressed or the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. If the vehicle goes out of 4WD
Low, then the previously listed deactivation
conditions apply.
Trailer Reverse Guidance — If Equipped
The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature assists
the driver in backing up a trailer by providing
adjustable camera views of the trailer and
surrounding area. The cameras are mounted on
the side mirrors and the images will be
displayed side-by-side on the touchscreen. Left
and right camera images are swapped and
mirrored on the touchscreen to show the
equivalent area behind the vehicle as though
the driver is using the side mirrors.
Activation
The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature can be
activated by pressing the Trailer Reverse
Guidance button on the Backup/Cargo Camera
Display.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
Deactivation
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to
10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. There is a touchscreen button “X” to
disable the display of the camera image.
If Trailer Reverse Guidance is selected through
manually activated Surround View, Backup
Camera, or Cargo Camera, the below
deactivation conditions apply:
The “X” button on the display is pressed
The vehicle is shifted into PARK
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
The vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h)
for 10 seconds
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not equipped with a Pickup Box:
The bottom wedge of the Top View will be
displayed in black.
The Rear Cross Path soft button will be
grayed out.
The guidelines will not be overlaid on Top
View/Rear View and Full Screen of Backup
Camera view.
Black video will be displayed for the right side
of the Top and Rear View, and full screen of
the Backup Camera view when the Rear View
Camera is not connected.
AUX CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two
AUX Cameras, which display rearview and side
view images from the trailer on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
Two Aux Cameras are only available on vehicles
with NAV equipped radios if the vehicle is not
equipped with a Center High-Mounted Stop
Lamp (CHMSL) and Surround View Camera
system.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the Surround View Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View
should only be used as a parking aid. The
Surround View Camera is unable to view
every obstacle or object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using Surround View
to be able to stop in time when an obstacle
is seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using Surround View.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
Activation
The AUX Camera is activated by first pressing
the Backup Camera, Cargo Camera (if
equipped), or Surround View Camera (if
equipped) button on the touchscreen, followed
by the AUX button located in the upper left
corner of the rearview display. The AUX camera
can also be activated when the vehicle is in
REVERSE by pressing the AUX button.
If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can
switch between each camera by pressing the
AUX1 or AUX2 buttons on the Trailer Camera
display.
AUX1 Camera Button
AUX2 Camera Button
Deactivation
The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the
“X” in the upper right corner of the touchscreen.
This will return the display back to the
previously displayed screen.
NOTE:
If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX
Camera is connected, the touchscreen will
display a blue screen along with the message
“Camera System Unavailable.” The screen
can be exited out by pressing the “X” in the
upper right hand corner. This will return the
display back to the previously displayed
screen.
Zoom View is not available with the AUX
Camera feature.
The display will always default to the Trailer
Camera display AUX1.
ENGINE RUNAWAY — DIESEL ENGINE
Diesel engine runaway is a rare condition
affecting diesel engines, where the engine
consumes its own lubrication oil and runs at
higher and higher RPM until it overspeeds to a
point where it destroys itself due to either
mechanical failure or engine seizure through
lack of lubrication.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE
ENGINE
The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the
fuel filler door, on the left side of the vehicle.
Open the fuel door and remove the fuel filler cap
by turning it counter-clockwise.
WARNING!
In case of engine runaway due to flammable
fumes from fuel spills or turbocharger oil
leaks being sucked into the engine, do the
following to help avoid personal injury and/or
vehicle damage:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position.
2. Using a CO2 or dry chemical type fire
extinguisher, direct the spray from the fire
extinguisher into the grille on the driver
side so that the spray enters the engine
air intake.
The inlet for the engine air intake is located
behind the drivers side headlamp and
receives air through the grille.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE:
When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap
is tightened properly. The MIL in the instru-
ment cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not
secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap
is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
If the vehicle diagnostic system
determines that the fuel filler cap is
loose, improperly installed, or
damaged, a loose gASCAP indicator
will display in the instrument cluster telltale
display area Ú page 111. Tighten the fuel filler
cap properly and push the RIGHT button to turn
off the message. If the problem continues, the
message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the gas cap is
removed or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the
engine is running.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into
a portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
gas containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emissions
control system could result from using an
improper fuel tank filler tube cap.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impu-
rities into the fuel system.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn
on.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the
fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
WARNING!
Always place container on the ground
before filling.
Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the
container when you are filling it.
Use only approved containers for flam-
mable liquid.
Do not leave container unattended while
filling.
A static electric charge could cause a spark
and fire hazard.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Open the fuel filler door.
Fill Locations
NOTE:
There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside
the filler pipe seals the system.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler
pipe – the nozzle opens and holds the
flapper door while refueling.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is
full.
4. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
NOTE:
In the event that you run the vehicle out of fuel,
once refueled, place the ignition in the ON posi-
tion for 30 seconds, then turn the ignition OFF
and wait 30 seconds. Repeat this procedure
three times, prior to cranking the engine.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system to meet the
very stringent diesel emissions standards
required by the Environmental Protection
Agency.
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce
levels of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted from
engines) that are harmful to our health and the
environment to a near-zero level. A small
quantity of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is
injected into the exhaust upstream of a catalyst
where, when vaporized, it converts
smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into
harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O),
two natural components of the air we breathe.
You can operate with the comfort that your
vehicle is contributing to a cleaner, healthier
world environment for this and generations to
come.
System Overview
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust
Fluid (DEF) injection system and a Selective
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet the
emission requirements.
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
The DEF injection system consists of the
following components:
DEF tank
DEF pump
DEF injector
Electronically-heated DEF lines
DEF control module
NOx sensors
Temperature sensors
SCR catalyst
UQS Sensor
For system messages and warnings
Ú page 111.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection
system. You may occasionally hear an
audible clicking noise. This is normal opera-
tion.
The DEF pump will run for a period of time
after engine shutdown to purge the DEF
system. This is normal operation.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very
stable product with a long shelf life. If DEF is
kept in temperatures between 10°F and 90°F
(-12°C and 32°C), it will last a minimum of one
year.
DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest
temperatures. For example, DEF may freeze at
temperatures at or below 12°F (-11°C). The
system has been designed to operate in this
environment.
NOTE:
When working with DEF, it is important to know
that:
Any containers or parts that come into
contact with DEF must be DEF compatible
(plastic or stainless steel). Copper, brass,
aluminum, iron or non-stainless steel should
be avoided as they are subject to corrosion
by DEF.
If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up
completely.
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid
The DEF gauge (located on the instrument
cluster) will display the level of DEF remaining in
the tank Ú page 111.
NOTE:
Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed,
load, etc.) will affect the amount of DEF that
is used in your vehicle.
Another factor is that outside temperature
can affect DEF consumption. In cold condi-
tions, 12°F (-11°C) and below, the DEF
gauge needle can stay on a fixed position and
may not move for extended periods of time.
This is a normal function of the system.
There is an electric heater inside the DEF
tank that automatically works when neces-
sary. And if the DEF supply does freeze, the
truck will operate normally until it thaws.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
DEF Fill Procedure
NOTE:
For the correct fluid type Ú page 481.
Remove cap from DEF tank (located on drivers
side of the vehicle or in fuel door).
Fill Locations
NOTE:
The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds
to update after adding a gallon or more of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank. If
you have a fault related to the DEF system,
the gauge may not update to the new level.
See an authorized dealer for service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF
tank heater will possibly warm up the DEF
fluid and allow the gauge to update after a
period of run time. Under very cold condi-
tions, it is possible that the gauge may not
reflect the new fill level for several drives.
At 40°F (4°C) you could see some increase
in the DEF gauge due to the tank thawing.
The gauge and level sensor are working prop-
erly and is just updating with proper thawed
DEF.
Excessive overfilling of the DEF tank can
result in a MIL lamp/fault code and inaccu-
rate level readings.
Refilling With Nozzles
You can fill up at any DEF distributor.
Proceed as follows:
Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler, start
refilling and stop refilling at the first shut-off
(the shut-off indicates that the DEF tank is
full). DO NOT proceed with the refilling, to
prevent spillage of DEF.
Extract the nozzle.
Refilling With Containers
Proceed as follows:
Check the expiration date.
Read the advice for use on the label before
pouring the content of the bottle into the DEF
tank.
After the indication appears on the instru-
ment panel display Ú page 111 fill the DEF
tank with no more than 4 Gallons (15 liters).
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
CAUTION!
To avoid DEF spillage, and possible
damage to the DEF tank from overfilling, do
not “top off” the DEF tank after filling.
DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below
12ºF (-11ºC). The DEF system is designed
to work in temperatures below the DEF
freezing point, however, if the tank is over-
filled and freezes, the system could be
damaged.
When DEF is spilled, clean the area imme-
diately with water and use an absorbent
material to soak up the spills on the ground.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
Stop filling the DEF tank immediately if DEF
splashes or wells back in the filler neck.
Reinstall cap onto DEF filler tube.
Filling The Def Tank In Cold Climates
Since DEF will begin to freeze at 12°F (-11°C),
your vehicle is equipped with an automatic DEF
heating system. This allows the DEF injection
system to operate properly at temperatures
below 12°F (-11°C). If your vehicle is not in
operation for an extended period of time with
temperatures below 12°F (-11°C), the DEF in
the tank may freeze. If the tank is overfilled and
freezes, it could be damaged. Therefore, do not
overfill the DEF tank.
Extra care should be taken when filling with
portable containers to avoid overfilling. Note the
level of the DEF gauge in your instrument
cluster. You may safely add a maximum of
2 Gallons (7.5 Liters) of DEF from portable
containers when your DEF gauge is reading
½ full.
VEHICLE LOADING
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear axle
systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
PAYLOAD
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
TIRE SIZE
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is
accidentally added to the diesel fuel tank
as it can result in severe damage to your
engine, including but not limited to failure
of the fuel pump and injectors.
Never add anything other than DEF to the
tank – especially any form of hydrocarbon
such as diesel fuel, fuel system additives,
gasoline, or any other petroleum-based
product. Even a very small amount of these,
less than 100 parts per million or less than
1 oz. per 78 Gallons (295 Liters) will
contaminate the entire DEF system and will
require replacement. If owners use a
container, funnel or nozzle when refilling
the tank, it should either be new or one that
is has only been used for adding DEF.
Mopar® provides an attachable nozzle with
its DEF for this purpose.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
RIM SIZE
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
INFLATION PRESSURE
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
GAWR.
CURB WEIGHT
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
LOADING
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axles.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
of either the front or rear axle has been
exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store the heavier items down low and be sure
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing-related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 235.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in
or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in
combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR
Ú page 235.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link
that can be installed between the hitch receiver
and the trailer tongue that typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control, thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs
(2,267 kg) or more, it is recommended to use
a weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard
weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control
of your vehicle and cause a collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
GAWR requirements.
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
Recommended Distribution Hitch Adjustment
Towing With 2500/3500 Air Suspension
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to
the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
NOTE:
Normal Ride Height (NRH) or Alternate Trailer
Height (ATH) can be used. The vehicle must
remain in the engine running position while
attaching a trailer for proper leveling of the air
suspension system. It may not be possible to
enter Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) while lightly
loaded.
2. Measure the height of the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground, this
is height H1.
Measuring Height (H)
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight distributing
hitch system may reduce handling, stability
and braking performance and could result
in a collision.
Weight distributing systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground, this
is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per the manufacturers’
recommendations so that the height of the
front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between
H2 and H1 above normal ride height [H1]).
6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer
and weight distributing hitch to confirm
manufacturer’s recommendations have
been met.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with TOW/HAUL mode engaged.
Towing With All Other 2500/3500 (Non-Air
Suspension)
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to
the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
2. Measure the height of the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground, this
is height H1.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground, this
is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per the manufacturer’s
recommendations so that the height of the
front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/
2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between
H2 and H1 above normal ride height [H1]).
6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer
and weight distributing hitch to confirm
manufacturer’s recommendations have
been met.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with TOW/HAUL mode engaged.
Fifth-Wheel Hitch
The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform
with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of
the tow vehicle in the truck bed. It connects a
vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling
king pin.
Your truck may be equipped with a fifth wheel
hitch option. Refer to the separately provided
fifth wheel hitch safety, care, assembly, and
operating instructions.
Measurement
Example
Example 2500/3500
Height (mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
Measurement
Example
Example 2500/3500
Height (mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted
coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted
in the bed of a pickup truck. The coupling arm
connects to the hitch mounted over the rear
axle in the truck bed.
TRAILER HITCH TYPE AND MAXIMUM
T
RAILER WEIGHT
The following chart provides the maximum
trailer weight a given factory equipped trailer
hitch type can tow and should be used to assist
you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your
intended towing condition.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max. Tongue Weight
Class V - 2500 Models 20,000 lb (9,071 kg) / 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class V - 3500 Models 23,000 lb (10,432 kg) / 2,300 lb (1,043 kg)
Fifth Wheel - 2500 Models 25,000 lb (11,339 kg) / 3,750 lb (1,700 kg)
Fifth Wheel - 3500 Models 30,000 lb (13,607 kg) / 4,500 lb (2,041 kg)
Gooseneck - 2500 Models 20,000 lb (9,071 kg) / 3,000 lb (1,360 kg)
Gooseneck - 3500 Models 35,250 lb (15,989 kg) / 5,287 lb (2,398 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
(Continued)
(Continued)
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM
T
RAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
ramtruck.ca (Canada)
rambodybuilder.com
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. For the
maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle Ú page 453.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the
“Scheduled Servicing” Ú page 394. When
towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or
GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have a colli-
sion.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle Ú page 449.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer Ú page 449.
For the proper tire replacement procedures
Ú page 449. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
WARNING! (Continued)
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
Integrated Trailer Brake Module — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer
Brake Module (ITBM) for Electric and Electric
Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes.
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified
with electric trailer brakes and new electric over
hydraulic systems. Some previous EOH systems
may not be compatible with ITBM.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left
to activate power to the trailer's electric brakes
independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the
manual brake control lever is activated while
the brake is also applied, the greater of the two
inputs determines the power sent to the trailer
brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle’s stop lamps will
come on when braking normally with the vehicle
brake pedal. Only the trailer stop lamps will
come on when the manual brake control lever is
applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical
connection status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the
ignition is turned on, pushing the GAIN
adjustment button or sliding the manual brake
control lever will display the GAIN setting for
10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will not be displayed.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the
“Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light” will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake
control power output to the trailer brakes in
0.5 increments. The GAIN setting can be
increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased to
a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake
control for the specific towing condition and
should be changed as towing conditions
change. Changes to towing conditions include
trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and
weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE:
This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately
20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally
and properly adjusted. See your trailer
dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical
connections according to the trailer
manufacturer's instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is
plugged in, the trailer connected message
should appear in the instrument cluster
display (if the connection is not recognized
by the ITBM, braking functions will not be
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate
and the correct type of trailer must be
selected from the instrument cluster display
options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the
steering wheel until “TRAILER TOW”
appears on the screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel
to enter “TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the
Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP
or DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer
Brake Type appears on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer
on a dry, level surface at a speed of
20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze
the manual brake control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by
squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if
the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the
GAIN setting.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at
a point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing
a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be
attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting
of 10.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
* The suggested selection depends and may change depending on the customer preferences for braking performance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and road state may also
affect the selection.
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the
instrument cluster display. Display messages,
along with a single chime, will be displayed
when a malfunction is determined in the trailer
connection, trailer brake control, or on the
trailer Ú page 111.
NOTE:
An aftermarket controller may be available
for use with trailers with air or Elec-
tric-Over-Hydraulic trailer brake systems. To
determine the type of brakes on your trailer
and the availability of controllers, check with
your trailer manufacturer or dealer.
Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it
may cause damage to the electrical system
and electronic modules of the vehicle. See an
authorized dealer if an aftermarket module is
to be installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes
Electric Over Hydraulic
Trailer Brakes
Electric Over Hydraulic
Trailer Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lb *Above 10,000 lb *Under 10,000 lb *Above 10,000 lb
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible
with the ITBM system may result in reduced
or complete loss of trailer braking. There may
be a increase in stopping distance or trailer
instability which could result in personal
injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible
with the ITBM system may result in reduced
or complete loss of trailer braking. There may
be a increase in stopping distance or trailer
instability which could result in damage to
your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
Trailer Light Check
This feature will run the trailer lights through a
sequence to check the trailer light function. It is
available in the instrument cluster under the
Trailer Tow menu Ú page 114.
When activated the feature will enable all of the
exterior lights sequentially for up to five minutes
for time to walk around and verify functionality.
The following exterior lights will remain on for
the entirety of the sequence:
Park/Running Lamps
Side Marker Lamps (if equipped)
License Lamp
Signature Lamp (if equipped)
Low Beams
Fog Lamps (if equipped)
Daytime Running Lamps
During this time the following lights will
sequence, each activating for three seconds:
1. Brake and CHMSL (third brake light)
2. Left turn signal
3. Right turn signal
4. Reverse Lamps
5. High Beam
This light check sequence will continue for a
total of five minutes.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
The sequence will only activate if the following
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow
Package
Vehicle is in PARK
Vehicle is not in motion
Ignition in ACC or RUN
Remote start is inactive
Brakes are not applied
Left turn signal is not applied
Right turn signal not applied
Hazard switch is not applied
The sequence will cancel if any of the following
conditions occur:
Brakes are applied
Vehicle is shifted from PARK
Vehicle is no longer stationary
Left turn signal activated from stalk
Right turn signal is activated from stalk
Hazard switch is activated
Any button on the key fob is pushed
Ignition button is pushed
High Beam stalk position is changed
Sequence is canceled in the instrument
cluster
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing.
The transmission controls include a drive
strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing.
However, if frequent shifting does occur while in
DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower
gear range (using the Electronic Range Select
[ERS] shift control).
NOTE:
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower
gear range (using the ERS shift control) while
operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce potential for automatic transmission
overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when
driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear
range (using the Electronic Range Select [ERS]
shift control) on more severe grades.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Air Suspension System
To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from
the vehicle, the air suspension system can be
used Ú page 177.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The vehicle must remain in the engine running
position while attaching a trailer for proper
leveling of the air suspension system.
SNOWPLOW
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a
factory installed option. These packages
include components necessary to equip your
vehicle with a snowplow.
NOTE:
Before installation of a snowplow it is highly
recommended that the owner/installer obtain
and follow the recommendations contained
within the current Body Builders Guide. See an
authorized dealer, installer or snowplow manu-
facturer for this information. There are unique
electrical systems that must be connected to
properly ensure operator safety and prevent
overloading vehicle systems.
BEFORE PLOWING
Check the hydraulic system for leaks and
proper fluid level.
Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper
tightness.
Check the runners and cutting edge for
excessive wear. The cutting edge should be
¼ to ½ inches (6 cm to 1.2 cm) above ground
in snow plowing position.
Check that snowplow lighting is connected
and functioning properly.
SNOWPLOW PREP PACKAGE MODEL
A
VAILABILITY
For Information about snowplow applications
visit www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current
Body Builders Guide.
1. The maximum number of occupants in the
truck should not exceed two.
2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the
Rear GAWR should never be exceeded.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the
addition of options or passengers, etc.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the
snowplow system, all aftermarket accessories,
driver, passengers, options, and cargo, must
not exceed either the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). These weights are specified on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label on the
driver's side door opening.
NOTE:
Detach the snowplow when transporting
passengers.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could
adversely affect performance of the airbag
system in a collision. Do not expect that the
airbag will perform as described earlier in this
manual.
CAUTION!
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if
exterior lamps are not properly installed.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to
specifications at the factory without
consideration for the weight of the plow. Front
end toe-in should be checked and reset if
necessary at the beginning and end of the
snowplow season. This will help prevent uneven
tire wear.
The blade should be lowered whenever the
vehicle is parked.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and
snowplow equipment following the
recommendations provided by the specific
snowplow manufacturer.
OVER THE ROAD OPERATION WITH
S
NOWPLOW ATTACHED
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and
causes the engine to operate at higher than
normal temperatures. Therefore, when
transporting the plow, angle the blade
completely and position it as low as road or
surface conditions permit. Do not exceed
40 mph (64 km/h). The operator should always
maintain a safe stopping distance and allow
adequate passing clearance.
OPERATING TIPS
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph
(32 km/h) should be maximum operating
speed. The operator should be familiar with the
area and surface to be cleaned. Reduce speed
and use extreme caution when plowing
unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Snowplows should be maintained in
accordance with the plow manufacturer's
instructions.
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and
battery terminals clean and free of corrosion.
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and
drivetrain damage, the following precautions
should be observed.
Operate with transfer case in 4WD Low when
plowing small or congested areas where
speeds are not likely to exceed 15 mph
(24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in 4WD
High.
Vehicles with automatic transmissions
should use 4WD Low range when plowing
deep or heavy snow for extended periods of
time to avoid transmission overheating.
Do not shift the transmission unless the
engine has returned to idle and wheels have
stopped. Make a practice of stepping on the
brake pedal while shifting the transmission.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices
for additional details.
Vehicles equipped with air suspension must
be placed in Transport mode before tying
them down (from the body) on a trailer or
flatbed truck Ú page 177. If the vehicle
cannot be placed in Transport mode (for
example, engine will not run), tie-downs must
be fastened to the axles (not to the body).
Failure to follow these instructions may
cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss
of proper tie-down tension.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — TWO-WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive
models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are
OFF the ground. This may be accomplished
using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow
dolly, follow this procedure:
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension,
ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Automatic transmission in PARK
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
(Continued)
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place
automatic transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
5. Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key
fob.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed
for towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
OUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
NOTE:
Both the manual shift and electronic shift
transfer cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL
(N) for recreational towing. Automatic transmis-
sions must be shifted into PARK for recreational
towing. Refer to the following for the proper
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) shifting procedure
for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground
will cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do not disconnect the driveshaft because
fluid may leak from the transmission,
causing damage to internal parts.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage. Tow
with all four wheels either ON the ground, or
OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing
this vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
Before recreational towing, the transfer
case must be in NEUTRAL. To be certain the
transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL, perform
the procedure outlined under “Shifting Into
NEUTRAL”. Internal transmission damage
will result, if the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL during towing.
The transmission must be placed in PARK
for recreational towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft
because fluid will leak from the transfer
case, causing damage to internal parts.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into (N) NEUTRAL
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on
level ground, with the engine running.
Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension,
ensure the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift the transfer case into N (Neutral):
With manual shift transfer case, shift the
transfer case lever into N (Neutral).
With electronic shift transfer case, push
and hold the transfer case N (Neutral)
button. Some models have a small,
recessed “N” button (at the center of the
transfer case switches) that must be
pushed using a ballpoint pen or similar
object. Other models have a rectangular
N (Neutral) switch, below the rotary
transfer case control knob. The N
(Neutral) indicator light will blink while
the shift is in progress. The light will stop
blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to N
(Neutral) is complete. After the shift is
completed and the N (Neutral) light stays
on, release the N (Neutral) button.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with automatic
transmission in DRIVE.
9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly
apply the parking brake. Turn off the engine.
For vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, push
and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button
until the engine shuts off.
10. Shift the transmission into PARK. On
8-speed transmissions the shifter will
automatically select PARK when the engine
is turned off.
11. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode, then
cycle the ignition to the RUN mode and back
to the OFF mode. Remove the key fob from
the ignition.
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
13. Release the parking brake.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both
the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in
NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to
prevent damage to internal parts.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
NOTE:
With electronic shift transfer case:
Steps 2 through 3 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the N (Neutral)
button, and must continue to be met until the
shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the
N (Neutral) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the N (Neutral) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements
are met or until the N (Neutral) button is
released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not
been met.
If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension,
the engine should be started and left running
for a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the
doors closed) at least once every 24 hours.
This process allows the air suspension to
adjust the vehicle’s ride height to compen-
sate for temperature effects.
Shifting Out Of (N) NEUTRAL
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop,
leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
With manual shift transfer case, shift the
transfer case lever to the desired posi-
tion.
With electronic shift transfer case with
rotary selector switch, push and hold the
transfer case N (Neutral) button until the
N (Neutral) indicator light turns off. After
the N (Neutral) indicator light turns off,
release the N (Neutral) button. After the
N (Neutral) button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position indi-
cated by the selector switch.
With electronic shift transfer case with
push-button selector switch, push and
hold the switch for the desired transfer
case position, until the N (Neutral) indi-
cator light turns off and the desired posi-
tion indicator light turns on.
NOTE:
When shifting out of transfer case N (Neutral),
turning the engine off is not required, but may
be helpful to avoid gear clash. With the 8-speed
automatic transmission, the engine must
remain running, since turning the engine off will
shift the transmission to PARK (and the trans-
mission must be in NEUTRAL for the transfer
case to shift out of NEUTRAL).
5. Turn the engine off. Shift automatic
transmission into PARK. On 8-speed
transmissions the shifter will automatically
select PARK when the engine is turned off.
6. Release the brake pedal.
7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
8. Start the engine.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
10. Release the parking brake.
11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the
brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
NOTE:
With electronic shift transfer case:
Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the button to shift out of
N (Neutral), and must continue to be met
until the shift has been completed. If any of
these requirements are not met before
pushing the button or are no longer met
during the shift, the N (Neutral) indicator light
will flash continuously until all requirements
are met or until the button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not
been met.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or
other slippery surfaces may cause the driving
wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This
phenomenon occurs when there is a difference
in the surface traction under the rear (driving)
wheels.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through shallow standing water, consider the
following Cautions and Warnings before doing
so.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause
sudden pulling of the rear wheels. You could
lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path
where water is flowing and/or rising (as in
storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away
the road or path's surface and cause your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious
or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not
exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
(Continued)
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Care should be taken when attempting to climb
steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or
slope. If natural obstacles force you to travel
diagonally up or down a hill, choose a mild angle
and keep as little side tilt as possible. Keep the
vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down
using REVERSE gear. Never back down in
NEUTRAL or diagonally across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft
terrain, shift to low gear and drive steadily.
Apply the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning
the wheels.
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of
driving.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which
increases stopping distances. Therefore,
after driving through standing water, drive
slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal
several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing
water before driving through it. Never drive
through standing water that is deeper than
the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the
vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when
driving through standing water. This will
minimize wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine
can cause it to lock up and stall out, and
cause serious internal damage to the
engine. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
4
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
for damage. That way you can get any problems
taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness,
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-
nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten
them, if required, and torque to the values
specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand,
water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after
driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
check the wheels for impacted material.
Impacted material can cause a wheel imbal-
ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct
the situation.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
braking. You might not have full braking
power when you need it to prevent a collision.
If you have been operating your vehicle in
dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and
cleaned as necessary.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
257
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display system or
your Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display
system, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted
source. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your
consent Ú page 134.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to
access and change the Customer
Programmable Features. Many features can
vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
MULTIMEDIA 259
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display Touchscreen
And Faceplate Buttons
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, the
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display,
and Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to display
the menu setting screen. In this mode, the
Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
All settings should be changed with the igni-
tion in the ON/RUN position.
When making a selection, only press one button
at a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting “option” until a check mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Once the setting is complete,
press the X button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or
Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 MULTIMEDIA
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system
will display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of
the touchscreen. The available settings are:
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and
Instrument Cluster Display. The available languages are English,
Français, and Español.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the
system set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system
automatically adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will
allow the user to adjust the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
MULTIMEDIA 261
Keyboard
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable
keyboards are “ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY
Keyboard”.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically
after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Fuel Saver Display This setting will enable fuel saver mode in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-ups
This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-ups in the Instrument
Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 MULTIMEDIA
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will
display in the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L),
“Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Capacity”
(Gal [US], Gal [UK], or L) units of measurement independently.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition
system. The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from
the system. The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description
from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the command list on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the command list. The “With Help” setting will
show the command list and provide a brief description of what the
command does. The “Never” setting will turn the command list off.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
MULTIMEDIA 263
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The
system will control the time via the GPS location.
Set Time And Format/Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With
GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will
set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to
a 24-hour format.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the
minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Setting Name Description
Surround View Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the surround view camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings.
These options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To
access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the rear backup camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision
Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW
system signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is
detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the
object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The
“Off” setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting
will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The
“Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and
apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
MULTIMEDIA 265
LaneSense Warning
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will
provide lane departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”,
“Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback
during a lane departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and
“High”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The
available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is
detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot
Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the
outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights
on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Trailer Length For Blind Spot Alert
This setting will auto detect the length of an attached trailer. The “Auto”
setting will have the system automatically set the trailer length. The
“Max” setting will always set the length to the maximum 39.5 ft (12 m).
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the rear backup camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
Setting Name Description
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
Power Side Steps
This setting will raise and lower or stow the Power Side Steps. The
available options are “Automatic” to raise and lower the Power Side Steps
and “Stow” to deactivate the Power Side Steps.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position
when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. The available settings
are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the rain sensing auto wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
MULTIMEDIA 267
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchased.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available
settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the
headlights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings
are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Steering Directed Lights
This setting will turn the headlights with the steering wheel. The available
options are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when
the vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from
the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the
key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button
is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the
Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from
the key fob.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
MULTIMEDIA 269
Power Side Steps
When the Power Side Steps button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to the lowering of the power side steps.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key
fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only
unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All
Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock
button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless
Enter-N-Go) on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that
have been linked to the key fob.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Power Side Steps
This setting will raise and lower or stow the Power Side Steps. The
available options are “Automatic” to raise and lower the Power Side Steps
and “Stow” to deactivate the Power Side Steps.
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems
When Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort
systems when remote start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These
settings will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats
(if equipped) or heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the
comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will
activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Easy Exit Seats
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the
engine is shut off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay/Engine Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine
is turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate.
The available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
MULTIMEDIA 271
Suspension/Air Suspension
When the Suspension/Air Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain
on after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount
of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
Auto Entry/Exit
This setting will automatically lower the vehicle ride height for easier
entry and exit of the vehicle.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Sound Horn With Lower
This setting will sound the horn when the Lower button is pressed on the
key fob.
Flash Lights With Lower
This setting will flash the lights when the Lower button is pressed on the
key fob.
Display Suspension Messages
This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display. The “All” setting will display all available messages. The
“Warnings Only” setting will only display warning messages.
Aero Mode
This setting will automatically adjust the vehicle ride height depending on
the vehicle speed.
Tire Jack Mode
This setting will disable the air suspension system to assist in changing a
spare tire.
Transport Mode This setting will disable the air suspension system for flat towing.
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 MULTIMEDIA
AUX Switches — If Equipped
When the AUX Switches button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the four vehicle AUX switches.
Wheel Alignment Mode
This setting must be activated before performing a wheel alignment.
Refer to an authorized dealer for further information.
Four Corner Air Suspension Modes
There are three air suspension modes designed to protect the system in
unique situations. Tire Jack Mode is selected to assist in changing a
spare tire. Transport Mode is selected to assist when the vehicle is being
flat bed towed. Wheel Alignment Mode is selected before performing a
wheel alignment. Refer to an authorized dealer for information.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
AUX 1-4
This setting will adjust the type and power source for the four vehicle AUX
switches. There are two types: “Latching” and “Momentary”. The power
source for the AUX switches can either be set to run off the “Battery” or
from the “Ignition”. In addition to setting the type and power source, you
can set if the vehicle will recall the previous state at which the AUX
switches were set. The Recalled Last State setting can be set to “On” or
“Off”. Last state conditions are met only if the type is set to Latching and
the power source is set to Ignition.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
MULTIMEDIA 273
Trailer Brake/Trailer
When the Trailer Brake/Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change
the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
Setting Name Description
Trailer Select
Select from “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3”, or “Trailer 4”. These trailer
designations can be used to save different trailer settings.
Trailer Brake Type
This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available
options are “Light Electric”, “Heavy Electric”, “Light
Electric-Over-Hydraulic”, and “Heavy Electric-Over-Hydraulic”.
Trailer Name
This setting will personalize the trailer name depending on the type of
trailer you are hauling. Select the trailer name from the following list:
trailer, boat, car, cargo, dump, equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse,
livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility, and 5th wheel.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/
back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set
audio location.
Equalizer
This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the
audio.
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external
audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher
setting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The
available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through
the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play
This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected
device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the instrument
cluster display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb” settings menu. The settings
are “Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default),
and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
MULTIMEDIA 275
SiriusXM® Setup
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can
be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
Reset/Restore Settings To Default
When the Reset/Restore Settings To Default button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect
system back to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune
to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel
list will display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM®
Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
Reset App Drawer This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all
personal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and
presets.
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
1 — Radio Button
2 — Media Button
3 — Phone Button
4 — Volume & On/Off Button
5 — Mute Button
6 — Compass Button
7 — Settings Button
8 — More Button
9 — Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob
10 — Screen Off Button
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
MULTIMEDIA 277
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media
Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources
Ú page 279.
Phone
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
phone system Ú page 290.
Settings Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 258.
Push the Enter/Browse button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll
through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the Mute button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio
system off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off
button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the Volume & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds
to reset the radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen
from freezing or being stuck.
Compass Press the Compass button to access the vehicle’s compass.
More Press the More button to access additional options.
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using
the system. It contains instructions on how to
use the system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the
touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety
precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury
or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. See an authorized dealer for
repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use
the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
etc.), which could scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly
on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber
lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the
touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions Ú page 490.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
MULTIMEDIA 279
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the
three and nine o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push button in the center and controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for
the next available station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next
available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go
forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
goes to the beginning of the current track, or the
beginning of the previous track if it is within
eight seconds after the current track begins to
play. Double pressing the bottom button switch
will skip to the previous track if it is after eight
seconds into the current track.
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — All Preset Radio Stations
3 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
4 — Seek Down
5 — Tune
6 — Station Info
7 — Seek Up
8 — Audio Settings
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 MULTIMEDIA
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to
enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected
by pressing the corresponding buttons in Radio
Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the Volume & On/Off control knob to turn
on and off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction,
without stopping. Turning the Volume & On/Off
control knob clockwise increases the volume,
and counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Mute Button
Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the
system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
by pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pushing the left steering
wheel audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down
button to tune the radio to the next available
station or channel. During a Seek Up/Down
function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up
or Seek Down button to advance the
radio through the available stations or channels
at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next
available station or channel when the button on
the touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
Info — If Equipped
Press the Info button to display information
related to the currently playing song and radio
station.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of
the radio screen to directly tune to a desired
radio station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired
station. Once a number has been entered, any
numbers that are no longer possible (stations
that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
MULTIMEDIA 281
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been
entered, press “GO”. The Direct Tune screen will
close, and the system will automatically tune to
that station.
Radio Voice Commands
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel
and wait for the beep to say a command. See
some examples below.
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “Help”. The
system provides you with a list of commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and
bill at then-current rates until you call
SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See
SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete
terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change.
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
USA and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is
also available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite
service area and in AK. © 2020 SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground
parking garages or tunnels.
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 MULTIMEDIA
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US residents visit siriusxm.com/
getallaccess or call: 1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit https://
www.siriusxm.ca/ or call: 1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
top of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
in the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are
displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions
are available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio
1 — Browse
2 — Radio Bands
3 — Direct Tune
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
MULTIMEDIA 283
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched,
content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The play/pause, rewind/forward and live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay
time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause
the playing of live or rewound content at any time. Play
can be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button again
on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind
the content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind
button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds
rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the content
at the point at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen
forwards the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding
of the content can only be done when the content is
previously rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for
live content. A continuous press of the Forward button on
the touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio
begins playing the content at the point at which the press
is release.
Live Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the
playing of live content.
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 MULTIMEDIA
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen
to activate the favorites menu, which will time
out within 20 seconds in absence of user
interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the X button.
The favorites feature enables you to set a
favorite artist or song that is currently playing.
The radio then uses this information to alert you
when either the favorite artist or song is being
played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®
Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist
button on the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite song, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Song
button on the touchscreen.
Browse In SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen.
When pressing the All button, the following
categories become available:
Channel List Press the Channel List to display
all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by oper-
ating the Tune/Scroll knob.
Genre List Press the Genre button on the
touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You
can select any desired Genre by pressing the
Genre List. The radio tunes to a channel with
the content in the selected Genre.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse
screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit
the Favorites list and to configure the Alert
Settings, along with providing a list of Channels
currently airing any of the items in the Favorites
list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
Up and Down arrows located at the right side of
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by
operating the Tune/Scroll knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or
press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu
allows you to choose from a visual alert or
audible and visual alert when one of your
favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
MULTIMEDIA 285
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left
of the Browse screen. This feature provides you
with the ability to select teams, edit the
selection, and set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the
radio to that channel.
Add/Delete — If Equipped
Press the Add/Delete button on the
touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list.
Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all
teams within the league will appear, then you
can select a team by pressing the
corresponding box. A check mark appears for all
teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or
press the Trash Can icon next to the selection to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the 12 presets. This
feature occurs the first time the preset is
selected during that current song.
Setting Presets
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save
as a preset, press and hold the numbered
button on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio Modes.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
A set of four presets will appear on the screen.
Press the All button to view all saved presets. To
remove a saved preset, a new preset must be
saved over the old one.
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — AUX Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between the front speakers or
fade the audio between the rear and front speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or
press and drag the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease each of the
equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of
each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. This alters the
automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases
automatically as speed increases to compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a movie theatre
or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
MULTIMEDIA 287
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate.
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or
Source Select button on the touchscreen and
the desired mode button on the touchscreen.
USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the Media
sources available. When available, you can
select the Browse button on the touchscreen to
be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media
Mode is entered by pushing the Media button
located on the faceplate.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This alters the AUX input audio
volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed above the
adjustment bar.
Auto Play — If Equipped
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is connected to one of
the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press “Off” to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or passenger
door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay selected time has expired.
Audio Setting Description
1 — Seek Down
2 — Seek Up
3 — Browse
4 — Source
5 — Pause/Play
6 — Info
7 — More Options
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 MULTIMEDIA
Types of Media Modes
USB Mode
Overview
USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
device into the USB port, or by pushing the
MEDIA button on the faceplate and then
selecting the USB button.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you
insert a USB device with the ignition ON/RUN,
the unit will switch to USB Mode and begin to
play. The display will show the track number and
index time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track 1.
Bluetooth® Mode
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth®
Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth®
device, containing music, to the Uconnect
system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired to the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect system.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the
Media button located on the faceplate. Once in
Media Mode, press the Source button on the
touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button
Ú page 290.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the
Bluetooth® button on the left side of the
touchscreen or under the Source Select/Select
Source button (if equipped).
AUX Mode
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio
jack into the AUX port or pushing the Media
button on the faceplate and then selecting the
Source button and then the AUX button.
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and
the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode
and begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
Volume button, Volume/Mute rotary knob, or
the On/Off rotary knob, or with the volume of
the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device. Press and release the Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or to return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the
USB device is within the first three seconds of
the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the
Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of
the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device
is within the first second of the current
selection.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
MULTIMEDIA 289
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window. In
USB Mode, the left side of the browse window
displays a list of ways you can browse through
the contents of the USB device. If supported by
the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist,
Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired
button on the touchscreen on the left side of the
screen. The center of the browse window shows
items and its sub-functions, which can be
scrolled through by pressing the Up and Down
buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob can
also be used to scroll.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate the
Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll
through and select a desired track on the device.
Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you
wish to cancel the Browse function.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
the touchscreen to select the desired audio
source: Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality.
The Repeat button on the touchscreen is
highlighted when active. The Radio will continue
to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button
again to enter Repeat All. The radio will continue
to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as long
as the repeat function is active. To cancel
Repeat, press the Repeat button a third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature
off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Audio button Ú page 279.
Info
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Info
button on the touchscreen to display the
current track information. Press the Info or X
button on the touchscreen a second time to
cancel this feature.
Tracks
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Tracks
button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up
with the Song List. The song currently playing is
indicated by an arrow and lines above and
below the song title. When in the Tracks List
screen you can rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to
highlight a track (indicated by the line above
and below the track name) and then push the
Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
supports this feature, press the Tracks button
on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the
Song List. The currently playing song is
indicated by a red arrow and lines above and
below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 MULTIMEDIA
Media Voice Commands
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth®, and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice
operation is only available for connected USB
and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering
wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre
information is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
It allows you to dial a phone number with your
mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John
Smith Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search
for John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phone-
books displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so
they are easily accessible on the Main Phone
screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent
Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
easy access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using
the Uconnect Phone.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
MULTIMEDIA 291
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
The Phone feature is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different
electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you
phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and
has been paired to the Uconnect system. Up to
10 mobile phones or audio devices are allowed
to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can
be used with the system at a time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is
used to get into the Phone Mode and make
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls,
view phonebook, etc. When you push the button
you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal to
give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you
are already in a call or want to make another
call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used
to access the Voice Commands for the
Uconnect Voice Command features if your
vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
structure. Voice commands are required after
most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
general methods for how Voice Command
works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command
and then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must
wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
prompt or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound
commands can be used. For example,
instead of saying “Call” and then “John
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John
Smith mobile.”
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 MULTIMEDIA
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the
voice command is given. You can also break
the commands into parts and say each part
of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound
command form voice command “Search for
John Smith,” or you can break the compound
command form into two voice commands:
“Search Contacts” and when asked, “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect
Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word
utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.”
The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in
the same phrase or sentence, the system
identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do
you want to call?” in the case where a phone
call was requested but the specific name was
not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the
user, it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Command
button on the steering wheel.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone button (if active) on your
steering wheel and say a command or say
“Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a push of
the VR button or the Phone button.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone
button on your steering wheel when the system
is listening for a command and be returned to
the main or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
To begin using your Uconnect
Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth®-
enabled mobile phone. Mobile
phone pairing is the process of establishing a
wireless connection between a cellular phone
and the Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need
to reference your mobile phone’s manual.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
MULTIMEDIA 293
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently
connected with the system, a pop-up will
appear asking if you would like to pair a
mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters Phone Mode and no other
device(s) have previously been paired. If
the system has a phone previously
paired, even if no phone is currently
connected with the system, this pop-up
will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the
PIN from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button or the
Add Device button.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect.
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 MULTIMEDIA
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will
reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The most recent phone
paired will have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
system to access your “messages” and
“contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the
Uconnect system may interfere with the
Bluetooth® connection. If this happens, simply
repeat the pairing process. However, first make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or audio device follow these
steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Disconnecting or Deleting A Phone Or Audio
Device
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or
Settings button.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
1 — Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone
2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
MULTIMEDIA 295
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name for a different
phone or audio device than the currently
connected device or press the preferred
Connected Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources
screen, press the Settings button located
to the right of the device name for a
different phone or audio device than the
currently connected device or press the
preferred “Connected Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone
has the ability to download contact names and
number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. Your mobile phone may receive a
pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect
system to access your messages and contacts.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website,
UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook, follow the procedure in the
“Voice Command” in this section.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
four numbers per contact will be downloaded
and updated every time a phone is
connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of
entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the previ-
ously downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorites — If Equipped
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add Favorite
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen,
and then select the appropriate number.
Press the Down Arrow icon button or the
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 MULTIMEDIA
Settings Gear icon button next to the
selected number to display the option’s
pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to
Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
To Remove A Favorite — If Equipped
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”
from the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon button or
the Settings Gear icon button next to the
contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for
that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the
Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
available and supported by Bluetooth® on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Listed below are the phone options with
Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
following call features:
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Ignore
4 — Transfer
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
MULTIMEDIA 297
Key Pad Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and
press “Dial/Call”.
Recent Calls — If Equipped
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and perform the above
operation. For example, say “Show my incoming
calls”.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system. Push the Phone button on the
steering wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold
and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is
in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer
an incoming call or ignore it.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while Do Not
Disturb is active.
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 MULTIMEDIA
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On
Hold button on the Phone main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
dial a number from the keypad (if supported by
your mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or
from the phonebooks.
Toggling Between Calls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Swap Calls button on the
phone main screen. Only one call can be placed
on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button
on the Phone main screen to combine all calls
into a conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
Redial
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
MULTIMEDIA 299
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-
mended to press the Transfer button on the
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the
Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is
speaking during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names
in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is
in motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
be supported.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for
mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep
to say a command. See some examples below:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone
number)
“Call back” (call previously answered
incoming phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice
Command, push the Phone button and say
“Call”, then pronounce the name exactly as it
appears in your phonebook. When a contact
has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce incoming text
messages. Push the VR button or Phone
button and say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an
incoming text message. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
es and follow the system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
MULTIMEDIA 301
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose
the message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have
the full implementation of the Message Access
Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature.
For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on
your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s®
“User Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not
compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is
equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone®
connected to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri
lets you use your voice to send text messages,
select media, place phone calls and much
more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back
to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep,
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone
is recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON
mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either
the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior
to using the system
Ú
page 490.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
repositioning the mobile phone within the
vehicle. This condition is not harmful to the
radio. If your radio performance does not
satisfactorily improve from repositioning the
mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile
phone operation when not using the Uconnect
system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 MULTIMEDIA
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio Ú page 490.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road
Pages which display vehicle information related
to the drivetrain, transfer case, and coolant/oil
gauges.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps
button on the touchscreen, and then select
Off-Road Pages.
Main Menu
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along
the bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in
each of the four selectable page options. It
provides information for the following items:
1. Transfer Case Status
2. Latitude/Longitude
3. Altitude of the vehicle
4. Status of Hill Descent Control and Speed in
MPH (km/h)
Status Bar 2WD/4WD
1 — Uconnect Apps Button
2 — Off-Road Pages App
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Latitude/Longitude
3 — Altitude
4 — Hill Descent Control Status
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
MULTIMEDIA 303
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays
information concerning the vehicle’s transfer
case and steering angle.
The following information is displayed:
1. Status of Transfer Case
2. Status of Front Axles — If Equipped
3. Status of the Rear Axles
4. Steering angle in degrees
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD
ACCESSORY GAUGE
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current
status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil
Temperature, Oil Pressure, Transmission
Temperature, and Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Front Axle Locker Status
2 — Rear Axle Locker Status
3 — Steering Angle
4 — Transfer Case Status
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure
4 — Transmission Temperature
5 — Battery Voltage
5
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 MULTIMEDIA
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s
current pitch (angle up and down) and roll
(angle side to side) in degrees.The Pitch & Roll
gauge provide a visualization of the current
vehicle angle.
NOTE:
Pitch & Roll values may show upon startup. These
numbers will update once the vehicle is driven.
Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD
FORWARD FACING CAMERA
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Forward
Facing Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the front view of your
vehicle. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen along with a caution note “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the
screen.
To activate, press the Forward Facing Camera
button on the touchscreen.
Forward Facing Camera Button
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
305
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability
and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during
braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are
beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice,
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the
stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
The ABS is designed to function with the
Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires.
Modification may result in degraded ABS
performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SAFETY
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning
and that service is required. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the
ABS Warning Light does not come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control
System (TCS). These systems work together to
enhance both vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer
Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control
(HDC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and
amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results
in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the Brake
System Warning Light does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS
cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driv-
ing on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
gerous manner, which could jeopardize the
user's safety or the safety of others.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SAFETY 307
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by
limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is
done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to
avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear
axle from entering Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM) determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and
vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM
can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving
the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). For a complete explanation
of the available ESC modes, see Ú page 307.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability
of the vehicle under various driving conditions.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) corrects for
oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s)
to counteract the above conditions. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to
flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other vehi-
cles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SAFETY
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes,
the push and release of the button will toggle
the ESC modes. Multiple attempts may be
required to return to "ESC On" mode.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SAFETY 309
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only and should not be used on any
public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC
features are turned off. To enter the “Full Off”
mode, push and hold the ESC OFF button for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with
the engine running. After five seconds, a chime
will sound, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message will
display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to
“Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a
predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed
slows below the predetermined speed the
system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive
modes (if equipped).
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
(located in the instrument cluster) starts to
flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the
ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC, except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section, has
been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will
not engage to assist in maintaining stability.
ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent collisions.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 SAFETY
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
that the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come
on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON
position, the ESC system will be on even if it
was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving
while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed
while descending hills during various driving
situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by
actively controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable HDC:
Driveline is in 4WD Low.
Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate
automatically if driven down a grade of
sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC is
selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following
summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but
will not activate.
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
SAFETY 311
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the
gear chosen by the transmission. When actively
controlling HDC the transmission will shift
appropriately for the driver-selected set speed
and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an
uphill grade.
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
nate and remain on solid when HDC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal oper-
ating condition for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the
driver pushes the HDC switch but enable
conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when HDC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
when HDC deactivates due to overheated
brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will
activate again once the brakes have cooled
sufficiently.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 SAFETY
a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For
vehicles equipped with a manual transmis-
sion, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain
active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
display, see Ú page 111.
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see
Ú page 258.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driving involve-
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
be attentive to distance to other vehicles,
people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of
the vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehi-
cle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If
so, there may not be enough brake pres-
sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer
on a hill when the brake pedal is released.
In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually acti-
vate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake
pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
SAFETY 313
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the Traction Control System (TCS)
may apply brake pressure to the spinning
wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature
of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD),
functions similarly to a limited slip differential
and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more
engine power to be applied to the wheel that is
not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if
TCS and Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in
reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions Ú page 236.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
E
QUIPPED
BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the
taillights, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that
enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/
side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning
Light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE and enters standby mode when the
vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rearview mirror and extends approximately
10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of
the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 SAFETY
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of
the side mirror warning indicator lamps when
a motorcycle or any small object remains at
the side of the vehicle for extended periods of
time (more than a couple of seconds).
The vehicle’s taillights, where the radar sensors
are located, must remain free of snow, ice, and
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM
system can function properly. Do not block the
taillights with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.).
The system may also detect blockage if the
vehicle is operated in areas with extremely low
radar returns such as a desert or parallel to a
large elevation drop. If blockage is detected, a
“Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe Rear
Corners” message will display in the cluster, both
mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP
alerts will not occur. This is normal operation. The
system will automatically recover and resume
function when the condition clears.
Radar Sensor Locations
If the system detects degraded performance
due to contamination or foreign objects, a
message will warn you of a blocked sensor and
the warning indicators in the side view mirrors
will be on. The warning indicators will remain
illuminated until blockage clearing conditions
are met. First clear the taillights around the
sensors of the blockage. After removing the
blockage, cycle the ignition from ON to OFF and
then back ON.
If the blockage message is still present after
cycling the ignition and driving in traffic, check
again for a blockage.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
Warning Light located in the outside mirrors in
addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
and reducing the radio volume Ú page 317.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is
necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
SAFETY 315
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than
15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 SAFETY
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car
washes etc. However, occasionally the system
may alert on such objects. This is normal
operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes Ú page 490.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing
out of parking spaces where their vision of
oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space
until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The
RCP system will then have a clear view of the
cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is
detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE,
the driver is alerted using both the visual and
audible alarms, including reducing the radio
volume.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
SAFETY 317
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If
the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of
operation that are available in the Uconnect
system.
For further information, see Ú page 258.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM
or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started the previously stored
mode will be recalled and used.
Trailer Merge Assist
NOTE:
When Trailer Merge Assist is activated, Rear
Cross Path is disabled.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a
backup aid system. It is intended to be used
to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in
a parking lot situation. Drivers must be care-
ful when backing up, even when using RCP.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, and blind spots before backing up. Fail-
ure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 SAFETY
NOTE:
When a trailer with an electric brake is
connected to the vehicle, the instrument cluster
display will provide a menu to allow a selection
of the trailer type. There will be two options
provided: Conventional and Goose/Fifth Wheel.
Goose/Fifth Wheel Trailer is incompatible and
when selected, the BSM system will disable
until the trailer is disconnected. If the wrong
option is selected, the system can be reset by
either disconnecting and reconnecting the
trailer harness connector or disabling then
re-enabling the Blind Spot Monitoring system in
the customer settings in the Uconnect system.
This will prompt the trailer selection menu again
to allow for the correct selection.
Trailer Merge Assist is a function of the Blind
Spot Monitoring (BSM) system that extends the
blind spot zone to work while pulling a trailer.
Trailer Merge Assist consists of three sub
functions:
Automatic Trailer Detection
Trailer Length Detection
Trailer Merge Warning
Blind Spot Zones With Trailer Merge Assist
Automatic Trailer Detection
There are two modes of operation for the
detection of the trailer length:
Automatic Mode — When “Auto Mode” is
selected, the system will use the blind spot
sensors to automatically determine the pres-
ence and length of a trailer. The presence of
a trailer will be detected using the blind spot
radar within 90 seconds of forward move-
ment of the vehicle. The vehicle must be
moving above 6 mph (10 km/h) to activate
the feature. Once the trailer has been
detected, the system will default to the
maximum blind spot zone until the length has
been verified. You will see “Auto” in the
instrument panel cluster .
Maximum Mode — When “Max Mode” is
selected, the system will default to the
maximum blind spot zone regardless of what
size trailer is attached .
NOTE:
Selected setting is stored when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. To change this
setting, it must be selected through the
Uconnect Settings Ú page 258.
Trailer Length Detection
Once the trailer presence has been established,
the trailer length will be established (by making
a 90 degree turn) and then the trailer length
category (e.g. 10-20 ft (3 m to 6 m)) will be
displayed. This can take up to 30 seconds after
completing the turn.
NOTE:
During the same ignition cycle, if the vehicle is
at a standstill for a minimum of 90 seconds, a
new “trailer detection request” is enabled by
the system once the vehicle resumes motion.
1 — Vehicle
2 — Trailer
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
SAFETY 319
Maximum length supported by the Trailer Merge
Assist feature is 39.5 ft (12 m). Trailer length is
considered the forward most portion of the
trailer hitch to the rearward most portion of the
body, bumper, or ramp of the trailer.
Maximum width supported by the Trailer Merge
Assist feature is 8.5 ft (2.59 m). Trailer width is
measured at the widest portion of the trailer
and may include wheels, tires, finders, or rails.
NOTE:
Fifth wheel or gooseneck trailers are not
supported by Trailer Merge Assist.
Trailer Length Detection
Trailer length will be identified and placed into
one of the following categories:
Trailer length up to 10 ft (3 m) — Blind spot
zone will be adjusted to 10 ft (3 m) .
Trailer length between 10 ft to 20 ft (3 m to
6 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to
20 ft (6 m) .
Trailer length between 20 ft to 30 ft (6 m to
9 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to
30 ft (9 m) .
Trailer length between 30 ft and 39.5 ft (9 m
to 12 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to
Max distance .
NOTE:
Trailer length is determined within +/- 3 ft (1 m)
of actual length. Trailers that are the same size
as the category limit, 10/20/30 ft (3/6/9 m),
could be subject to being placed in the category
above or below the correct one.
Trailer Merge Warning
Trailer Merge Warning is the extension of the
blind spot function to cover the length of the
trailer, plus a safety margin, to warn the driver
when there is a vehicle in the adjacent lane. The
driver is alerted by the illumination of the BSM
Warning Light located in the outside mirror on
the side the other vehicle is detected on. In
addition, an audible (chime) alert will be heard
and radio volume reduced Ú page 317.
NOTE:
The Trailer Merge Alert system DOES NOT
alert the driver about rapidly approaching
vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of
the side mirror warning indicator lamps when
a motorcycle or any small object remains at
the side of the vehicle for extended periods of
time (more than a couple of seconds).
Crowded areas such as parking lots, neigh-
borhoods, etc. May lead to an increased
amount of false alerts. This is normal opera-
tion.
1 — Trailer Length
2 — Trailer Hitch
3 — Trailer Width
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SAFETY
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
haptic warning in the form of a brake jerk, to
warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings are intended to
provide the driver with enough time to react,
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver
will be provided with audible and visual warn-
ings as well as a possible haptic warning in the
form of a brake jerk.
If the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
ings by braking and the system determines that
the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake
force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required. When towing
a trailer, the system will also respond to activate
the trailer brakes (if equipped).
If an FCW with Mitigation event begins at a
speed below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system
may provide the maximum braking possible to
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the
Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated
Ú page 490.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
3 mph (5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
SAFETY 321
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To
prevent such misuse of the system, after four
Active Braking events within a key cycle, the
Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti-
vated until the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such
as overhead objects, ground reflections,
objects not in the path of the vehicle,
stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the
same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the
unavailable screens.
During an FCW event when towing a trailer,
your Electronic Brake system will respond by
activating the trailer brakes (if equipped).
Turning FCW On or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect
display in the control settings. For further
information, see Ú page 258.
To turn the FCW system on, press the forward
collision button once.
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward
collision button once.
NOTE:
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system
to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front.
When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the
system from warning the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front. If the FCW
is set to “off”, “FCW OFF" will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”,
this prevents the system from providing
limited active braking, or additional brake
support if the driver is not braking adequately
in the event of a potential frontal collision.
When FCW status is set to “Warning and
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full
On” from one ignition cycle to the next. If the
system is turned off, it will reset to “Full On”
when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW sensitivity and Active Braking status
are programmable through the Uconnect
system. For further information, see
Ú page 258.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 SAFETY
Far
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Far” setting and the system status is
“Warning and Braking”, this allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible
more distant collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings.
More cautious drivers that do not mind
frequent warnings may prefer this
setting.
Medium
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Medium” setting and the system status
is “Warning and Braking”, this allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings.
Near
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Near” setting and the system status is
“Warning and Braking”, this allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible
closer collision with the vehicle in front
using audible/visual warnings.
This setting provides less reaction time
than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that
want to avoid frequent warnings may
prefer this setting.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its
full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a graphic showing the pres-
sure values of each tire with the low tire pres-
sure values in a different color, or the Uconnect
radio will display a TPMS message. When this
occurs you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
SAFETY 323
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. The tire pressure will also increase
as the vehicle is driven — this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
See Ú page 449 on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above the recommended cold placard
pressure. Once the low TPMS Warning Light
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure
to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The
system will automatically update and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately
23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS
Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi
(186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still
be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 SAFETY
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the Tire
Fill Alert feature the TPMS should not be used
as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your
tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
Example: Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following
components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster when tire pressure
is low in one or more of the four active
road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a graphic showing the pressure
values of each tire with the low tire pressure
values in a different color. An "Inflate to XX"
message will also be displayed.
Example: Low Tire Pressure Display
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
SAFETY 325
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message.
Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the instrument
cluster will return to its original color, and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System Warning Light off.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
no longer flash, and the "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message will no longer display, and a
pressure value will display in place of the
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of
the following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices
or driving next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Installing aftermarket window tinting that
contains materials that may block radio wave
signals.
Accumulation of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
A system fault may occur due to an incorrect
TPMS sensor location condition. When a system
fault occurs due to an incorrect TPMS sensor
location, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a “Tire Pressure Temporarily
Unavailable” message in place of the tire
pressure display screen. If the ignition switch is
cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will no longer flash and the
tire pressure display screen will be displayed
showing the tire pressure values in the correct
locations.
Vehicles With Non-Matching Full Size Spare Or
Compact Spare
The non-matching full size spare or compact
spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the non-matching full size spare
or compact spare tire.
If you install the non-matching full size spare
or compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition switch
cycle, the TPMS Warning Light and a “LOW
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 SAFETY
TIRE” message will remain on and a chime
will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a pressure
value in a different color and an “Inflate to
XX” message.
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the instru-
ment cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place
of the pressure value.
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a
chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster
will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pres-
sure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the non-matching full size spare or compact
spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In
addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
and the graphic in the instrument cluster will
display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of
the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TTPMS) — If Equipped
The Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TTPMS) is a feature that displays the trailer tire
pressure values and warns the driver of a low
tire pressure event based on the drivers set
target tire pressure value, through the TTPMS
settings found in the radio.
The TTPMS monitors the pressure of each tire
and warns the driver through the instrument
cluster, when either a low tire pressure
condition falls below 25% of the drivers set
pressure or if a system malfunction occurs. The
instrument cluster will display the actual tire
pressure or dashes for each of the trailer tires in
the correct trailer position, based on trailer
configuration. The TTPMS can support up to
12 trailer tires per configured trailer on up to
four configurable trailers Ú page 258.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Pairing
In order use this feature, the provided tire
pressure sensors must be installed in the desired
trailer tires and the sensors must be paired to the
truck. If the target trailer requires more than the
provided four sensors, additional sensors can be
purchased at an authorized Ram dealership.
With the sensors installed and the trailer near or
connected to your Ram truck, initiate the pairing
process by entering the settings menu in the
radio and selecting trailer. Select the desired
trailer profile to pair to, open the “Tire Pressure”
menu, and hit “Setup All Tires”
Ú
page 258.
NOTE:
The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing
process is complete.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
SAFETY 327
Trailer Tire Pressure Settings
Trailer Tire Pressure Pairing
Follow the on screen prompts to select the
number of axles (1 - 3), the number of trailer
tires (2, 4, 6, 8, or 12), and the set trailer tire
pressure. The range is selectable anywhere
between 25-125 PSI (172-862 kPa).
Once PSI (kPa) is programmed, the pairing
screen appears. Tire sensors must be paired in
order shown. Starting with Tire 1, deflate tire by
5 PSI (34 kPa) and wait for a horn chirp. It may
take up to three minutes for the chirp to occur,
indicating that the sensor has paired. Repeat
process on each tire, in order, until complete.
Do not exit the pairing screen until process is
complete. If pairing was unsuccessful, a double
horn chirp will sound, and a prompt on the
touchscreen will allow you to retry the
procedure; “Retry” will only appear when setup
fails. Each tire must be successfully paired
during a single pairing process to receive the
success screen.
NOTE:
If the pairing process times out after three
minutes of no communication with a sensor, a
double horn chip will occur indicating the
pairing has failed and a message will display on
the radio indicating the process was unsuc-
cessful. Under certain circumstances, the
double horn chirp may continue to happen
every three minutes indicating the failed
pairing. If this happens, the horn chirping may
be canceled by cycling the ignition button OFF
and then back to RUN position.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
When a tire pressure low in one or more of the
active road tires is detected, the instrument
cluster will display a message stating “Trailer
Tire Pressure Low”. The instrument cluster will
then display the TTPMS graphic showing the
pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the customer
programmed target tire pressure value as
shown at the top of the TTPMS instrument
cluster graphic. Once the tire(s) are inflated, the
system will automatically update the graphic
display in the instrument cluster, returning to its
original color. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TTPMS to receive the updated
information.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 SAFETY
Service TTPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the instrument
cluster will display a “Trailer Tire Pressure
System Service Required” message for a
minimum of five seconds.
Once the system fault is corrected the "Trailer
Tire Pressure System Service Required"
message will no longer be displayed. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TTPMS to receive the trailer tire pressure
information.
Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured
A “Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured”
message will be displayed in the Instrument
Cluster on the TTPMS instrument cluster
graphic when a trailer number is selected that
has not had trailer tire pressure sensors paired.
To correct this condition, see Ú page 258.
Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active
Trailer
The “Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match
Active Trailer” message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster when the trailer sensors
being received by the TTPMS module do not
match the trailer sensors paired to the current
trailer number selected. This message will be
displayed when the sensors being received
completely match the sensors paired to another
trailer number configured in the TTPMS module.
To correct this condition, the correct trailer
number must be selected in the radio
Ú page 258.
Tire Fill Alert
This feature notifies the user when the placard
tire pressure is attained while inflating or
deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable
the Tire Fill Alert feature through use of the
customer settings in the radio.
NOTE:
Only one tire can be filled at a time when
using the Tire Fill Alert system.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if
an existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the
system is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system
detects an increase of tire pressure, while filling
the fire. The ignition must be in the RUN mode,
with the transmission in PARK (P).
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to
enter Tire Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
If the hazard lamps do not come on while
inflating the tire, the TPMS sensor may be in an
inoperative position, preventing the TPMS
sensor signal from being received. In this case,
the vehicle may need to be moved slightly
forward or backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once to let the user know
when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches
recommended pressure.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
overfilled and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to inflate the
tire.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
SAFETY 329
The horn will chirp once again when enough
air is let out to reach proper inflation level.
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire
is then underinflated and will continue to
chirp every five seconds if the user continues
to deflate the tire.
Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA)
The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an
optional feature that is included as part of the
normal Tire Fill Alert system. The system is
designed to allow the customer to select a
pressure to inflate or deflate the vehicle's front
and rear axle tires to and to provide feedback to
the customer while inflating or deflating the
vehicle's tires.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application,
which is located in the apps menu of the
Uconnect system, the customer will be able to
select a pressure setting for both the front and
rear axle tire pressures by scrolling through a
pressure range from XX to 15 psi in 1 psi
increments for each axle setting. XX = the
vehicle’s cold placard pressure values for the
front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle
placard pressure label.
The customer may also store the pressure
values chosen for each axle in the radio as a
preset pressure. The customer will be allowed
to store up to two sets of preset values in the
radio for the front and rear axle pressure values.
Once the customer selects the tire pressures for
the front and rear axles that they want to inflate
or deflate to, they can begin inflating or
deflating one tire at a time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or
deflating one tire at a time.
The customer may choose to disable or enable
the STFA feature through use of the TFA settings
in the radio. If STFA appears grayed out it must
be turned on prior to selecting.
The system will be activated when the TPMS
receiver module detects a change in tire
pressure. The ignition must be in the RUN
mode, with the transmission in PARK (P).
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
If the hazard lamps do not come on while
inflating or deflating the tire, the TPMS sensor
may be in an inoperative position, preventing
the TPMS sensor signal from being received. In
this case, the vehicle may need to be moved
slightly forward or backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once when the selected
pressure is reached to let the user know
when to stop inflating or deflating the tire.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
overinflated or over deflated and will
continue to chirp every five seconds if the
user continues to inflate or deflate the tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough
air is added or removed to reach proper
selected pressure level.
Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
3500 Series Trucks
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TPIS.
The TPIS uses wireless technology with wheel
rim mounted electronic sensors to transmit tire
pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 SAFETY
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPIS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four TPMS sensors (Single Rear Wheel
(SRW) applications)
Six TPMS sensors (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW)
applications)
Pressure display in the instrument cluster
The TPIS will display all four (Single Rear Wheel
(SRW) applications) or six (Dual Rear Wheel
(DRW) applications) tire pressure values in the
instrument cluster display.
If a system fault is detected, the instrument
cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the "SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be
displayed, and a pressure value will display in
place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices
or driving next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
Installing aftermarket window tinting that
contains materials that may block radio wave
signals.
Accumulation of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
SAFETY 331
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured
in the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position Ú page 350.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 350.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, see Ú page 487 for customer
service contact information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 SAFETY
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Mega Cab and
Crew Cab front center seating position have
combination lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
SAFETY 333
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
WARNING! (Continued)
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
SAFETY 335
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
ically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up
or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 SAFETY
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
First Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions (Regular Cab Only)
The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only)
features a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and
buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach
from the lower anchor when the seat is folded.
The latch plate and regular latch plate can then
be stored out of the way in the seat for added
convenience to open up utilization of the
storage areas behind the front seats when the
seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular
latch plate from its stowed position on the
seat.
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat
belt over the seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the
right head restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the mini-latch plate into the
mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
SAFETY 337
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the
risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack
in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular
latch plate into the center red slot on the
mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into
its stowed position.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
First Row Center Lap Belt Operating
Instructions — If Equipped
The center seating position for the Mega Cab
and Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To
buckle the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click." To lengthen the
lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull.
To remove slack, pull the loose end of the
webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against the
hips. Sit back and upright in the seat, then
adjust the seat belt as tightly as is comfortable.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
required for a different occupant, it must be
removed.
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are
not properly connected when the seat belt
is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not be able to provide proper restraint and
will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing
is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted,
follow the preceding procedure to detach
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle,
untwist the webbing, and reattach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
SAFETY 339
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) — If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions may be equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system
Ú page 359.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position.
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 SAFETY
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
SAFETY 341
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors — If Equipped
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a colli-
sion. If the light does not come on as a bulb
check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immedi-
ately.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 SAFETY
For additional information regarding the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, see
Ú page 123.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
2500 Series Truck
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
SAFETY 343
3500 Series Truck
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 SAFETY
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
SAFETY 345
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 SAFETY
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences
a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment
is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
deploy the side air bags and seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag
System Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in
all collisions. They also help keep you in posi-
tion, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To
get the best protection from the Side Air
Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
SAFETY 347
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors — If Equipped
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretension-
ers cannot protect you in another collision.
Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners,
and the seat belt retractor assemblies
replaced by an authorized dealer immedi-
ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller System serviced as well.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will
determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and
remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If
you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start
after performing the reset procedure, the
vehicle must be towed to an authorized dealer
to be inspected and to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System reset.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
SAFETY 349
(Continued)
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side
steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 SAFETY
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to
http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-care-
givers or call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
SAFETY 351
(Continued)
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 SAFETY
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not
transport a rear-facing child restraint in that
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear
support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this
vehicle is not designed to manage the crash
forces of this type of car seat. In a crash, the
support leg may not function as it was designed
by the car seat manufacturer, and your child
may be more severely injured as a result.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
SAFETY 353
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no”, then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab LATCH Positions
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
SAFETY 355
Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions Mega Cab LATCH Positions Crew Cab Full Bench LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to
attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs
(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead
of the LATCH system once the combined weight is
more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or for-
ward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchor-
ages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See
your booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 SAFETY
Can a child seat be installed in the center position
using the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the
outboard seating positions?
N/A – Regular Cab
No – Crew Cab Full Bench rear seat
Regular Cab Front / Crew Cab with full bench rear
seat: Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
child seat in the center seating position.
Crew Cab with split bench rear seat / Mega Cab: Child
restraints can be installed using the supplied lower
anchorages for the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt
to install a child seat in the center position next to a
child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for
more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every rear seat-
ing position if they interfere with the installation of the
child restraint Ú page 40.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
SAFETY 357
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
Mega Cab/Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Regular Cab models have tether strap
anchorages behind the front center
and right seats. Mega Cab and Crew
Cab models have tether strap
anchorages located behind each of the rear
seats.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
Crew Cab Outboard Tether Anchorage
Crew Cab Center Tether Anchorage With Head
Restraint In Raised Position
Mega Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
1 — Tether Anchor
2 — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 SAFETY
(Continued)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Regular Cab Or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear Seat:
No Lower Center LATCH Anchorages Available
Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat Or Mega Cab
Rear Seat: Center LATCH Anchorages Available
If a child restraint installed in the center
position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle
for the outboard position, do not use that
outboard position. If a child seat in the center
position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that
outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See Ú page 359 to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This posi-
tion is not approved for installing child
seats using the LATCH attachments. You
must use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating
position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. For
typical installation instructions, see
Ú page 358.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. For
typical installation instructions, see
Ú page 358.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
SAFETY 359
(Continued)
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 363 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 SAFETY
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with either a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching
latch plate or both. Both types of seat belts are
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seat belt
tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight
through a child restraint’s belt path.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Cinching Latch plate — Cinching Latch plate
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
SAFETY 361
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. For Mega and Crew Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get
a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position
to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the
seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt
to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the
child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every rear
seating position if they interfere with the installation of
the child restraint Ú page 40.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat
belt against the belt path of the child restraint?
Yes – Cinching Latch Plate
No – ALR
In positions with cinching latch plates (CINCH), the
buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not
twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 SAFETY
For Regular Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. Move the vehicle seat as
far rearward as possible to keep the child as
far from the passenger air bag as possible.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. For
directions to attach a tether anchor, see
Ú page 363.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/
or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
SAFETY 363
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing
from the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the
belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 363 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too
close to the belt path opening of the child
restraint, you may have trouble tightening the
seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch
plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten
it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out, away from the child
restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to
complete the installation of the child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you
shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle, turn the buckle around one
half turn, and insert the latch plate into the
buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating
position.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
Regular and Mega Cab Trucks:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether
anchorages are located behind the
center and right passenger seats. In
the mega cab truck, the top tether
anchorages are located behind each
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. For
the location of approved tether anchorages in
your vehicle, see Ú page 354.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 SAFETY
rear seating position. There is a plastic cover
over each anchorage. To attach the tether strap
of the child restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, under the head
restraint and to the tether anchor directly
behind the seat.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path between the anchorage and the
child seat. The tether strap should go
between the head restraint posts
underneath the head restraint. You may
need to adjust the head restraint to the
upward position to pass the tether strap
underneath the head restraint and between
its posts.
3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach
the hook to the square opening in the sheet
metal. Tighten the tether strap according to
the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Crew Cab Trucks:
The top tether anchorages in this
vehicle are tether strap loops located
between the rear glass and the back
of the rear seat. There is a tether
strap loop located behind each seating position.
Follow the steps to attach the tether strap of the
child restraint.
Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach
between the rear seat and rear glass to
access the tether strap loop.
Head Restraint In Raised Position
1 — Tether Anchor
2 — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger
Front Air Bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger, including
a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
SAFETY 365
Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In
Raised Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, under the head
restraint, through the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the tether strap
loop behind the center seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head
restraint behind the child seat, though the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over
to the center tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
NOTE:
If there are child seats in both of the outboard
(left and right) seating positions, the tether
strap hooks of both child seats should be
connected to the center tether strap loop. This
is the correct way to tether two outboard child
seats.
Center Seat:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach
between the rear seat and rear glass to
access the tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised
Position
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 SAFETY
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, under the head
restraint, through the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the tether strap
loop behind either the right or left outboard
seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head
restraint behind the child seat, though the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over
to the right or left outboard tether strap
loop.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
Installing Three Child Restraints:
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard
rear seat. Route the tether straps following
the directions for right and left seating
positions, above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap
loop, but do not tighten the straps yet.
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear
seat. Route the tether strap following the
directions for the center seating position,
above.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap
loop.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions,
tightening the right and left tether straps
before the center tether strap.
Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
SAFETY 367
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
mode. If the light is either not on during starting,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault
with the Air Bag System has been detected. It
will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately Ú page 330.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold
inflation pressure.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING! (Continued)
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
SAFETY 369
(Continued)
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
6
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
on the upper switch bank just below the radio.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch
Uconnect display, the Hazard Warning Flashers
switch is located above the display.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 371
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning
Flashers may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles trim level, the over-
head console may vary.
Assist And SOS Buttons
Assist And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber Ú page 490.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) 3G or 4G (data) network, which
comes as a built in feature. Other Uconnect
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you’ll be connected to someone who can
help. Roadside Assistance will know what
vehicle you’re driving and its location. Addi-
tional fees may apply for roadside assis-
tance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
7
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the overhead console or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the overhead console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and
SOS buttons on the overhead console will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS
operator, the SOS operator may be able
to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is
needed. Once the SOS operator opens a
voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS
Call system, the operator should be able
to speak with you or other vehicle occu-
pants and hear sounds occurring in the
vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator
terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
bility and assume all risks related to the use of
the features and applications in this vehicle.
Only use the features and applications when it
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 373
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The overhead console light located within the
ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously
illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message: “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact an authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after-
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s
electrical system. This may prevent your
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an
emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never
add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.)
to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify
the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR
VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN
ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS,
WILL NOT OPERATE.
WARNING! (Continued)
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Ignoring the overhead console light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the overhead console light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
7
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed.
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility.
Operator error by the SOS operator.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion.
Weather.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service
that can immediately connect you with help in
the event that your vehicle’s airbags deploy.
Please refer to your provided radio supplement
for complete information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspen-
sion system, there is a feature which allows the
automatic leveling to be disabled to assist with
changing a tire.
This feature can be activated through the
Uconnect system Ú page 271.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
bility and assume all risks related to the use of
the features and applications in this vehicle.
Only use the features and applications when it
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in
an accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 375
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the transmission into Park (P).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being raised or lifted.
JACK LOCATION
The jack and tools are stored under the front
passenger seat.
REMOVAL OF JACK AND TOOLS
To access the jack and tools, you must remove
the plastic access cover located on the side of
the front passenger’s seat. To remove the
cover, pull the front part of the cover (closest to
the front of the seat) toward you to release a
locking tab. Once the front of the cover is loose,
slide the cover toward the front of the seat until
it is free from the seat frame.
Jack Access Cover
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing
bolt counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and
then slide the assembly out from under the seat.
Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
7
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Remove the jack and tools from the bracket
assembly. Turn the jack turn-screw
counterclockwise to release jack from bracket
assembly.
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
Jacking Tools
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
Assembled For Jack Operation
Assembled For Jack Operation
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Extension 2
3 — Extension 3
4 — Extension 4
CAUTION!
The lug wrench can only be attached to
extension two (2).
When attaching the tool to the winch mech-
anism be sure the large flared end opening
on extension four (4) is positioned correctly
over the winch mechanism adjusting nut.
Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and
winch mechanism may occur from
improper tool assembly.
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Extension 2
3 — Extension 3
4 — Extension 4
5 — Jack Driver
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 377
REMOVING THE SPARE TIRE
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to
jack up the truck. Attach the lug wrench to
the extension tubes with the curved angle
facing away from the vehicle. Insert the
extension tube through the access hole
between the lower tailgate and the top of
the fascia/bumper and into the winch
mechanism tube.
Winch Mechanism Tube
Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole
2. Rotate the lug wrench handle counter-
clockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you
to pull it out from under the vehicle.
Pulling The Spare Tire Out
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the
vehicle to gain access to the spare tire
retainer.
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
them in the original carrier and location.
While driving you may experience abrupt stop-
ping, rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A
loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects in
the vehicle may move around with force,
resulting in serious injury.
7
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of
the cable.
Removing The Retainer
5. Pull the retainer through the center of the
wheel.
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench
or other power tools is not recommended and
can damage the winch.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 379
Lug Wrench Adapter Shown In Jack And Tools Assembly
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools
from storage.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not
remove, the wheel nuts by turning them
counterclockwise one turn while the wheel
is still on the ground. Changing a dually tire
requires the lug wrench adapter.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with hub caps/wheel
covers they must be removed before raising the
vehicle off the ground Ú page 383.
Lug Wrench Adapter
Lug Wrench Adapter And Wrench
3. Placement of the jack is critical:
Jack / Extensions Placement
Front Jacking Location
When changing the front wheel, assemble
the jack driver to the jack and connect the
jack driver to the extension tubes. Place the
jack under the axle as close to the tire as pos-
sible with the drive tubes extending to the
front. Connect the extension tubes and lug
wrench.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
7
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the
jack driver to the jack and connect the jack
driver to the extension tubes. Place the jack
under the axle between the spring and the
shock absorber with the extension tubes ex-
tending to the rear.
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
Connect the extension tubes and lug
wrench.
NOTE:
If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial
(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to
use the jack driver in order to lower the jack.
4. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise
the vehicle until the wheel just clears the
surface.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make
sure that the jack will not damage
surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack
position as required.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 381
5. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off.
On Single Rear Wheel (SRW) trucks, install
the spare wheel and lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the wheel nuts toward the
wheel. On 3500 Dual Rear Wheel models
(DRW) trucks, if the outer tire is being
replaced then leave the inner wheel on the
vehicle. If the inner wheel is being replaced
remove the outer wheel and replace the
inner wheel. The wheel nuts are a two-piece
assembly with a flat face. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the
vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the
lug nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
Rear Inner Wheel Proper Placement
(Dual Rear Wheel Equipped)
Dual Rear Wheel Jack Placement
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the lug wrench while at the end of the
handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has
been tightened twice Ú page 474. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or service station.
7. Install the wheel center cap and remove the
wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or
aluminum wheel center caps on the spare
wheel. This may result in cap damage.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
Stow the replaced tire, jack, and tools as
previously described.
NOTE:
The bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial
(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to
use the jack driver in order to lower the jack.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE:
Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated lug nuts.
TO STOW THE FLAT OR SPARE
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop, could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
7
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immedi-
ately.
1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is
facing the ground and toward the rear of
the vehicle for convenience in checking the
spare tire inflation. Slide the wheel retainer
through the center of the wheel.
Reinstalling The Retainer
2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of
the cable and position it properly across the
wheel opening.
Pushing The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
And Positioning It
3. Attach the lug wrench to the extension
tubes with the curved angle facing away
from the vehicle. Insert the extensions
through the access hole between the lower
tailgate and the top of the fascia/bumper
and into the winch mechanism tube.
Lug Wrench And Extension Tubes Assembled And In
Position
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise
until the wheel is drawn into place against
the underside of the vehicle. Continue to
rotate until you feel the winch mechanism
slip, or click three or four times. It cannot be
overtightened. Push against the tire several
times to ensure it is firmly in place.
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air
wrench or other power tools is not recom-
mended and can damage the winch.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 383
REINSTALLING THE JACK AND TOOLS
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by
turning the jack turn-screw counter-
clockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tools into bracket
assembly. Make sure the lug wrench is
under the jack near the jack turn-screw.
Snap tools into bracket assembly clips.
Install the jack into bracket assembly and
turn the jack turn-screw clockwise until jack
is snug into bracket assembly.
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
3. Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in
the storage position holding the jack by the
jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools
under the seat so that the bottom slot
engages into the fastener on the floor.
Jack Hold Down Fastener
NOTE:
Ensure that the jack and tool bracket assembly
slides into the front hold down location.
4. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the
floor pan. Reinstall the plastic cover.
Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools
HUB CAPS/WHEEL COVERS — IF
E
QUIPPED
The hub caps must be removed before raising
the vehicle off the ground.
CAUTION!
Use extreme caution when removing the front
and rear wheel covers. Damage can occur to
the center cap and/or the wheel if screw-
driver type tools are used. A pulling motion,
not a pry off motion, is recommended to
remove the caps.
7
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
For 2500/3500 Single Rear Wheel (SRW)
models, use the flat end of the lug wrench to
hook and pull off the hub cap. Find the opening
in the hub cap, insert the lug wrench, and pull
off the cap. If you need to pry against the wheel,
protect the wheel surface.
Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Hub Cap
On 3500 models with Dual Rear Wheels (DRW),
you must first remove the hub caps—use the
procedure noted for the single rear wheel. For
the wheel covers (wheel skins), insert the flat
end of the lug wrench between the outer edge
of the wheel cover and the wheel. Pry against
the wheel to remove the wheel cover. Repeat
this procedure around the wheel until the cover
pops off.
Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Wheel Cover
Replace the wheel covers using a rubber mallet
to ease the installation. Align the wheel cover
vent holes to the wheel vent holes. Tap on the
wheel cover as needed to firmly seat it evenly
around the wheel.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
CAUTION!
Use a pulling motion to remove the hub
cap. Do not use a twisting motion when
removing the hub cap, damage to the hub
cap; finish may occur.
The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel
has two pull off notches. Make sure that the
hook of the jack handle driver is located
squarely in the cap notch before attempting
to pull off.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 385
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front
of the engine compartment, behind the driver
side headlight assembly.
If you have a diesel engine, you may have two
batteries, jump start off the driver side battery.
Battery Location
The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap if equipped. Lift up on the cap to
gain access to the positive battery post. Do not
jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive
post which has a positive (+) symbol on or
around the post.
Positive (+) Battery Post
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK and
turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach apply the parking brake, make
sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
7
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The
ground must be away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the
disconnection procedure below.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the nega-
tive (-) post of the discharged battery. The
resulting electrical spark could cause the bat-
tery to explode and could result in personal
injury.
CAUTION!
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the
fuses on the positive battery terminal. The
resulting electrical current will blow the fuse.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 387
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at an authorized
dealer.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6–SPEED
TRANSMISSION
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you
can use the following procedure to temporarily
move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the
access port (ringed circle) on the bottom of
the steering column, and push and hold the
override release lever up.
Gear Selector Override Access Port Location
Gear Selector Override Access Port
Engaging The Access Port
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in
NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s bat-
tery will discharge sufficiently to degrade bat-
tery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
7
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 – SPEED
TRANSMISSION
To push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as
a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
available.
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the Manual Park Release access
cover, which is just above the parking brake
release handle, below and to the left of the
steering column.
Manual Park Release Panel Cover
3. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push
the Manual Park Release lever locking tab
(just below the middle of the lever) to the
right.
4. While holding the locking tab in the
disengaged position, pull the tether strap to
rotate the lever rearward, until it locks in
place pointing towards the driver's seat.
Release the locking tab and verify that the
Manual Park Release lever is locked in the
released position.
Manual Park Release Tether
5. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be
towed. Release the parking brake only when
the vehicle is securely connected to a tow
vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock
the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever
forward to its original position, until the
locking tab snaps into place to secure the
lever.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the parking brake before activating the Man-
ual Park Release. In addition, you should be
seated in the driver’s seat with your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake,
or by proper connection to a tow vehicle. Acti-
vating the Manual Park Release on an unse-
cured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 389
3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm
that the lever is locked in its stowed
position.
Manual Park Release Pull Strap
4. Re-install the access cover.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the
accelerator. Use the least amount of
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain
the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned
off until the pointer drops back into the nor-
mal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H),
and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
7
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
For trucks equipped with an 8–speed trans-
mission, shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE
can only be achieved at wheel speeds of
5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the trans-
mission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake
pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Push the ESC OFF switch to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
“Partial OFF” mode, before rocking the
vehicle Ú page 307. Once the vehicle has
been freed, push the ESC OFF switch again to
restore “ESC On” mode.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable,
disabled vehicles may also be towed as
described on Ú page 250.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with the Air Suspension
System Ú page 177 must be placed in Trans-
port mode, before tying them down (from the
body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. If the vehicle
cannot be placed in Transport mode (for
example, engine will not run), tie-downs must
be fastened to the axles (not to the body).
Failure to follow these instructions may cause
fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of
proper tie-down tension.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let any-
one near a spinning wheel, no matter what
the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 391
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow
must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, find Instructions on
shifting the transmission out of PARK
Ú page 388.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
2WD Models 4WD Models
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
Transmission in NEUTRAL
30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
15 miles (24 km) max distance (6–speed trans-
mission)
30 miles (48 km) max distance (8–speed trans-
mission)
Detailed instructions Ú page 250
Automatic Transmission in PARK
Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
7
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TWO-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under
the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N).
Instructions on shifting the transmission to
NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is off
Ú page 388.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed
30 miles (48 km) for 8–speed transmission.
The towing distance must not exceed
15 miles (24 km) for 6–speed transmission.
If the transmission is not operable, or the
vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow
with the rear wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed are as follows:
The front wheels raised and the rear wheels
on a towing dolly
Using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to
hold the front wheels in the straight position
with the rear wheels raised when and the
front wheels ON the ground.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of
vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing
dolly.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF
E
QUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency
tow hooks.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk
of damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 393
Front Tow Hooks
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact
Ú page 348.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle Ú page 349.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious
injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen-
gaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off-road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
7
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GASOLINE
ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Oil Change Required”
message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than an
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under
Instrument Cluster Display Ú page 111.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign
of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the
oil indicator system turns on
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder and power steering
and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 395
MAINTENANCE PLAN — GASOLINE ENGINE
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. If required, replace engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty
conditions.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
396 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces. If gear oil
leakage is suspected, check the fluid level. If
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing, change axle fluid.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake as necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace the cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 397
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
X X
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for any of
the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing.
X X
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING— DIESEL ENGINE
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance plan on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
More frequent maintenance may be needed in
severe conditions, such as dusty areas and very
short trip driving. In some extreme conditions,
additional maintenance not specified in the
maintenance schedule may be required.
At Each Stop For Fuel
Check the engine oil level at least 30 minutes
after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking
the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level
reading. Add oil only when the level is at or
below the ADD or MIN mark.
Once A Month
Inspect the batteries, and clean and tighten
the terminals as required.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and automatic trans-
mission, and add as needed.
At Each Oil Change
Change the engine oil filter.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. Replace the
engine air cleaner filter, if necessary.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
Inspect front end, and lubricate — If equipped
with serviceable fittings.
Inspect and replace the Evaporative System
Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement
may be more frequent if vehicle is operated
in extreme dusty conditions.
Inspection and service should also be
performed anytime a malfunction is observed or
suspected. Retain all receipts.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door
hinge pivot joints twice a year to prevent prema-
ture wear.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR SYSTEM —
C
UMMINS ® DIESEL
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. This system will alert
you when it is time to change your engine oil by
displaying the words “Oil Change Due” in your
instrument cluster display. The oil change
reminder will remind the owner to change the
engine oil every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or
500 hours, whichever comes first. Failure to
change the engine oil per the maintenance
schedule can result in internal engine damage.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance
items may result in damage to the vehicle.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 399
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than an
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under
Instrument Cluster Display Ú page 111.
Replace the engine oil and oil filter every
15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months, or
sooner if prompted by the oil change indicator
system. Under no circumstances should oil
change intervals exceed 15,000 miles
(24,000 km) or 12 months, whichever comes
first.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km)
or 12 months or 500 hours, whichever
comes first.
Replace the engine oil and oil filter every
12,500 miles (20,000 km) or 400 hours,
whichever comes first when running greater
than 5% levels of biodiesel.
PERFORM SERVICE INDICATOR —
C
UMMINS ® DIESEL
Your vehicle will require emissions
maintenance at a set interval. To help remind
you when this maintenance is due, the
instrument cluster will display “Perform
Service”. When the “Perform Service” message
is displayed on the instrument cluster it is
necessary to have the emissions maintenance
performed. Emissions maintenance may
include replacing the Closed Crankcase
Ventilation (CCV) filter element. The procedure
for clearing and resetting the “Perform Service”
indicator message is located in the appropriate
Service Information.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN — CUMMINS ® DIESEL ENGINE
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
Change engine oil every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km) or 12 months or 500 Hours
or sooner if prompted by the oil change
indicator system, whichever comes first.
1
X X X X X X X X X X
Additional Inspections
Check the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
tank, refill if necessary.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Rotate the tires. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front end, and lubricate — If
equipped with serviceable fittings.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X
Ins
pect engine air cleaner filter, replace
if necessary.
2
X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 401
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks
and all parts for damage, wear, improper
looseness or end play; replace if
necessary.
X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X X X X X X
Inspect and adjust parking brake. X X X X X X
Inspect drive belt; replace as necessary. X X X X X X
Inspect wheel bearings. X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace the cabin air filter. X X X X X X
Replace the engine fuel filter. X X X X X X X X X X
Replace the chassis mounted fuel filter. X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces.
If gear oil leakage is suspected, check
the fluid level. If using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent
trailer towing change the axle fluid.
3
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Inspect the transfer case fluid (4x4),
change for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
X X X X X
Change the transfer case fluid (4x4). X X
Change automatic transmission fluid
(AS69RC transmission only).
X X X X
Change automatic transmission fluid
and sump filter (AS69RC transmission
only).
X X
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing (68RFE transmission only).
X X
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter(s).
X
Replace Crankcase Ventilation Filter
(CCV).
X X
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 403
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
Flush and replace power steering fluid.
X
Flush and replace engine coolant. ***
X
1. Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months or 500 Hours, whichever comes first.
2. Under no circumstances should the engine air cleaner filter exceed 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months, whichever comes first.
3. Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces every 20,000 miles (32,000 km). If gear oil leakage is suspected, check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing change the axle fluid every 20,000 miles (32,000 km).
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
CAUTION!
***The manufacturer highly recommends that all cooling system service, maintenance, and repairs be performed by your local authorized dealer.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403
404 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
6.4L ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Battery
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 7 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 405
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE — SIX-SPEED 68RFE
1 — Battery 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 8 — Battery
3 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 10 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Oil Fill 11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
6 — Engine Oil Dipstick 12 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405
406 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE — SIX-SPEED AS69RC HD
1 — Battery 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 8 — Battery
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Oil Dipstick 11 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
6 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 12 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 407
(Continued)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is
at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the
oil level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood
and should be checked for fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will
help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the
defroster for a few minutes to reduce the
possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on
the cold windshield. Windshield washer solution
used with water as directed on the container,
aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point
to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to
paint or trim.
MAINTENANCE -FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
maintenance-free battery. You will never have
to add water, and periodic maintenance is not
required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water Ú page 386.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 407
408 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection — Gasoline Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS-12633.
NOTE:
Hemi engines (6.4L) at times can tick right after
startup and then quiet down after approxi-
mately 30 seconds. This is normal and will not
harm the engine. This characteristic can be
caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the
vehicle is started then shut off after driving a
short distance. Upon restarting, you may experi-
ence a ticking sound. Other causes could be if
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 408
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 409
the vehicle is unused for an extended period of
time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or
extended idling. If the engine continues to tick
or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes
on, see the nearest authorized dealer.
Engine Oil Selection — Diesel Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API CK-4 certified and meet the
requirements of the manufacturer. Use Mopar®
or an equivalent oil meeting the manufacturer
Material Standard MS-10902. Products
meeting Cummins® CES 20081 may also be
used. The identification of these engine oils are
typically located on the back of the oil container.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends API
Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
For diesel engines, oils with a high ash content
may produce damaging deposits on cylinder
head valves and/or after treatment system
damage. A maximum sulfated ash content of
1.00 mass % is recommended for all oil used in
the engine.
The same oil change interval is to be followed
for synthetic oil as for petroleum-based oil. Also,
synthetic oil must meet the same performance
specifications as petroleum oil.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or
governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be
used for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality Mopar® certified filters should be
used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 409
410 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 394.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar® engine air cleaners are a high
quality filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And
Replacement — Gasoline Engine
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or
debris you should change your engine air
cleaner filter.
NOTE:
When replacing the engine air cleaner filter on
vehicles equipped with a 6.4L gasoline engine,
replace with a dry (non-oiled) filter only.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. With suitable tool fully loosen (six)
fasteners on engine air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to
access the engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from
the housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction sys-
tem (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure
to do so can result in serious personal injury.
1 — Fasteners
2 — Air Hose Clamp
3 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 410
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 411
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
housing assembly with the engine air
cleaner filter inspection surface facing
downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover
onto the housing assembly.
3. Tighten the fasteners (six) on the engine air
cleaner filter assembly
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Diesel Engine
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or
debris you should change your engine air
cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Remove the screws from the engine air
cleaner filter cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to
access the engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from
the housing assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner
filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover
onto the housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Install screws to secure the engine air
cleaner filter cover to the housing assembly.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Screws
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 411
412 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R-134a — (If Equipped)
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an
ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R-1234yf — (If Equipped)
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter Replacement
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 394.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air
filter removed and the blower operating, the
blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 412
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 413
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove
all contents.
2. With the glove compartment door open,
remove the glove compartment tension
tether and tether clip by sliding the clip
toward the face of the glove compartment
door. Lift the clip out of glove compartment
door and release into dash panel.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
3. There are travel stops on both sides of the
glove compartment. Push inward on right
side of the glove compartment travel stop to
disengage the stop. Then pull the right of
the glove compartment outward (away from
the hinge) to disengage the right side of the
compartment from the hinge. Continue by
removing the left side from the hinge by
slightly lowering the compartment while
pulling outward until it is completely
disengaged from the hinge.
Glove Compartment
4. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the
finger tabs on each end of the filter cover.
Filter Cover
Filter Cover Removal
1 — Glove Compartment Door
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
1 — Finger Tabs
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 413
414 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it
straight out of the housing.
Cabin Air Filter
6. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on
the filter pointing toward the floor. When
installing the filter cover, press on each end
until you hear an audible click.
7. Reinstall the glove compartment on the
hinges.
8. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall
the glove compartment past the travel stops
by pushing in on the glove compartment
sides.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully
engaged.
9. Reattach the glove compartment tension
tether by inserting the tether clip in the
glove compartment and sliding the clip
away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt
from rib to rib, are considered normal. These
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
tent mechanic.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 414
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 415
are not a reason to replace belt. However,
cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib
must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if
it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe
glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct
problem before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR
F
ILTER — DIESEL ENGINE
There are two fuel filter assemblies. One is
located on the driver's side of the engine. The
best access to this water drain valve is from
under the hood. The second one is on the under
body, located in front of the rear axle above the
drive shaft on pick-up models. The Chassis Cab
models second filter location is on the frame
behind the front axle. The best access to this
water drain valve is from under the vehicle.
If water is detected in the water separator while
the engine is running, or while the ignition
switch is in the ON position, the “Water In Fuel
Indicator Light” will illuminate and an audible
chime will be heard five times. At this point you
should stop the engine and drain the water from
both of the filters.
If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” comes on
and a single chime is heard while you are
driving, or with the ignition switch in the ON
position, there may be a problem with your
water separator wiring or sensor. See an
authorized dealer for service.
CAUTION!
Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter
when the engine is running.
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appro-
priate container.
CAUTION!
If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” remains
on, DO NOT START the engine before you
drain water from the fuel filters to avoid
engine damage.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 415
416 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Upon proper draining of the water from both
fuel filters, the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light”
will remain illuminated for approximately
10 seconds. If the water was drained while the
engine was running, the “Water In Fuel Indicator
Light” may remain on for approximately three
minutes.
NOTE:
Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids
from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately
discarded, can present a problem to the environ-
ment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station, or government agency for advice on recy-
cling programs and for where used fluids and
filters can be properly disposed of in your area.
Drain the fuel/water separator filters when the
“Water In Fuel Indicator Light” is ON. Within
10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the engine
mounted filter drain valve (located on the side of
the filter assembly) counterclockwise 1/4 turn,
and turn the under body mounted filter drain
valve (located on the bottom of the filter
assembly) counterclockwise 1 full turn. Then turn
the ignition switch to the ON position, and allow
any accumulated water to drain. Leave the drain
valve open until all water and contaminants have
been removed. When clean fuel is visible, close
the drain valve following these guidelines:
1. Rotate the drain clockwise to close until
you feel resistance from the internal seal.
2. Continue turning the drain 1/2 of a turn to
properly compress the seal.
NOTE:
Over-compression of the seal due to over-tight-
ening of the drain will damage the seal, cause a
leak, and require the entire sensor to be
replaced.
3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
The sensor drain should not be over-tightened
during normal service operations to avoid
internal damage and future fuel leaks. The
drain should be closed and secured without the
use of tools.
If more than a couple ounces/milliliters of fuel
have been drained, follow the directions for
“Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel.”
ENGINE MOUNTED FUEL FILTER
R
EPLACEMENT — DIESEL ENGINE
NOTE:
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the
manufacturer's filtration and water sepa-
rating requirements can severely impact fuel
system life and reliability.
The engine mounted filter housing is
equipped with a No-Filter-No-Run (NFNR)
feature. Engine will not run if:
No filter is installed.
Inferior/Non-approved filter is used. Use
of OEM filter is required to ensure vehicle
will run.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 416
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 417
Engine Mounted Fuel Filter Assembly
1. Ensure engine is turned off.
2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter drain
hose.
3. Open the water drain valve a quarter turn
counterclockwise and completely drain fuel
and water into the approved container.
4. Close the water drain valve.
5. Remove lid using a socket or strap wrench.
Rotate counterclockwise for removal.
Remove used o-ring and discard it.
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the
housing and dispose of according to your
local regulations.
7. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid
and housing.
8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on
the filter housing and lubricate with clean
engine oil.
9. Remove new filter cartridge from plastic bag
and install into housing.
NOTE:
Do not remove cartridge from bag until you
reach this step in order to keep cartridge clean.
10. Push down on the cartridge to ensure it is
properly seated. Do not pre-fill the filter
housing with fuel.
11. Install lid onto housing and tighten to
22.5 ft lbs (30.5 N.m). Do not overtighten
the lid.
12. Prime the engine, then start the engine and
confirm there are no leaks Ú page 418.
UNDERBODY MOUNTED FUEL FILTER
R
EPLACEMENT — DIESEL ENGINE
NOTE:
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the
manufacturer's filtration and water sepa-
rating requirements can severely impact fuel
system life and reliability.
The underbody mounted filter housing will
cause the engine not to run if:
No filter is installed.
1 — Drain Valve
CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appro-
priate container.
Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a
new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris
could be introduced into the fuel filter
during this action. It is best to install the
filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to
prime the fuel system.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 417
418 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter Assembly
1. Ensure engine is turned off.
2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter drain
hose.
3. Open the water drain valve one full turn
counterclockwise and completely drain fuel
and water into the approved container.
4. Close the water drain valve.
5. Remove lid using a socket or strap wrench.
Rotate counterclockwise for removal.
Remove used o-ring and discard it.
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the
housing and dispose of according to your
local regulations.
7. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid
and housing.
8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on
the filter housing and lubricate with clean
engine oil.
NOTE:
Water In Fuel (WIF) sensor is re-usable. Service
kit comes with new o-ring for filter canister and
WIF sensor.
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT
O
F FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the
tank, approximately 2 to 5 gal (8L to 19L).
2. Three priming cycles must be completed.
Turn ignition to the RUN position and wait
approximately 30 seconds. This will activate
the in tank fuel pump. Turn the ignition
switch to the off position, and leave off for at
least 30 seconds. Repeat this procedure
three times before cranking the engine.
3. Start the engine using the “Normal Starting”
procedure Ú page 140.
4. Once the engine starts, allow the engine to
idle for a minimum of 30 seconds.
1 — Drain Valve
CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appro-
priate container.
Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a
new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris
could be introduced into the fuel filter
during this action. It is best to install the
filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to
prime the fuel system.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system
with the engine running. Engine operation
causes high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel
spray can cause serious injury or death.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 418
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 419
NOTE:
The engine may run rough until the air is forced
from all the fuel lines.
NOTE:
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel, meeting
ASTM specification D-975 may be used with
your Cummins® diesel engine. (Chassis Cab
models not configured with B20 capability.)
A maximum blend of 20% biodiesel, meeting
ASTM specification D-7467 may be used with
your Cummins® diesel engine. (Pickup
models and Chassis Cab models configured
with B20 capability.)
Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can
negatively impact the fuel filter's ability to
separate water from the fuel, resulting in
high pressure fuel system corrosion or
damage.
Ethanol blends are not recommended or
approved for use with your Cummins® diesel
engine.
In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
tives are not necessary for the proper opera-
tion of your Cummins® diesel engine.
INTERVENTION REGENERATION
S
TRATEGY — MESSAGE PROCESS FLOW
The Cummins® diesel engine meets all
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Heavy
Duty Diesel Engine Emissions Standards,
resulting in one of the lowest emitting diesel
engines ever produced.
To achieve these emissions standards, your
vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art
engine and exhaust system. The engine and
exhaust after-treatment system work together
to achieve the EPA Heavy Duty Diesel Engine
Emissions Standards. These systems are
seamlessly integrated into your vehicle and
managed by the Cummins® Powertrain Control
Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine
combustion to allow the exhaust system’s
catalyst to trap and burn Particulate Matter
(PM) pollutants, with no input or interaction on
your part.
If the engine is allowed to idle or the truck is
driven on low engine speed drive cycles for
more than two hours, the system will
automatically enter an emissions operating
mode that will increase the engine idle speed to
900 RPM. While in this mode, which is designed
to help maintain the Diesel Particulate Filter,
the engine idle speed will return to normal when
the brake pedal is applied. A small change in
engine tone or a slight change in engine
performance while accelerating may also be
noticeable at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h).
This operating mode may last for up to an hour
of idle time, or around 20 minutes of driving
time.
CAUTION!
Do not engage the starter motor for more
than 15 seconds at a time. Allow two minutes
between the cranking intervals.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel
blending agent. They can be unstable under
certain conditions and be hazardous or explo-
sive when mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gaso-
line, the use of these fuels can cause dam-
age to the fuel system.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 419
420 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert
you to additional maintenance required on your
truck or engine Ú page 111.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known
simply by the name of its active component,
UREA—is a key component of selective catalytic
reduction (SCR) systems, which help diesel
vehicles meet stringent emission regulations.
DEF is a liquid reducing agent that reacts with
engine exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to
convert smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx)
into harmless nitrogen and water vapor
Ú page 481.
You can receive assistance in locating DEF in
the United States by calling 866-RAM-INFO
(866-726-4636). In Canada call
1–800–465–2001 (English) or
1–800–387–9983 (French)
You can receive assistance in locating DEF by
contacting an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder
Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do not
park or operate your vehicle in areas where
your exhaust system can contact anything
that can burn.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 420
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 421
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm
or blade that is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm And Blade
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the locking tab.
Wiper Locking Assembly
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 421
422 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away
from the arm and use one finger to push the
release tab toward the wiper arm.
Wiper Disengaging
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the
base of the wiper arm.
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm by
holding the wiper arm with one hand and
separating the wiper blade from the wiper
arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade down toward the base of the wiper
arm and away from the J hook in the end of
the wiper arm).
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper
assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade
under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm until it is latched
(engagement will be accompanied by an
audible click). Fold down the latch release
tab and snap it into its locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Wiper
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 422
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 423
(Continued)
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter will not require
maintenance. However, it is important to keep
the engine properly tuned to ensure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you Ú page 369.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 423
424 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance,
the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the
A/C condenser or radiator for any accumulation
of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the A/C condenser or the back
of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks.
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 394.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 481.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or
any “globally compatible” coolant. If a
non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 424
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 425
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant.
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
When adding engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of
the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures
below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated.
Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use
of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed
in an emergency, have an authorized dealer
drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant will return to the radiator
from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery
tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 425
426 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain
in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills
immediately.
Checking Coolant Level — 6.4L Engine
The level of the coolant in the pressurized
coolant bottle should be between the “MIN” and
“MAX” range on the bottle when the engine is
cold.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the cap unless
checking for coolant freeze point or replacing
engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service
attendant of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the
coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month. When additional engine coolant is
needed to maintain the proper level, it should
be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of
the coolant expansion bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which
contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 426
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 427
(Continued)
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
CHARGE AIR COOLER — INTER-COOLER
The charge air cooler is positioned below the
radiator and the air conditioner condenser. Air
enters the engine through the air cleaner and
passes through the turbocharger, where it is
pressurized. This pressurized air rapidly
reaches high temperature. The air is then
directed through a hose to the charge air cooler
and through another hose to the intake
manifold of the engine. The air entering the
engine has been cooled by about 50° to 100°F
(10° to 38°C). This cooling process enables
more efficient burning of fuel resulting in fewer
emissions.
To guarantee optimum performance of the
system, keep the surfaces of the charge air
cooler, condenser and radiator clean and free
of debris. Periodically check the hoses leading
to and from the charge air cooler for cracks or
loose clamps resulting in loss of pressure and
reduced engine performance.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically Ú page 394.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under the hood
service or immediately if the brake system
warning lamp indicates system failure.
If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the
designated marks on the side of the reservoir of
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the
top of the master cylinder area before removing
cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected
to fall as the brake linings wear. However, an
unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by
a leak and a system check should be
conducted.
For further information Ú page 485.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid
Ú
page 485. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance.
The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle
is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid
that has been in a tightly closed container.
Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap
secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open
container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or
prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 427
428 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the
transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid
(ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid
additives to the transmission. The only
exception to this policy is the use of special dyes
for diagnosing fluid leaks in six-speed
transmissions. Avoid using transmission
sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check — Eight-Speed
Transmission
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required, therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid Level Check — Six-Speed
Transmission
It is best to check the fluid level when the
transmission is at normal operating
temperature (158-176°F / 70-80°C). This
normally occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km)
of driving. At normal operating temperature the
fluid cannot be held comfortably between the
fingertips. You can read the transmission sump
temperature in the instrument cluster screen
Ú page 111.
Use the following procedure to check the
transmission fluid level properly:
1. Monitor the transmission temperature
using the instrument cluster display, and
operate the vehicle as required to reach
the normal operating temperature. If the
transmission is not functioning properly, or
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 428
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 429
the vehicle cannot be driven, see the NOTE
and CAUTION below about checking the
fluid level at colder temperatures.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at
least 60 seconds, and leave the engine
running for the rest of this procedure.
4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the
brake pedal.
5. Place the gear selector momentarily into
each gear position (allowing time for the
transmission to fully engage in each
position), ending with the transmission in
PARK.
6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and
reinsert it until seated.
7. Remove the dipstick again and note the
fluid level on both sides. The fluid level
reading is only valid if there is a solid
coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full
of fluid if the actual level is at or above the
hole. The fluid level should be between the
“HOT” (upper) reference holes on the
dipstick at normal operating temperature. If
the fluid level is low, add fluid through the
dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level.
Do not overfill. Use ONLY the specified fluid
Ú page 485. After adding any quantity of oil
through the dipstick tube, wait a minimum
of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into
the transmission before rechecking the
fluid level.
NOTE:
If it is necessary to check the transmission
below the operating temperature, the fluid level
should be between the two “COLD” (lower)
holes on the dipstick with the fluid at 60-70°F /
16-21°C. Only use the COLD region of the
dipstick as a rough reference when setting the
fluid level after a transmission service or fluid
change. Re-check the fluid level, and adjust as
required, once the transmission reaches
normal operating temperature.
8. Reinsert the dipstick. Check for leaks.
Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
If it is necessary to check the transmission
below the operating temperature, the fluid level
should be between the two COLD (lower) holes
on the dipstick with the fluid at 68-86°F /
20-30°C. Only use the COLD region of the
dipstick as a rough reference when setting the
fluid level after a transmission service or fluid
change. Re-check the fluid level, and adjust as
required, once the transmission reaches
normal operating temperature.
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C)
it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough
to produce an accurate reading. Run the
engine at idle, in PARK, to warm the fluid.
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C)
it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough
to produce an accurate reading. Run the
engine at idle, in PARK, to warm the fluid.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 429
430 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid And Filter Changes — Eight-Speed
Transmission
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
Fluid And Filter Changes — Six Speed
Transmission
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 394.
In addition, change the fluid and filters if the
fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.),
or if the transmission is disassembled for any
reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid
Ú page 485. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes
should be used in any transmission; only the
approved lubricant should be used.
REAR AXLE AND 4X4 FRONT DRIVING
A
XLE FLUID LEVEL
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil
leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level
Ú page 485. This inspection should be made
with the vehicle in a level position.
To check the axle fluid, park the vehicle on a
level surface. Take a piece of wire (or zip tie)
and make a 90 degree bend two inches from
the end of the wire. Insert the wire into the fill
plug hole and use it like a dipstick. Remove the
wire and measure from the 90 degree bend to
the oil level.
For the 2500 (Non-Power Wagon) axles, the
fluid level should be 4/5 in ± 1/4 in (20.3 mm
± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole for the rear axle
and it should be 1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ±
6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the front axle.
For the 2500 Power Wagon and all 3500 model
axles, the fluid level should be 1/4 in ± 1/4 in
(6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the
9.25 in front, 11.5 in rear axle, and 12.0 in rear
axle.
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 394.
Lubricant Selection
For further information Ú page 485.
NOTE:
The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differ-
ential components. Operation of the vehicle in
water, as may be encountered in some
off-highway types of service, will require
draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder, and
(for six-speed transmissions) will require
more frequent fluid and filter changes
Ú page 485.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 430
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 431
Limited-Slip Differentials DO REQUIRE limited
slip oil additive (friction modifiers).
NOTE:
Slight noise and mild shuddering may be
evident while turning a vehicle with limited slip
differential on concrete or dry pavement. These
conditions should be considered normal opera-
tion of the limited slip differential.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the
filler plug. The fluid level should be to the
bottom edge of the filler plug hole with the
vehicle in a level position.
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 394.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended
fluid Ú page 485.
NOISE CONTROL SYSTEM REQUIRED
M
AINTENANCE & WARRANTY
All vehicles built over 10,000 lbs. (4,535 kg)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and manufactured
for sale and use in the United States are
required to comply with the Federal
Government's Exterior Noise Regulations.
These vehicles can be identified by the Noise
Emission Control Label located in the operator's
compartment.
Required Maintenance For Noise Control
Systems
The following maintenance services must be
performed every six months or 7,500 miles
(12,000 km) whichever comes first, to ensure
proper operation of the noise control systems.
In addition, inspection and service should be
performed anytime a malfunction is observed or
suspected. Proper maintenance of the entire
vehicle will help the effectiveness of the noise
control systems.
Exhaust System
Inspect the entire exhaust system for leaks and
damaged parts. Devices such as hangers,
clamps, and U-bolts should be tight and in good
condition. Damaged components, burned or
blown out mufflers, burned or rusted out
exhaust pipes should be replaced according to
the procedures and specifications outlined in
the appropriate service manual.
Air Cleaner Assembly
Inspect air cleaner housing for proper assembly
and fit. Make certain that the air cleaner is
properly positioned and that the cover is tight.
Check all hoses leading to the air cleaner for
tightness. The air filter element must also be
clean and serviced according to the instructions
outlined in the Scheduled Maintenance section
of this manual.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 431
432 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tampering With Noise Control System
Prohibited
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the
causing thereof: (1) the removal or rendering
inoperative by any person, other than for
purposes of maintenance, repair, or
replacement, of any device or element of design
incorporated into any new vehicle for the
purpose of noise control prior to its sale or
delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is
in use, or (2) the use of the vehicle after such
device or element of design has been removed
or rendered inoperative by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute
tampering are the acts listed below.
AIR CLEANER
Removal of the air cleaner.
Removal of the air cleaner filter element from
the air cleaner housing.
Removal of the air ducting.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Removal or rendering inoperative exhaust
system components including the muffler or
tailpipe.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Removal or rendering inoperative the fan
clutch.
Removal of the fan shroud.
Noise Emission Warranty
The manufacturer warrants that this vehicle as
manufactured by the manufacturer, was
designed, built and equipped to conform at the
time it left the manufacturer's control with all
applicable U.S. EPA Noise Control Regulations.
This warranty covers this vehicle as designed,
built and equipped by the manufacturer, and is
not limited to any particular part, component or
system of the vehicle manufactured by the
manufacturer. Defects in design, assembly or in
any part, component or system of the vehicle as
manufactured by the manufacturer, which, at
the time it left the manufacturer's control,
caused noise emissions to exceed Federal
standards, are covered by this warranty for the
life of the vehicle.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 432
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 433
Maintenance Log and Service Chart (Diesel Engines)
Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log — Insert Month, Day, Year under column mileage closest to the mileage at which service was
performed.
MILES
7,500 15,000 22,500 30,000 37,500 45,000 52,500 60,000
KILOMETERS
12,000 24 ,000 36,000 48,000 60,000 72,000 84,000 96,000
Exhaust system-
inspect
Air cleaner
assembly-inspect
ODOMETER
READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
MILES
67,500 75,000 82,500 90,000 97,500 105,000 112,500 120,000
KILOMETERS
108,000 120,000 132,000 144,000 156,000 168,000 180,000 192,000
Exhaust system-
inspect
Air cleaner
assembly-inspect
ODOMETER
READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 433
434 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If it is necessary to wash the engine compart-
ment, take care not to directly hit the fuse
box, and the windshield wiper motors with
water.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 434
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 435
(Continued)
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This
center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses,
relays, and circuit breakers. A description of
each fuse and component may be stamped on
the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of
each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that
corresponds to the following chart.
Power Distribution Center Location
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 – – Spare
F02 60 Amp Yellow – ABS Pump Motor (HD Only)
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan *
F04 50 Amp Red 400W Inverter *
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 435
436 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor For Air Suspension *
F06 40 Amp Green – Steering Torque Overlay Module (STOM)
F07 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
F08 20 Amp Blue – NOX Sensor*
F09 40 Amp Green – Diesel / Fuel Heater *
F09 30 Amp Pink – Gas / Brake Vacuum Pump *
F10 40 Amp Green – CBC #2 / Ext Lights
F11 40 Amp Green – Brake System Module (ECU and Valves)
F12 40 Amp Green – CBC #3 / Pwr Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor
F14 40 Amp Green – CBC #4 / Ext Lights
F15 30 Amp Pink – Power Side Steps *
F16 30 Amp Pink – Smart-Bar Module *
F17 30 Amp Pink – Winch Control Module *
F19 30 Amp Pink – Diesel SCR Feed *
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F21 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module
F22 20 Amp Blue – Gas / ECM *
F22 25 Amp White – Diesel PCM *
F23 30 Amp Pink – CBC #1 / Int Light
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 436
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 437
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F26 — – Spare
F27 — – Spare
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights *
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights *
F30 30 Amp Pink –
Trailer Tow Receptacle / Trailer Tow (Separate E-Brake) /
Trailer Tow
F31 – – Spare
F32 – – Spare
F33 20 Amp Blue – Trans Control Module *
F34 30 Amp Pink – Vehicle System Interface Module #2 *
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof *
F36 30 Amp Pink – Electric Back Light *
F37 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Frame / Fuel Heater #2 *
F38 30 Amp Pink – Integrated Trailer Brake Module *
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 10 Amp Red Ventilated Seats *
F41 – 10 Amp Red Active Grille Shutter / Active Air Dam *
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F43 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Steering Wheel *
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 437
438 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F46 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters Relay Coil *
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10 Amp Red IP Cluster / CSG
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module *
F51 – 10 Amp Red
Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition Node Module,
Radio Frequency Hub Module / Electric Steering Column
Lock *
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights *
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Non Memory Adjustable Pedals *
F55 – – Spare
F56 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Vapor Blocker Valve *
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow
TCM / PCM / Solenoid Trans Pressure SW (RFE Trans
Only) *
F58 – 10 Amp Red Bed Lighting (LED) *
F60 – — Spare
F61 – 10 Amp Red NH3 Sensor / PM Sensor *
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils / CAPS
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 438
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 439
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / Powertrain Control Module / SRV *
F65 – 10 Amp Red MOD Inverter (Wake Up) / Power Port / USB IP / WCPM *
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof / USB Rear *
F67 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port / USB Front
F68 – 10 Amp Red AEB RACAM HTR *
F69 – 15 Amp Blue SCR Module 12 Volt *
F70 – 30 Amp Green Fuel Pump Motor / K09 RLY Coil Feed *
F71 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier / Active Noise Cancellation *
F72 – — Spare
F73 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Transfer Pump *
F74 – 10 Amp Red Backup Alarm *
F75 – 10 Amp Red ATMM / Coil-SCR Module RLY *
F76 – 10 Amp Red Electronic Stability Control *
F77 – 10 Amp Red
Drivetrain Control Module / Front Axle Disconnect
Module / TCM/ STOM
F78 – 15 Amp Blue
Engine Control Module / Powertrain Control Module / AEB
RACM MOD / Feed To AUX PDC Relay Coils/ HRLS
F79 – 15 Amp Blue ID / Clearance Lights
F80 – 10 Amp Red Overhead Console / Assist / 911 *
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn / Stop Lights *
F82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module / Cruise Control
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 439
440 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F83 – – Spare
F84 – 15 Amp Blue ASBM / HVAC / ICS / Rear Heated Seat Switches
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red
Air Suspension / ITBM / Steering Column Control
Module / MOD Gateway CAN-C Trailer TPM
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlet / Batt
Power Outlet / Acc
F92 – – Spare
F93 – – Spare
F94 – 10 Amp Red
Shift-By-Wire / Transfer Case Switch / Module TPM
Trailer / Module Gateway Can-C Trailer TPM
F95 – 10 Amp Red
Rearview Camera / Park Assist / CHMSL Camera / Blind
Spot Sensor / Surround View Camera
F96 – 10 Amp Red Trailer Camera *
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat Passenger *
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat Driver *
F99 – 10 Amp Red HVAC / In-Car Temperature Sensor / CSG MOD
F100 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters Box Feed *
F101 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat Right *
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 440
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 441
F102 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat Left / Run RLY #3 Coil *
F103 – 10 Amp Red HeadLamp AFLS *
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow UCI Port / USB Rear
* If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi-
cated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 441
442 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
High Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 9005LL
Low & High Beam (LED Reflector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Low & High Beam (LED Projector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Turn Signal / Front Position (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 7444NA
Turn Signal (LED Projector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Position (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 442
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 443
Turn Signal (LED Reflector Headlamp) 7444NA
Front Side Marker (Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Fog Lamps (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
Front Fog Lamps (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 3157K
Premium Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Premium Backup Lamp 7440/W21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921
Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194NA
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Lamp 194
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) 194
Backup Lamp 921
Rear License Plate Lamp 194
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 443
444 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Base Quad: Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Front Park And Turn — If Equipped
Low Beam
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of
the front wheel, remove the fastener, and
lift the cover over the access hole in the
front of the wheel house splash shield.
Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained
through this access hole.
Splash Shield Access Cover
4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel
house splash shield and disengage the bulb
access cover by rotating counterclockwise.
Bulb Access Cover
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the low beam bulb.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of
new bulb and covers.
High Beam
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
Bulb Access Cover
3. Look under the hood and behind the
headlamp to find the high beam bulb
access cover.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened
bulb life will result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type
for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or
type may overheat and cause damage to
the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp
wiring.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 444
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 445
4. Reach behind the headlamp and disengage
the access cover by rotating counter-
clockwise.
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the high beam bulb.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of
new bulb and covers.
Outer Front Park And Turn
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of
the front wheel, remove the fastener, and
lift the cover over the access hole in the
front of the wheel house splash shield.
Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained
through this access hole.
Splash Shield Access Cover
4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel
house splash shield and disengage the side
marker socket by rotating counterclockwise
a quarter turn.
Park And Turn Socket
5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from
the housing.
6. Separate the bulb from the socket without
twisting.
7. Reverse the procedure for installation of
new bulb and covers.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened
bulb life will result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type
for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or
type may overheat and cause damage to
the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp
wiring.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 445
446 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fog Lamps — If Equipped
Please see an authorized dealer for service on
LED and Halogen front fog lamps.
Halogen
See below steps to replace:
1. Reach under and behind the front fascia/
bumper to access the back of the front fog
lamp housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness
connector from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the housing.
Fog Lamp Bulb
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the two screws and push pins that
pass through the bed sheet metal.
Tail Lamp Locations
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward
far enough to unsnap the two receptacles
on the outboard side of the lamp housing
from the two plastic snap post retainers in
the outer box side panel.
Tail Lamp Removed
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors
from the bulb socket.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise a
quarter turn to unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb
life will result.
1 — Tail Lamp
2 — Screws
3 — Fasteners
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 446
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 447
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb
and housing.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
With Cargo Lamp
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the two screws holding the
housing/lens to the body as shown.
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations
2. Separate the connector holding the housing
and wiring harness to the body.
3. Turn the desired bulb socket a quarter turn
and remove the socket and bulb from
housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the
socket.
CHMSL Bulb And Socket
Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop
Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of
bulbs and housing.
Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the screws from the top of the
lamp.
Screw Location From Clearance Lamp
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb
life will result.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb
life will result.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 447
448 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Rotate the bulb socket a quarter turn and
pull it from the lamp assembly.
Removing Bulb Socket From Clearance Lamp
3. Pull the bulb straight from it's socket and
replace.
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheels)
— If Equipped
See below steps to replace:
1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to
gain access to the bulb sockets.
Screw Locations
2. Turn the socket a quarter turn counter-
clockwise to access the bulb.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
4. Reverse the procedure for installation of the
bulbs and housing.
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped
See below steps to replace:
Side Marker Lamp Locations
1. Push rearward on the side marker lamp
assembly.
2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.
3. Turn the socket a quarter turn counter-
clockwise and remove from assembly to
access the bulb.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from socket.
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of the
bulbs and housing.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 448
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 449
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: P215/65R15
95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 449
450 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
EXAMPLE:
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 450
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 451
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 451
452 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 452
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 453
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard Ú page 235.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing Ú page 235.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 453
454 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Over-
loading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle
handling, and increase your stopping dis-
tance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 454
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 455
(Continued)
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING! (Continued)
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 455
456 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining
correct tire inflation pressure is very important.
Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle
operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You
could have a serious collision. Do not drive a
vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at
continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 456
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 457
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed
after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not
designed to be reused when driven under Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the Run Flat mode Ú page 322.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
For further information Ú page 389.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 457
458 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed
Ú page 457. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The
Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will
be found on the original equipment tire
sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example for more
information relating to the Load Index and
Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 449.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 458
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 459
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 459
460 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 242.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary
emergency use only. You can identify if your
vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 460
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 461
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 461
462 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar®
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline addi-
tives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehi-
cle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is rec-
ommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these spe-
cialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will
permanently damage this finish and such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 462
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 463
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow
these recommendations to guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
2500 4x2 (2WD) & 4x4 (4WD) Trim Level Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum projection
beyond tire profile or equivalent)
Tradesman
Rear
LT245/70R17E
LT275/70R18E
U Class
Bighorn
Laramie
Longhorn
LT275/70R18E
LT285/60R20E
Limited LT285/60R20E
Power Wagon (4x4 Only) LT285/70R17D
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 463
464 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3500 SRW 4x2 (2WD) & 4x4 (4WD)
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum projection
beyond tire profile or equivalent)
Tradesman
Bighorn
Limited
Laramie
Longhorn
Rear LT275/70R18E U Class
3500 DRW 4x2 (2WD) Trim Level Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum projection
beyond tire profile or equivalent)
Tradesman
Bighorn
Limited
Laramie
Longhorn
Rear LT235/80R17E U Class
3500 DRW 4x4 (4WD) Trim Level Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum projection
beyond tire profile or equivalent)
Tradesman
Bighorn
Limited
Laramie
Longhorn
Front/Rear LT235/80R17E U Class
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 464
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 465
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 394. More frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid
or unusual wear should be corrected prior to
rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 465
466 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Dual Rear Wheels — If Equipped
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should
be matched for wear to prevent overloading one
tire in a set. To check if tires are even, lay a
straight edge across all four tires. The straight
edge should touch all the tires.
Tire Rotation
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Information System (TPIS):
The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
uses unique sensors in the inner rear wheels
to help identify them from the outer rear
wheels, because of this, the inner and outer
wheel locations can’t be switched.
After a tire rotation is completed, as shown
below, the system can auto learn the loca-
tions of each sensor ID. Auto learning/local-
ization occurs when the vehicle ignition
status is changed from Off to On and speeds
of greater than 5 mph (8km/h) are obtained
and remain over 5 mph (8km/h) for at about
a 15 minute period. You may need to drive
for 20 minutes to account slower speeds and
stops.
If the tires are rotated incorrectly, The auto
localization of the TPIS sensors will fail to
locate correctly resulting in incorrect loca-
tions for the pressure values displayed in the
instrument cluster.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
3500 Dual Rear Tires may only have one
approved direction of rotation. This is to
accommodate the asymmetrical design
(tread pattern) of the On/Off-Road tire and
the use of Outline White Letter (OWL) tires.
When replacing a flat, the spare tire may
have to be remounted on the rim, or
installed at a different location, to maintain
the correct placement of the tire on the
wheel relative to the tire/wheel position on
the truck. For example, if the spare is used
to replace an outer rear tire it will have to be
remounted on the rim so that the wheel is
dished inward. That way the tread design of
asymmetrical tires and the white writing of
the OWL tires will maintain proper position.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 466
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 467
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than
three weeks, we recommend that you take the
following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat build-up and
possible tire failure.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 467
468 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care — If
Equipped
For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold
Tonneau cover, use Mopar® Whitewall & Vinyl
Top Cleaner and Mopar® Leather and Vinyl
Conditioner/Protectant.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 468
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 469
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar® Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Use
precautions to not scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
Fascia/Bumper Care
The customer is responsible to clean and
maintain the chrome components of the
vehicle. Washing away road debris and salt
using an automotive soap. Fascia/bumpers
should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral
Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and
to prevent corrosion.
Your fascia/bumpers are susceptible to
deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride,
magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and
other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Do not use harsh chemicals
or a stiff brush. They can stain or damage the
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the fascia/bumper’s
protective finish. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car
wash soap, Mopar® Chrome Cleaner, or
equivalent is recommended.
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions, strong alkaline additives,
or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket cleaners
and automatic car washes may damage the
fascia/bumper’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent is
recommended.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 469
470 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped
During ownership, the shine and luster of the
Spray-On Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road
dirt, heavy-duty hauling and hard water stains.
Weathering and UV exposure will lead to fading,
dulling, and loss of gloss over time.
To help maintain the appearance of your
Spray-On Bedliner, the manufacturer
recommends you periodically rinse all loose dirt
from your truck bed and clean your truck at
least twice per year using the Mopar® Spray-On
Bedliner Conditioner available at a local
authorized dealer.
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your
Spray-On Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below:
1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to
remove any loose dirt and debris.
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with
a soft cloth or brush.
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar®
Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist
towel or sponge and wipe over the entire
surface of the truck bedliner.
Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to
many different types of chemicals (including
gasoline, oil, hydraulic fluids) for short periods
of time. If a spill occurs on your Spray-On
Bedliner, rinse the truck out as soon as possible
to avoid permanent damage.
Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage
a Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is
when loading a heavy pallet and dragging that
pallet across the floor of the bed. If a nail or
sharp point is exposed under the weight of the
pallet a scratch or tear is possible. While not
covered by your new vehicle warranty, a
cosmetic fix to cover the metal exposed by the
scratch is required. To repair a tear or gouge,
follow the directions provided in the Mopar®
Quick Repair Kit.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the
following manner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp
towel.
For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean,
or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth
and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
WARNING!
Do not use silicon-based protection products
to clean your bedliner. Silicon-based products
can become slippery and may result in
personal injury.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 470
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 471
For grease stains, apply Mopar®
Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth
and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other
form of protectants on Stain Repel products.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
NOTE:
If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper
turning loop for soiling. If soiling is present,
clean with a wet soft cloth until all residue is
removed.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl
upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a
soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically
recommended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and should
be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar® Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 471
472 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar® total care leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or
any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the
upholstery may result.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 472
473
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the
instrument panel, visible through the
windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the
engine off), the brakes will still function.
However, you will experience a substantial
increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses
normal braking capability, the remaining
system will still function with some loss of
overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and activation of the “Brake Warning
Light” and/or the “ABS Warning Light” during
brake use.
HYDRAULIC BRAKE ASSIST — IF
E
QUIPPED
The brake system power assist is provided by a
hydro-boost unit which shares fluid with the
power steering system. You may experience
some clicking or hissing noises from the
hydro-boost system during hard braking
conditions.
NOTE:
Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be
higher than normal until the power steering fluid
reaches operating temperature.
9
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 473
474 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
NOTE:
Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted.
The lug nuts are a two-piece assembly. When
the tires are being rotated or replaced, clean
these lug nuts and add two drops of oil at the
interface between the lug nut/bolt and the
washer. Do not oil wheel studs.
Two-Piece Lug Nut
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly tightened.
Four And Five Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Pattern
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Torque
Lug Nut/
Bolt Type
**Lug
Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
130 Ft-Lb
(176 N·m)
Cone
M14 x
1.50
22 mm
140 Ft-Lb
(190 N·m)
Flanged
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 474
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 475
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and
may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
6.4L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high quality
unleaded gasoline having a posted octane
number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
9
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 475
476 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) I N
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The
manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 476
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 477
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable
supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires
that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low
Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur
maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur
Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum)
to avoid damage to the emissions control
system.
For most year-round service, Number 2 Diesel
Fuel meeting ASTM (formerly known as the
American Society for Testing and Materials)
specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide
good performance. If the vehicle is exposed to
extreme cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or is
required to operate at colder-than-normal
conditions for prolonged periods, use
Climatized Number 2 Diesel Fuel or dilute the
No. 2 diesel fuel with 50% Number 1 Diesel
Fuel. This will provide better protection from
fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters.
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water.
To prevent fuel system trouble, drain the
accumulated water from the fuel/water
separator using the fuel/water separator drain
provided on both fuel filters. If you buy good
quality fuel and follow the cold weather advice
above, fuel conditioners should not be required
in your vehicle. If available in your area, a high
cetane “premium” diesel fuel may offer
improved cold-starting and warm-up
performance.
FUEL SPECIFICATIONS
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine has been
developed to take advantage of the high energy
content and generally lower cost Number 2 Ultra
Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel or Number 2 Ultra Low
Sulfur Climatized Diesel Fuels. Experience has
shown that it also operates on Number 1 Ultra
Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels or other fuels within
specification.
NOTE:
If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gaso-
line on your diesel vehicle, do not start the
vehicle. If you restart your vehicle you risk
damaging the engine and fuel system. Please
call an authorized dealer for service.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel
blending agent. They can be unstable under
certain conditions and hazardous or
explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains
on, DO NOT START engine before you drain
the water from the fuel filter(s) to avoid
engine damage Ú page 415.
9
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 477
478 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
A maximum blend of 20% biodiesel meeting
ASTM specification D-7467 may be used with
your Cummins® diesel engine. (Pickup
models configured with B20 Capability.)
In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
tives are not necessary for the proper opera-
tion of your Cummins® diesel engine.
However, if seasonably adjusted fuel is not
available and you are operating below 20°F
(-6°C), Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treat-
ment (or equivalent) may be beneficial to
avoid fuel gelling.
Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel should
only be used where extended arctic condi-
tions (0°F or -18°C) exist.
BIODIESEL FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Pickup Models And Chassis Cab Models
Ordered With B20 Option
Your vehicle has been validated and approved
for the use of biodiesel in blends up to 20%
(B20) provided that you comply with the
requirements outlined below. It is important
that you understand and comply with these
requirements. Failure to comply with Oil Change
requirements for vehicles operating on
biodiesel blends up to B20 will result in
premature engine wear. Such wear is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable
resources typically derived from animal fat,
rapeseed oil (Rapeseed Methyl Ester (RME)
base), or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester (SME or
SOME) base). Biodiesel fuel has inherent
limitations which require that you understand
and adhere to the following requirements if you
use blends of biodiesel greater then 5% but not
greater than 20% (B6-B20). There are no
unique restrictions for the use of B5. Use of
blends greater than 20% is not approved. Use of
blends greater than 20% can result in engine
damage. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM
Standards
The quality of biodiesel fuel may vary widely.
Only fuel produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the
following specifications may be blended to
meet biodiesel blend (B6–B20) fuel meeting
ASTM specification D-7467:
Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification
D-975 and biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting
ASTM specification D-6751.
Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel
Within Six Months Of Manufacture
Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which
can result in long term storage problems. Fuel
produced to approved ASTM standards, if
stored properly, provides for protection against
fuel oxidation for up to six months.
Fuel Water Separation — Must Use
Mopar®/Cummins® Approved Fuel Filter
Elements
You must use Mopar®/Cummins® approved
fuel filter elements in both your engine mounted
filter and frame mounted filter.
Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and
water accelerates microbial growth. Your
Mopar®/Cummins® filtration system is
designed to provide adequate fuel water
separation capabilities.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 478
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 479
Bio-Diesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient
Temperatures
Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient
temperatures, which may pose problems for
both storage and operation. Precautions can be
necessary at low ambient temperatures, such
as storing the fuel in a heated building or a
heated storage tank, or using cold temperature
additives.
Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
Required Oil Change Interval
Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been
observed with the use of biodiesel fuel. Fuel in
oil must not exceed 5%. To ensure this limit is
met your oil change interval must be
maintained to the following schedule:
Ram PickUp 2500/3500 Only — 15,000 Miles
(24,000 km)*
(*unless otherwise notified with a oil service
message.)
CAUTION!
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24 000 km)
if operation occurs with greater than 5%
biodiesel blends. Oil change intervals should
not exceed 6 months in either case. Failure
to comply with these Oil Change require-
ments for vehicles operating on biodiesel
blends up to B20 may result in premature
engine wear. Such wear is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
B20 Biodiesel capable: The engine may
suffer severe damage if operated with
concentrations of Biodiesel higher than
20%.
9
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 479
480 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
6.4L GASOLINE ENGINE
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2500/3500 Shortbed Models 31 Gallons 117 Liters
2500/3500 Longbed Models 32 Gallons 121 Liters
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models — If Equipped 50 Gallons 189 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4L Engine 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
6.4L Engine 16.6 Quarts 15.7 Liters
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2500/3500 Standard Cab Longbed Models 28 Gallons 106 Liters
2500/3500 Crew/Mega Cab Shortbed Models 31 Gallons 117 Liters
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models 32 Gallons 121 Liters
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models — If Equipped 50 Gallons 189 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 5.7 Gallons 21 Liters
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 480
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 481
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
6.4L GASOLINE ENGINE
Engine Oil With Filter
6.7L Engine 12 Quarts 11.4 Liters
Cooling System
6.7L Engine 22.0 Quarts 20.8 Liters
US Metric
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of
operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic
engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of
SN. The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or
equivalent Mopar® engine oil meeting the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating
temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine
Oil Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/
USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
9
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 481
482 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil
In ambient temperatures above 0°F (-18°C), we recommend you use
10W-30 engine oil such as Mopar®, Shell Rotella and Shell Rimula that
meets the manufacturer Material Standard MS-10902 and the API CK-4
engine oil category is required. Products meeting Cummins® CES
20081 may also be used. The identification of these engine oils is
typically located on the back of the oil container.
In ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), we recommend you use
5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as Mopar®, Shell Rotella and Shell
Rimula that meets the manufacturer Material Standard MS-10902 and
the API CK-4 engine oil category is required.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine
Oil Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/
USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Filters
We recommend you use Mopar® Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating
(engine mounted filter). Must meet 5 micron rating (chassis mounted
filter). Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturer’s filtration
and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life
and reliability.
Crankcase Ventilation Filter We recommend you use Mopar® CCV Filter.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 482
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 483
Fuel Selection
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle.
Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur
Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of
Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid
damage to the emissions control system.
For most year-round service, Number 2 Diesel fuel meeting ASTM
specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance.
If climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel is not available, and you are
operating below (20°F/-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions, Mopar®
Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent) is recommended to avoid
gelling.
This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5% biodiesel
meeting ASTM specification D-975. Pickup models configured with
optional B20 capability, are additionally compatible with 20% biodiesel
meeting ASTM specification D-7467.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Mopar® Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that has
been API Certified to the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API
Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system damage. You can receive
assistance in locating DEF in the United States by calling 866-RAM-INFO
(866-726-4636). In Canada call 1–800–465–2001 (English) or
1–800–387–9983 (French).
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
9
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 483
484 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 484
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 485
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
6.4L GASOLINE ENGINE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – Eight-Speed Automatic
Use only Mopar® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case
We recommend you use Mopar® Transfer Case Lubricant for Borg Warner
44-44 and 44-45.
Front and Rear Axle
We recommend you use SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant in 9.25 Front, 11.5 and 12.0 (Single Rear Wheel) Rear Axles.
Use Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 in 12.0 (Dual
Rear Wheel) Rear axles. Limited slip additive is required for limited slip
axles.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar® DOT 3.
Power Steering Reservoir
We recommend you use Mopar® Power Steering Fluid +4 or Mopar®
ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
9
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 485
486 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – 68RFE
Only use ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid
may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We
recommend Mopar® ATF+4 fluid.
Automatic Transmission – AS69RC
Only use Mopar® ASRC Automatic Transmission Fluid or
equivalent.Failure to use the proper fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend you use Mopar® BW44–44 Transfer Case Fluid.
Front and Rear Axle Fluid
We recommend you use SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant in 9.25 Front, 11.5 and 12.0 (Single Rear Wheel) Rear Axles.
Use Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 in 12.0 (Dual
Rear Wheel) Rear axles. Limited slip additive is required for limited slip
axles.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar® DOT 3.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 486
487
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with
the service manager. Keep a maintenance log
of your vehicle's service history. This can often
provide a clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these
arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to
be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have
the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer service manager first. Most
matters can be resolved with this process.This
is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some
reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to
resolve the concern, you may contact the FCA
US LLC's Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC C USTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
10
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 487
488 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, FCA US LLC has installed special
TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with FCA
US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar®
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar® Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the FCA
US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in
vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 488
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 489
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts &
accessories and factory filled fluids are
available from an authorized dealer. They are
recommended for your vehicle to keep it
operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON , D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to
www.safercar.gov
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from
www.safercar.gov
.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
www.apps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
a complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These manuals make it easy to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
10
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 489
490 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all
tools and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or
Diagnostic Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 490
491
INDEX
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
............................................................292
A
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise
Control)
................................................ 200 , 202
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............425
Adding Fuel .......................................... 230 , 232
Additives, Fuel ...............................................475
Adjust
Down ...........................................................37
Forward ....................................................... 37
Rearward..................................................... 37
Up................................................................ 37
Adjustable Pedals ............................................ 43
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................299
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ......................................343
Air Bag Warning Light ................................341
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 348, 393
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................393
If Deployment Occurs ................................347
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................344
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............349
Maintenance .............................................349
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............341
Transporting Pets ......................................367
Air Bag Light................................123 , 341, 367
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter)
................................................... 410 , 431
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 412
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 412
Air Conditioner System ................................. 412
Air Conditioning ................................................63
Air Conditioning Filter ..............................66 , 412
Air Conditioning System ...................................65
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................66
Air Filter ........................................................ 410
Air Pressure
Tires
......................................................... 455
Alarm
Security Alarm ....................................25 , 125
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.........................................................10
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 424 , 480
Disposal ................................................... 426
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 305
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 129
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 311
Audio Settings ............................................... 286
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 257
Auto Down Power Windows .............................80
Automatic Door Locks ......................................30
Automatic Headlights .......................................54
Automatic Tailgate Release .............................84
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............65
Automatic Transmission .......................157 , 430
Adding Fluid .............................................. 430
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 430
Fluid Change ............................................. 430
Fluid Level Check ...................................... 428
Fluid Type ........................................430 , 485
Shifting ..................................................... 162
Special Additives ...................................... 428
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ... 160
AutoPark ....................................................... 138
AUX Camera .........................................223 , 229
Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................. 313
Axle Fluid.............................................. 430 , 485
Axle Lubrication ............................................ 430
B
Back-Up
......................................................... 221
Back-Up Camera ........................................... 221
Bar, Stabilizer/Sway System ......................... 180
Battery ................................................. 125 , 407
Blanket ..................................................... 148
Charging System Light .............................. 125
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................17
Battery Saver Feature ......................................56
Belts, Seat .................................................... 367
11
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 491
492
Blind Spot Monitoring
....................................313
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
................294
Body Builders Guide ........................................ 10
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................420
B-Pillar Location .............................................453
Brake Assist System ......................................306
Brake Control System ....................................306
Brake Fluid .......................................... 427 , 485
Brake System ...................................... 427 , 473
Fluid Check ...............................................427
Master Cylinder .........................................427
Parking ......................................................154
Warning Light ............................................124
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................157
Bulb Replacement .........................................442
Bulbs, Light .......................................... 369 , 442
C
Cab Top Clearance Lights ..............................447
Camera ..........................................................221
Camera, AUX ........................................ 223 , 229
Camera, Rear ...................................... 221 , 224
Camper ............................................................ 95
Capacities, Fluid ............................................480
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ................................................404
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................425
Car Washes ...................................................468
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............................ 369
Cargo Light.......................................................55
CD................................................................. 288
Cellular Phone .............................................. 301
Center High Mounted Stop Light ................... 447
Center Seat Storage Compartment ..................68
Charge Air Cooler .......................................... 427
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 449
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light)
............................................................. 134
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 367
Checks, Safety .............................................. 367
Child Restraint .............................................. 350
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ........................................... 353
Child Seat Installation ..................... 360 , 361
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 359
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 351
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 357
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 354
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 352
Seating Positions ...................................... 353
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 475
Cleaning
Wheels
..................................................... 461
Climate Control ................................................59
Automatic ....................................................60
Manual ........................................................63
Cold Weather Operation ............................... 140
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 460
Contract, Service ........................................... 488
Controls ........................................................ 279
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 425
Cooling System ............................................. 424
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 425
Coolant Level ...................................424 , 426
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 480
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 426
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 424
Inspection ................................................. 426
Points To Remember ................................ 426
Pressure Cap ............................................ 425
Radiator Cap ............................................. 425
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) .........................424 , 480, 481
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 468
Cruise Control (Speed Control) .............200 , 202
Cruise Light ................................................... 133
Customer Assistance .................................... 487
Cybersecurity ................................................ 257
D
Daytime Running Lights
...................................53
Dealer Service ............................................... 408
Defroster, Rear Window ...................................63
Defroster, Windshield ............................ 63 , 367
Deleting A Phone ........................................... 294
Diagnostic System, Onboard ......................... 133
Diesel Exhaust Brake .................................... 155
Diesel Fuel .................................................... 477
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 492
493
Diesel Fuel Requirements
.............................477
Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming .....................418
Differential, Limited Slip ................................191
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................390
Disc Drive ......................................................288
Disconnecting ................................................294
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)
.......................426
Disturb...........................................................297
Door Ajar........................................................126
Door Ajar Light ...............................................126
Door Locks
Automatic .................................................... 30
Doors ............................................................... 26
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter ............415
Driver Memory Presets ..................................285
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 35
Driving
Off-Pavement
............................................182
Off-Road ....................................................182
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .....................................254
Dual Rear Wheels ................................ 466 , 474
E
Electric Brake Control System .......................306
Anti-Lock Brake System .............................305
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 307 , 313
Electrical Power Outlets ................................... 75
Electronic Range Select (ERS) ............. 161 , 166
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 307
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 125
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case .... 169, 172
Emergency Braking ....................................... 154
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ..................... 389
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 370
Jump Starting ........................................... 384
Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 134
Engine.........................................404 , 405, 406
Air Cleaner ................................................ 410
Block Heater .................................... 143 , 152
Break-In Recommendations ..................... 153
Compartment .................................. 405 , 406
Compartment Identification ...................... 404
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 481
Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 369
Fails To Start ............................................ 139
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 139
Fuel Requirements .......................... 475 , 480
Identification ................................... 405 , 406
Idling ........................................................ 149
Jump Starting ........................................... 384
Oil ...........................................408 , 480, 481
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 404
Oil Filter .................................................... 409
Oil Reset ................................................... 112
Oil Selection .................................... 408 , 480
Oil Synthetic ............................................. 409
Overheating .............................................. 389
Runaway ................................................... 230
Starting ..................................................... 137
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature
................................................ 348 , 393
Entry System, Illuminated ................................57
Ethanol.......................................................... 475
Exhaust Brake ............................................... 155
Exhaust Gas Cautions ................................... 369
Exhaust System ..........................369 , 422, 431
Exterior Lighting ...............................................52
Exterior Lights ........................................ 52 , 369
F
Filters
Air Cleaner
................................................ 410
Air Conditioning ................................. 66 , 412
Engine Fuel ............................................... 415
Engine Oil ........................................ 409 , 481
Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 409
Flashers
Turn Signals .............................. 55 , 132, 369
Flash-To-Pass ...................................................54
Flat Tire Stowage .......................................... 381
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 480
Fluid Leaks.................................................... 369
Fluid Level Checks
Brake
........................................................ 427
Fluid, Brake ................................................... 485
Fog Lights .............................................. 55 , 446
Fold Flat Load Floor .........................................72
11
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 493
494
Fold-Flat Seats
................................................. 35
Forward Collision Warning .............................320
Four Wheel Drive ...........................................168
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...............................370
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................389
Front Axle (Differential) ..................................430
Fuel ..................................................... 475 , 477
Adding ............................................. 230 , 232
Additives ...................................................475
Clean Air ....................................................475
Diesel ........................................................477
Ethanol ......................................................475
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...................................231
Filter ..........................................................415
Gasoline ....................................................475
Light ..........................................................128
Materials Added ........................................475
Methanol ...................................................475
Octane Rating ................................. 475 , 481
Requirements ........................ 475 , 477, 480
Specifications ............................................477
Tank Capacity ............................................480
Fueling...........................................................232
Fuses .............................................................434
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
.................... 48
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............................231
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................475
Gasoline, Reformulated .................................475
Gauges
Voltage
..................................................... 146
Gear Ranges ................................................. 163
Gear Selector Override ................................. 387
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 472
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 237
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 236
Guide
Body Builders ..............................................10
GVWR............................................................ 235
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
.................................... 254
Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 370
Head Restraints ...............................................40
Head Rests ......................................................40
Headlights .................................................... 444
Automatic High Beam ..................................53
Cleaning ................................................... 468
High Beam ...................................................53
Lights On Reminder .....................................55
Passing ........................................................54
Switch..........................................................52
Heated Mirrors .................................................48
Heated Seats ...................................................39
Heater, Engine Block .................................... 152
Hill Descent Control ...................................... 310
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 310
Hill Start Assist .............................................. 311
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 240
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................48
Hood Prop ........................................................83
Hood Release ...................................................83
Hub Caps ...................................................... 383
I
Idle-Up Feature
............................................. 149
Ignition .............................................................20
Switch ..........................................................20
Illuminated Entry ..............................................57
Inside Rearview Mirror .................... 43 , 44, 371
Instrument Cluster ............ 106, 107, 109, 110
Display ...................................................... 111
Engine Oil Reset ....................................... 112
Instrument Cluster Display
Audio ........................................................ 115
Commercial Settings ................................. 118
Driver Assist .............................................. 113
Fuel Economy ........................................... 114
Location And Controls ............................... 111
Messages ................................................. 115
Screen Setup ............................................ 115
Speedometer ............................................ 113
Trailer Tow ................................................ 114
Trip ........................................................... 114
Vehicle Info ............................................... 113
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 471
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 494
495
Integrated Trailer Brake Control
....................243
Interior Appearance Care ...............................470
Interior Lights .................................................. 56
Intervention Regeneration Strategy ..... 118, 419
Inverter Outlet (115V) ...................................... 77
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ................................... 74
J
Jack Location
.................................................374
Jump Starting ................................................384
K
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs
.............. 19
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry)
............................................................... 17
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry) ............................................................... 19
Keyless Enter-N-Go ........................28 , 137, 141
Passive Entry ............................................... 28
Keys.................................................................16
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals
........................ 55
Lane Change Assist ......................................... 55
LaneSense ....................................................218
Latches..........................................................369
Hood ...........................................................83
Lead Free Gasoline ........................................475
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................369
Life Of Tires ................................................... 457
Light Bulbs ........................................... 369 , 442
Lights ............................................................ 369
4WD High ................................................. 131
4WD Lock ................................................. 131
4WD Low .................................................. 131
Adaptive Cruise Control ................... 126 , 132
Air Bag .................................... 123 , 341, 367
Air Suspension ................................ 130 , 131
Air Suspension Fault ................................. 126
Automatic Diesel Exhaust Brake .............. 132
Automatic High Beam ..................................53
Brake Assist Warning ............................... 309
Brake Warning .......................................... 124
Bulb Replacement .................................... 442
Cab Top Clearance ................................... 447
Cargo ..................................................55 , 130
Center Mounted Stop ............................... 447
Cold Ambient Derate Mode ...................... 130
Courtesy/Reading .......................................56
Cruise ....................................................... 133
Cruise Control Fault .................................. 130
Daytime Running .........................................53
Diesel Exhaust Brake ............................... 130
ECO .......................................................... 132
Electronic Stability Control ........................ 127
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator
............................................... 125
Exterior ...............................................52 , 369
Fog .................................................. 132 , 446
Forward Collision Warning ........................ 130
Four Wheel Drive Indicator ....................... 177
Front And Rear Axle Lock .......................... 131
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 370
Headlights ............................................52 , 54
High Beam ...................................................53
Hill Descent Control .................................. 133
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 310
Hood Open ................................................ 124
Illuminated Entry .........................................57
Interior .........................................................56
LaneSense .................... 127 , 128, 132, 133
Lights On Reminder .....................................55
Loose Fuel Filler Cap ................................ 128
Low Coolant Level ..................................... 128
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid .......................... 132
Low Fuel ................................................... 128
Low Washer Fluid ..................................... 128
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ....... 126
NEUTRAL .................................................. 131
Oil Temperature ........................................ 125
Park .......................................................... 132
Passing ........................................................54
Rear Axle Lock .......................................... 131
Rear Axle Locker Fault .............................. 129
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 123
Security Alarm .......................................... 125
Service...................................................... 442
Service 4WD ............................................. 130
Service Forward Collision .......................... 130
11
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 495
496
Side Marker
...............................................448
Snowplow ..................................................131
Sway Bar ...................................................130
Sway Bar Fault ..........................................130
TOW HAUL .................................................130
Traction Control .........................................309
Trailer Brake Disconnected .......................126
Trailer Merge Assist ...................................128
Transfer Case ............................................177
Transmission Temperature .......................126
Turn Signals ...........55, 132, 369, 444, 446
Wait To Start .............................................132
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions ..125
Water In Fuel .............................................132
Limited-Slip Differential ....................... 191 , 430
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .....................122
Load Shed Battery Saver On ..........................122
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ............122
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............122
Loading Vehicle .............................................235
Tires ..........................................................453
Locks
Automatic Door
........................................... 30
Child Protection ........................................... 30
Power Door..................................................27
Low Tire Pressure System .............................322
Lubrication, Body ...........................................420
Lug Nuts/Bolts ..............................................474
M
Maintenance
....................................................83
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 407
Maintenance Plan ......................................... 400
Maintenance Schedule ............... 394, 398, 400
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine)
................................................ 126 , 134
Manual
Park Release ............................................ 388
Service ..................................................... 489
Media Hub .......................................................74
Media Mode .................................................. 287
Memory Seat ...................................................34
Memory Settings ..............................................34
Methanol ...................................................... 475
Mirrors .............................................................43
Electric Powered ..........................................46
Heated.........................................................48
Memory .......................................................34
Outside ........................................................45
Rearview......................................43 , 44, 371
Trailer Towing ..............................................48
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle.........................................................10
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 322
Mopar Parts .................................................. 489
MP3 Control .....................................................74
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................53
N
Navigation System (Uconnect GPS)
.............. 221
New Vehicle Break-In Period ......................... 153
Noise Control
Maintenance ............................................ 431
Tampering Prohibited ............................... 432
Noise Emission Warranty ..................... 431 , 432
O
Occupant Restraints
..................................... 330
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ...................... 475
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) .......... 182, 255
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) .......... 182, 255
Oil Change Indicator ...................................... 398
Oil Filter, Change ........................................... 409
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 409
Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 125
Oil Reset ....................................................... 112
Oil, Engine ............................................408 , 481
Capacity .................................................... 480
Dipstick..................................................... 407
Disposal .................................................... 409
Filter ................................................ 409 , 481
Filter Disposal ........................................... 409
Identification Logo .................................... 409
Materials Added To ................................... 409
Pressure Warning Light ............................. 125
Recommendation ...................408 , 409, 480
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 496
497
Synthetic
...................................................409
Viscosity ....................................................480
Onboard Diagnostic System ..........................133
Operating Precautions ...................................133
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ........................................489
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................ 45
Overdrive .......................................................167
Overdrive OFF Switch .....................................167
Overheating, Engine ......................................389
P
Paint Care
......................................................468
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
.....................................................292
Parking Brake ................................................154
ParkSense System, Rear ...............................213
Passive Entry ................................................... 28
Pedals, Adjustable ........................................... 43
Perform Service Indicator, Reset ...................399
Pets ...............................................................367
Phone Mode ..................................................290
Pickup Box ................................................ 87 , 90
Pinch Protection .............................................. 82
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...........453
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses)
.......................435
Door Locks .................................................. 27
Mirrors......................................................... 46
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ......... 75, 77
Seats ...........................................................37
Side Steps ...................................................28
Sliding Rear Window ....................................81
Steering .......................................................46
Sunroof........................................................81
Windows ......................................................79
Power Seats
Down
...........................................................37
Forward .......................................................37
Rearward .....................................................37
Recline ........................................................38
Tilt ...............................................................38
Up................................................................37
Power Steering Fluid ..................................... 485
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 338
Presets ......................................................... 285
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................................................. 338
R
Radial Ply Tires ............................................. 456
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .. 424, 425
Radio
Presets ..................................................... 285
Radio Controls .............................................. 279
Radio Mode .................................................. 279
Radio Operation ................................... 279 , 301
Radio Remote Controls ................................. 279
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...........................59
Ramp Travel Index ........................................ 182
Rear Axle (Differential) .................................. 430
Rear Camera ................................................. 224
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ............................89
Rear Cross Path ............................................ 316
Rear ParkSense System ................................ 213
Rear Window, Sliding .......................................81
Reclining Rear Seats ........................................37
Recreational Towing ...................................... 250
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..... 252
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ............................................ 253
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 475
Refrigerant .................................................... 412
Release, Hood ..................................................83
Release, Tailgate .............................................84
Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 331
Remote Keyless Entry
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 279
Remote Start (Diesel) .......................................24
Remote Start (Gasoline) ...................................21
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode
...............................23
Replacement Bulbs ....................................... 442
Replacement Tires ........................................ 458
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 489
Resetting Perform Service Indicator ............. 399
Restraints, Child ............................................ 350
Restraints, Head ..............................................40
Rotation, Tires ............................................... 465
11
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 497
498
S
Safety
............................................................278
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .........................367
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................368
Safety Defects, Reporting ..............................489
Safety Features .............................................278
Safety Information, Tire .................................449
Safety Tips .....................................................367
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................................369
Satellite Radio ...............................................281
Saved Radio Stations ....................................285
Schedule, Maintenance .................................394
Seat Belt Reminder .......................................123
Seat Belts ............................................ 331 , 367
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...........................335
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ......335
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage .............................................335
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ............339
Child Restraints .........................................350
Energy Management Feature ....................339
Extender ....................................................337
Front Seat ....................................... 331 , 334
Inspection .................................................367
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ....................334
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...................335
Operating Instructions ...............................334
Pregnant Women ......................................338
Pretensioners ............................................338
Reminder ..................................................331
Seat Belt Extender .................................... 337
Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 338
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 331
Untwisting Procedure ............................... 335
Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 471
Seats ........................................................35 , 37
Adjustment ...........................................35 , 37
Easy Entry ....................................................38
Folding Floor ................................................72
Head Restraints ...........................................40
Memory .......................................................34
Power ..........................................................37
Rear Folding ................................................35
Reclining Rear .............................................37
Tilting...........................................................35
Security Alarm .........................................25 , 125
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 481
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................19
Service Assistance ........................................ 487
Service Contract ........................................... 488
Service Manuals ........................................... 489
Settings, Audio .............................................. 286
Shift Lever Override ...................................... 387
Shifting ......................................................... 156
Automatic Transmission .................. 157 , 162
Transfer Case ........................................... 176
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N)
........................................... 252
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer
Case Neutral (N)
................................... 253
Side Steps, Power ............................................28
Signals, Turn ................................. 55 , 132, 369
Sirius Satellite Radio ..................................... 281
Favorites ................................................... 284
Replay....................................................... 283
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM
.......................................... 284
Favorites ................................................... 284
Replay....................................................... 283
Sliding Rear Window, Power ............................81
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 463
Snow Plow ..................................................... 248
Snow Tires .................................................... 459
Spare Tires ...........................................460 , 461
Spark Plugs ................................................... 481
Speed Control
Accel/Decel
.............................................. 202
Cancel....................................................... 202
Resume .................................................... 202
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .............200 , 202
Stabilizer/Sway Bar System .......................... 180
Starting .......................................136 , 137, 140
Automatic Transmission .................. 136 , 140
Button..........................................................20
Cold Weather ............................................ 140
Engine Block Heater ................................. 143
Engine Fails To Start ................................. 139
Starting And Operating .................................. 137
Starting Procedures .............................137 , 140
Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines) ............ 140
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 498
499
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines)
................136
Steering
Tilt Column .................................................. 31
Wheel, Heated ...................................... 31 , 32
Wheel, Tilt ................................................... 31
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......................279
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System .......279
Steps, Power Side ............................................28
Storage ............................................................ 68
Storage Compartment, Center Seat ................ 68
Storage, Vehicle ......................................66 , 467
Store Radio Presets .......................................285
Storing Your Vehicle ......................................467
Sun Roof ................................................... 81 , 83
Sunglasses Storage ......................................... 70
Sunshade Operation ........................................ 83
Sway Control, Trailer ......................................313
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................................409
T
Tailgate, Electronic Lowering ........................... 84
Telescoping Steering Column .......................... 31
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............ 65
Tilt
Down
...........................................................38
Up................................................................ 38
Tilt Steering Column ........................................ 31
Tip Start ............................................... 136 , 141
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...........453
Tire Markings .................................................449
Tire Safety Information ................................. 449
Tires...................................368 , 455, 460, 466
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................. 457
Air Pressure .............................................. 455
Chains ...................................................... 463
Compact Spare ......................................... 460
Dual................................................. 466 , 474
General Information ........................ 455 , 460
High Speed ............................................... 456
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 455
Life Of Tires .............................................. 457
Load Capacity ........................................... 453
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
........................................ 128 , 322
Quality Grading ......................................... 466
Radial ....................................................... 456
Replacement ............................................ 458
Rotation.................................................... 465
Safety .............................................. 449 , 455
Sizes......................................................... 449
Snow Tires ................................................ 459
Spare Tires ...................................... 460 , 461
Spinning ................................................... 457
Trailer Towing ........................................... 242
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 457
Wheel Nut Torque ..................................... 474
To Open Hood ..................................................83
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 241
Tonneau Cover ........................................95 , 468
Tonneau Cover Cleaning ............................... 468
Torque Converter Clutch ............................... 168
Towing..................................................236 , 390
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 390
Guide ........................................................ 241
Recreational ............................................. 250
Weight ...................................................... 241
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 250
Traction ......................................................... 254
Traction Control ............................................ 313
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 313
Trailer Towing ................................................ 236
Hitches ..................................................... 240
Minimum Requirements ........................... 241
Mirrors .........................................................48
Tips ........................................................... 247
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 241
Wiring ....................................................... 245
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 241
Trailer Weight ................................................ 241
Transfer Case ................................................ 431
Electronically Shifted .......................169 , 172
Fluid.......................................................... 485
Transmission................................................. 157
Automatic ...............................157 , 162, 428
Fluid.......................................................... 485
Maintenance ............................................ 428
Shifting ..................................................... 156
Transporting Pets .......................................... 367
Tread Wear Indicators ................................... 457
Turn Signals .........................55 , 132, 444, 446
11
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 499
500
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features
..................................296
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
....................................299
Uconnect Phone ............................................292
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress
......................297
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No
Call Currently In Progress
......................297
Bluetooth Communication Link .................301
Call Continuation .......................................299
Call Controls ..............................................296
Call Termination ........................................298
Cancel Command ......................................292
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing
................294
Help Command .........................................292
Join Calls ...................................................298
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite .... 295
Making A Second Call While Current Call
Is In Progress
........................................298
Managing Your Favorites ...........................295
Natural Speech .........................................292
Operation ..................................................291
Overview....................................................290
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
...................................................292
Phonebook Download ...............................295
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...............298
Power-Up ...................................................301
Recent Calls ............................................. 297
Redial ....................................................... 298
To Remove A Favorite ............................... 296
Toggling Between Calls ............................. 298
Touch-Tone Number Entry ........................ 297
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ....299
Voice Command ....................................... 299
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features
.............28
Passive Entry Programming .........................28
Uconnect System .......................................... 276
Uconnect Voice Command ...............................32
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 466
Unleaded Gasoline ....................................... 475
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................... 335
USB..................................................................74
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area ...........................89
V
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
.............. 473
Vehicle Loading ................................... 235 , 453
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 408
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................10
Vehicle Storage .......................................66 , 467
Ventilated Seats ..............................................40
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................32
Voltmeter ...................................................... 146
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)
................................................. 127
Warranty Information .................................... 489
Washers, Windshield .................................... 407
Washing Vehicle ............................................ 468
Water
Driving Through
........................................ 254
Water Separator
Diesel Fuel
................................................ 415
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 461
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 461
Wheel Covers ................................................ 383
Winch ............................................................ 191
Accessories............................................... 193
Operation .................................................. 193
Rigging Techniques ................................... 199
Usage ....................................................... 191
Wind Buffeting .................................................81
Window Fogging ...............................................66
Windows ..........................................................79
Power...........................................................79
Rear Sliding .................................................81
Reset Auto-Up ..............................................80
Windshield Defroster .................................... 367
Windshield Washers .............................. 58 , 407
Fluid................................................... 58 , 407
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 420
Windshield Wipers ...........................................58
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 420
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................59
Wireless Charging Pad .....................................78
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 500
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself
unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular
telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired
with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated
non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/
or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting
www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and
your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
U.S.
2021 RAM 2500/3500
OWNER’S MANUAL
2021 RAM 2500/3500
SECOND EDITION V1
21_DJD2_OM_EN_USC
©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app,
go directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
